JP2018019774A - Game machine - Google Patents

Abstract

PROBLEM TO BE SOLVED: To provide a game machine capable of reducing a sense of incongruity of a color tone of a projection image according to a position in a screen, caused by a projection distance.SOLUTION: A game machine includes a projector 32 that projects an image from a projection direction oblique to a screen. Deviation of a color tone of the projection image in an image display area generated by a projection state from the projector 32 to a main screen 5 is adjusted by a color correction filter 28F.SELECTED DRAWING: Figure 2

Description

  The present invention relates to a gaming machine.

  Conventional pachinko gaming machines have been devised to entertain players by displaying effect images on a display device such as a liquid crystal display device. In this type of pachinko game machine, there is a game machine that projects an image from a front of a game board with a projector or the like instead of a liquid crystal display device or the like when displaying an effect. (For example, see Patent Document 1)

JP 2009-89813 A

  However, in the conventional gaming machine disclosed in Patent Document 1, the distance between the projector (projection means) and the screen on which the image projected from the projector is displayed may vary depending on the display position of the image. In this case, the color tone of the image projected from the projector may be uncomfortable.

  Therefore, the problem to be solved by the present invention is to provide a gaming machine that can reduce a sense of incongruity in the color tone of the projected image according to the position in the screen caused by the projection distance.

(1) A gaming machine (for example, a pachinko gaming machine 1, a slot machine, or the like) according to one embodiment of the present invention is a gaming machine capable of performing a game, and is projected from a predetermined display image (for example, a projector 32). The image displayed on the image display area from a projection direction that is oblique to the image display area (for example, the image display area 5X formed on the main screen 5) that displays the image displayed on the main screen 5). Projection means (for example, projector 32) for projecting, frame buffer (for example, frame buffer area allocated to SDRAM 263) for storing display image data corresponding to the display image, and original image data (for example, image data ROM 261) Display image data based on the original image data stored in the frame buffer and stored in the frame buffer A shadow control means (for example, VDP 262), and when the projection means displays a display image based on the display image data stored in the real drawing area 262A on the main screen 5, the display image is displayed. The display image data generated without converting the original image data when it is in a proper display position is converted into a first data storage area (for example, an actual drawing area 262A allocated to the SDRAM 263) in the frame buffer. , The display image is displayed in the image display area (for example, the display image stored in the actual drawing area 262A is displayed in the image display area 5X), and the projection is performed. The control means stores the display image data generated without converting the original image data in the first data storage area of the frame buffer. When the display image is projected outside the image display area (for example, the projector 32 is not in the normal position and the display image stored in the actual drawing area 262A is displayed in the image display area 5X). The display image data is generated by converting the original image data so that the display image is displayed in the image display area (for example, adjusting the image displayed on the main screen 5), The generated display image data is a first data storage area in the frame buffer and a second data storage area different from the first data storage area (for example, an area excluding the actual drawing area 262A in the drawing area 262R) ), And the deviation of the color tone of the projected image in the image display area caused by the projection state from the projection unit to the image display area is adjusted. (For example, the contrast of the lower part of the image displayed in the image display area 5X is increased (darkened) by the color correction filter 28F).

  According to the above configuration, it is possible to suitably perform image representation.

(2) In the gaming machine of the above (1), the color tone may be adjusted by video control as the adjustment (the contrast of the lower part of the image may be increased (darkened) by the color correction filter 28F).

  According to the above configuration, image expression can be suitably performed.

(3) In the gaming machine of the above (1) or (2), a predetermined filter (color correction filter 28F) is disposed between the projection means and the image display area (the color correction filter 28F is connected to the projector 32 and the main screen). 5 may be disposed on the surface of the reflection mirror 28 between the first and second mirrors.

  According to the above configuration, image expression can be suitably performed.

(4) In any of the above gaming machines (1) to (3), the projection posture of the projection means (for example, the relative position of the projector 32 with respect to the main screen 5, the up / down / front / back / left / right relative to the main screen 5 of the projector 32 The display image may be adjusted by conversion of the original image data in the projection control means (for example, rotation of display image data stored in the drawing area 262R in the clockwise direction).

  According to the said structure, a display image can be adjusted efficiently.

(5) In the gaming machine of (4), the vertical and horizontal positions of the display image are adjusted (for example, adjusted by moving the projector 32 up, down, and moving left and right) according to the projection posture of the projection means. The rotation position of the display image may be adjusted by conversion of the original image data in the projection control means (for example, rotation of display image data stored in the drawing area 262R in the clockwise direction).

  According to the said structure, a display image can be adjusted efficiently.

(6) In any of the above gaming machines (1) to (5), adjustment markers (for example, markers 35A to 35D) used for adjusting the display image may be provided.

  According to the said structure, a display image can be adjusted efficiently.

(7) In the gaming machine according to any one of (1) to (6), the projection control means is an original image corresponding to a specific portion (for example, an image displayed in the stereoscopic display area 5B) in the display image. Specific original image data in the data (for example, display image data corresponding to the image displayed in the stereoscopic display area 5B) and non-specific parts (for example, other than the stereoscopic display area 5B) excluding the specific part in the display image Image data including non-specific original image data (for example, display image data corresponding to an image displayed in an area other than the stereoscopic display area 5B) in the original image data in accordance with an image displayed in the area). It may be independently convertible.

  According to the above configuration, it is possible to suppress the occurrence of distortion in the specific portion when the display image is adjusted.

(8) In any of the above gaming machines (1) to (7), the game machine can be changed between an open state and a closed state, and a game area (for example, a game formed in the game board 2) in the closed state. And an opening / closing door (for example, door frame 3B) that covers the area), and may further include a limiting unit that limits the projection of the projection unit when the opening / closing door is open.

  According to the said structure, it can suppress that light will be projected on a player.

It is a front view of the pachinko gaming machine in the first embodiment. It is a sectional side view of the pachinko gaming machine in the first embodiment. (A) is a front view of a screen that projects an image on a stereoscopic display area, and (B) is a front view of a screen that does not project an image on a stereoscopic display area. It is a front view of a special screen apparatus. It is a front view of the screen which projected the image | video. It is a figure which shows the relationship between an image display area and a projectable area. It is a block diagram which shows various control boards. It is a block diagram which shows the display control part etc. of an effect control board. (A) is a figure which shows the relationship between a drawing area | region and an actual drawing area | region, (B) is a sectional side view of a logo accessory. It is explanatory drawing of the image displayed on a screen when adjusting a display image. It is a figure which shows operation | movement of the projector at the time of adjusting an image. It is a figure which shows the change of the image according to operation | movement of a projector. It is explanatory drawing of the image displayed on a screen when adjusting a specific part. It is a figure explaining the specific division area and non-specific division area in an actual drawing area. (A) (B) is a figure explaining the order of adjustment of a display image. It is a figure which shows the structure of an automatic adjustment apparatus. It is explanatory drawing of the image displayed on a screen, when adjusting a display image using an automatic adjustment apparatus. It is explanatory drawing following FIG. It is explanatory drawing which shows an example of the content of an effect control command. It is explanatory drawing which illustrates the random number for game counted on the main board side. It is a figure which illustrates a change category and a change pattern. It is a figure which shows the structural example of a display result determination table. It is a figure which shows the structural example of a big hit classification determination table. It is a block diagram which shows the structural example of the data holding area for game control. It is a figure which shows the structural example etc. of an effect control pattern. FIG. 40 is a block diagram showing a configuration example of an effect control data holding area. It is a flowchart which shows the main process which the microcomputer for game control performs. It is a flowchart which shows an example of the timer interruption process for game control. It is a flowchart which shows an example of a special symbol process process. It is a flowchart which shows an example of the start winning determination process in a special symbol process process. It is a flowchart which shows an example of a start time winning process. It is the flowchart etc. which show an example of a random value determination process at the time of winning. It is a figure which shows the example of selection of a fluctuation category determination table. It is a figure which shows the structural example of a fluctuation category determination table. It is a flowchart which shows an example of a special symbol normal process. It is a figure which shows the example of a setting of the determination ratio of a fluctuation pattern. It is a flowchart which shows an example of a special symbol stop process. It is a flowchart which shows an example of the game state transition process at the time of a change. It is a flowchart which shows an example of a jackpot end process. It is a flowchart which shows an example of production control main processing. It is a flowchart which shows an example of a command analysis process. It is a flowchart which shows an example of production control process processing. It is a flowchart which shows an example of a special screen apparatus initial operation process. It is a flowchart which shows an example of an initial operation | movement A execution process. It is a flowchart which shows an example of a variable display start waiting process. It is a flowchart which shows an example of the initial stage operation execution process during a demonstration. It is a flowchart which shows an example of the production process during variable display. It is a flowchart which shows an example of a special screen appearance effect process. It is explanatory drawing which shows the specific example of a special screen appearance effect. It is explanatory drawing which shows the specific example following FIG. It is explanatory drawing which shows the specific example following FIG. It is a front view of the pachinko gaming machine according to the second embodiment. It is a front view of the pachinko gaming machine according to the third embodiment. It is a front view of the pachinko gaming machine according to the fourth embodiment. It is a sectional side view of the pachinko gaming machine according to the fourth embodiment. It is a perspective view of the door frame of the pachinko game machine concerning a 4th embodiment. It is a front view of the pachinko gaming machine according to the fifth embodiment. It is a sectional side view of the pachinko gaming machine concerning a 5th embodiment. It is a front view of the pachinko gaming machine according to the sixth embodiment. It is a sectional side view of the pachinko gaming machine according to the sixth embodiment. It is a top view of the screen of the pachinko gaming machine according to the sixth embodiment. (A) (B) is a perspective view which shows the drive state of a screen. It is a front view of the pachinko gaming machine according to the seventh embodiment. It is a sectional side view of the pachinko gaming machine according to the seventh embodiment. It is a perspective view of the screen of the pachinko gaming machine according to the seventh embodiment. It is a front view of the pachinko gaming machine according to the eighth embodiment. It is a sectional side view of the pachinko gaming machine according to the eighth embodiment. (A) is a front view of a screen that projects an image on a stereoscopic display area, and (B) is a front view of a screen that does not project an image on a stereoscopic display area. (A) is a front view of the screen arranged at the lower position, and (B) is a front view of the screen arranged at the upper position. FIG. 10 is a front view of a screen for explaining a first modification. It is a front view of the screen for demonstrating the modification 2. FIG. It is a sectional side view of the pachinko game machine for demonstrating the modification 2. FIG. It is a front view of the screen for demonstrating the modification 5. FIG. It is a front view of the screen for demonstrating the modification 6. FIG. It is explanatory drawing using the front view of the screen for demonstrating the modifications 10 and 11. FIG. It is a front view of the screen for demonstrating the modification 17. FIG. It is explanatory drawing using the front view of the screen for demonstrating the modification 20. FIG. It is a sectional side view of the pachinko gaming machine which shows the state where the screen was distorted. It is a front view of the pachinko gaming machine for explaining the modification 25. It is a front view of the pachinko gaming machine for explaining other examples of modification 25.

<First Embodiment>
Hereinafter, an embodiment (first embodiment) of the present invention will be described with reference to the drawings. FIG. 1 is a front view of a pachinko gaming machine. A gaming machine (pachinko gaming machine) 1 is roughly divided into a gaming board 2 that constitutes a gaming board surface, and a gaming machine frame 3 that supports and fixes the gaming board 2. On the game board 2, a substantially circular game area is formed. As shown in FIG. 2, the gaming machine frame 3 includes a gaming frame 3A and a door frame 3B. The game frame 3A is a box-shaped frame. The door frame 3B is substantially the same size as the game frame 3A when viewed from the front, and is provided to be openable and closable with respect to the game frame 3A. Further, a rotating shaft member extending in the vertical direction is provided at the left end of the game frame 3A. The door frame 3B can be rotated around the vertical axis around the rotation shaft member, and is opened or closed by rotating around the rotation shaft member. When the door frame 3B is opened, the game board 2 can be contacted from the outside of the pachinko gaming machine 1, and when the door frame 3B is closed, the door frame 3B becomes a game area of the game board 2 (hereinafter simply referred to as a game). It is impossible to contact the game board 2 from the outside of the pachinko gaming machine 1. The door frame 3B is provided with a glass plate (not shown). As a glass plate, for example, two glass plates are arranged in parallel, but one glass plate may be provided. In the game area, a game ball as a game medium is launched from a predetermined hitting ball launching device and driven. Hereinafter, main members in or around the game area will be described.

  As shown in FIG. 1, the game board 2 has a main screen 5, a normal winning ball device 6A, a normal variable winning ball device 6B, a special variable winning ball device 7, a first special symbol display device 4A, and a second special symbol display. A device 4B, a center frame 4C, a first hold indicator 25A, a second hold indicator 25B, a normal symbol display 20, a passing gate 41, a general hold indicator 25C, a logo accessory 26, and a decorative structure 27 are provided. It has been. Further, the logo accessory 26 is provided with a reflection mirror 28 as shown in FIG. As shown in FIG. 7, the gaming machine frame 3 includes a speaker 8 (speakers 8L and 8R), a game effect lamp 9, a stick controller 31A, a push button 31B, a controller sensor unit 31C, a push sensor 31D, and sensors 205SX ( A left origin sensor 205YL, a right origin sensor 205YR, a left upper end sensor 205ZL, and an upper right end sensor 205ZR) shown in FIG. 4 and a lift motor 205M (left lift motor 205ML and right lift motor 205MR shown in FIG. 4) are provided. Further, as shown in FIG. 2, a projector 32 is provided on the back side of the game board 2 and inside the game frame 3A, and a sub LED 33 is provided in the lower front side inside the game frame 3A. ing. As shown in FIG. 2, the game board 2 is provided with a special screen device 205. The special screen device 205 includes a special screen 205A. The special screen 205 </ b> A can appear forward from the irradiation side of the light emitted from the projector 32 from the main screen 5. Since the projector 32 is disposed on the front side (player side) of the main screen 5, the special screen 205 </ b> A can appear at a position on the front side of the main screen 5. The special screen 205A appears when a predetermined reach effect, for example, a special screen appearance effect is executed. On the special screen 205A, a planar image display area is formed. Under the control of the display control unit 123 (see FIG. 7) on the effect control board 12, the projector 32 can project an image (video) with a focus corresponding to each of the main screen 5 and the special screen 205A.

  The normal winning ball device 6A provided in the game board 2 forms a first starting winning opening as a starting area that is always kept in a constant open state. The normal variable winning ball apparatus 6B includes an electric tulip type accessory that changes between a normal open state and an expanded open state by a solenoid 81 for a normal electric accessory shown in FIG. 7, and a second start prize as a start area. Forming a mouth. When there is no particular distinction between the first start winning opening and the second start winning opening, they are simply referred to as “start winning opening”. It should be noted that the electric tulip-type accessory is controlled to be in an expanded and open state when the variable display result (final result) in the normal game (described later) becomes “per normal map”. The special variable winning ball apparatus 7 includes a large winning opening door that is opened and closed by a solenoid 82 for the large winning opening shown in FIG. 7, and the specific area that changes between an open state and a closed state by the large winning opening door. Form a big prize opening. The big prize opening is controlled to be in an open state when the variable display result (final result) in the first special game (described later) or the second special game (described later) becomes “big hit”.

  The first special symbol display device 4A has a first start condition, which will be described later, after winning the normal winning ball device 6A (after the first starting condition is established by the game ball passing through the first starting winning opening). The special symbol is variably displayed based on the establishment. The second special symbol display device 4B has a second start condition, which will be described later, after winning the normal variable winning ball device 6B (after the second starting condition is established because the game ball has passed the second starting winning opening). The special symbol is variably displayed based on the fact that is established.

  Hereinafter, the special symbol variably displayed on the first special symbol display device 4A is also referred to as a first special symbol, and the variable display of the first special symbol is also referred to as a “first special symbol game”. The special symbol variably displayed on the second special symbol display device 4B is also referred to as a second special symbol, and the variable display of the second special symbol is also referred to as a “second special symbol game”. In addition, both the first special figure game and the second special figure game are collectively referred to as “special figure game”, and both the first start condition and the second start condition are collectively referred to as “special figure start condition”. Both the condition and the second start condition may be collectively referred to as “special drawing start condition”.

  After the variable display result in the special game is “big hit” (for example, after a special symbol predetermined as a big win symbol is derived and displayed as a variable display result (stop display)), the big win gaming state (game) An example of an advantageous state advantageous to a person). The big hit game state is a period until a predetermined upper limit time (for example, 29 seconds or 0.1 second) elapses or a predetermined number (for example, 9) of winning balls in the special winning ball apparatus 7 This is a gaming state in which the big prize opening is controlled to be in an open state until the time of occurrence.

  Despite having won the normal winning ball device 6A (even though the first start condition is satisfied), the start condition for starting the first special figure game (also referred to as the first start condition) is still present. When is not established, the variable display corresponding to the winning is stored as a reserved storage. Specifically, the information for executing the variable display (first special figure game) based on the winning is suspended in such a manner that the winning order can be recognized up to a predetermined number (for example, 4) (first special game). It is stored as figure hold memory (details will be described later). Despite having won the normal variable winning ball apparatus 6B (despite the second start condition being satisfied), the start condition for starting the second special figure game (also referred to as the second start condition) is still present. ) Is not established, the variable display corresponding to the winning is stored as a reserved storage. Specifically, information for executing variable display (second special figure game) based on the winning is held in such a manner that the winning order can be recognized up to a predetermined number (for example, 4) (second special game). It is stored as figure hold memory (details will be described later). In addition, for example, the winning order in the whole (the following special figure holding memory) that combines the first special figure holding memory and the second special figure holding memory separately from the first special figure holding memory and the second special figure holding memory is as follows. Information that can be understood may be stored. Even when the first start condition is satisfied immediately when the first start condition is satisfied, the first special figure hold memory may be stored although it is instantaneous (although it is immediately digested after storage). . In addition, even when the second start condition is satisfied immediately when the second start condition is satisfied, the second special figure holding memory may be stored, although it is instantaneous. Note that both the first special figure hold memory and the second special figure hold memory may be collectively referred to as “special figure hold memory”.

  The special figure start condition is, for example, when the special figure game hold number (also referred to as the special figure hold memory number) is not 0, the special figure game is not executed, and is controlled to the big hit game state. It is established when the state is not set. When the special figure start condition is satisfied (every time the special figure game is started), the special figure holding memory is consumed (the special figure holding memory is reduced), and the special figure game is started. In other words, the special figure hold memory decreases every time the special figure game is started. More specifically, the number of holds of the first special figure game (the number of first special figure hold memory) decreases every time the first special figure game is started (every time the first start condition is satisfied), The number of holds of the 2 special figure game (the number of second special figure hold memory) decreases every time the second special figure game is started (every time the second start condition is satisfied).

  In the present embodiment, the special figure hold memory is digested in the order of winning regardless of whether it is the first special figure hold memory or the second special figure hold memory. Therefore, for example, when the first special figure hold memory, the first special figure hold memory, the second special figure hold memory, and the first special figure hold memory are stored in this order, the first start condition, the first start condition The second start condition and the first start condition are satisfied in this order. That is, as described above, the special figure start condition is a state where the special figure holding memory number is not 0, the special figure game is not executed, and the special hit game state is not controlled. More specifically, if the special figure hold memory stored first is the first special figure hold memory, the first start condition is satisfied and the special figure stored first is satisfied. The second start condition is satisfied when the hold memory is the second special figure hold memory.

  The center frame 4C is provided in the center of the game board 2, and a screen mounting hole 2A is formed in the center portion of the center frame 4C. Further, a logo accessory 26 is attached to the upper end portion of the center frame 4C. The logo accessory 26 is fixedly attached to the center frame 4C. However, the logo accessory 26 may be a movable type that moves in the vertical direction, for example.

  The first hold indicator 25A displays the hold number of the first special figure game (first special figure hold memory number) so as to be specified. The second hold indicator 25B displays the number of holds of the second special figure game (second special figure hold number) so as to be specified. In the normal symbol display 20, after the game ball has passed through the passing gate 41 (after the normal figure starting condition by the game ball passing through the passing gate 41 is satisfied), the starting condition of the later-described general game is satisfied. Based on this, variable display of normal symbols is performed. Note that the variable display of normal symbols is also referred to as a “general game”.

  Even if the game ball has passed through the passage gate 41 (even though the normal chart start condition is satisfied), the start condition of the normal chart game (also referred to as the general chart start condition) is not yet satisfied. The variable display based on passage (ordinary game) is suspended up to a predetermined number (for example, 4) (stored as ordinary map storage).

  The start condition of the ordinary game (ordinary figure start condition) is, for example, a case where the number of ordinary reserved memories is not 0, the variable symbol display (ordinary game) is not executed, and the big hit The condition may be satisfied when the game state is not controlled. It should be noted that, even if the general chart start condition is satisfied immediately when the general chart start condition is satisfied, the general map hold memory may be stored, although it is instantaneous.

  The general figure hold display unit 25C displays the number of hold of the general figure game (the number of general figure hold storage) in an identifiable manner. It should be noted that the number of holdings of the ordinary game (also referred to as the number of ordinary holdings) decreases each time the ordinary game is started (every time the ordinary drawing start condition is satisfied).

  As illustrated in FIG. 2, the logo accessory 26 includes a decorative material 26 </ b> A and an accessory casing 26 </ b> B. The decorative material 26A is made of a light transmissive material, and the accessory casing 26B is made of a light non-transmissive material. In addition, as shown in FIG. 1, the decoration material 26 </ b> A has characters “FEVER” as viewed from the front. The accessory casing 26B has a box shape with the front side opened, and a decorative material 26A is fitted into the opened portion. An opening through which the projection light LP projected from the projector 32 passes is formed at a substantially central position on the back surface of the accessory housing 26B. An opening through which the projection light (image) LP reflected by the reflection mirror 28 passes is formed. Further, the reflection mirror 28 is fixed inside the logo accessory 26 inside the accessory case 26B. The inner side of the accessory housing 26B and the back side of the reflection mirror 28 are white, and the reflectance is high. Since the reflection mirror 28 faces the back of the pachinko gaming machine 1, the back surface of the reflection mirror 28 faces the front of the pachinko gaming machine 1.

  As shown in FIG. 2, the projector 32 is disposed above the main screen 5, and when viewed in the height direction, the reflection mirror 28 is disposed below the projector 32 and above the main screen 5. For this reason, in the image display area 5X formed on the main screen 5, the lower part is separated from the projector 32 more than the upper part. Therefore, the light reaching below the image display area 5X reaches the image display area 5X of the main screen 5 from the projector 32 through an optical path longer than the light reaching above the image display area 5X. The projector 32 is disposed above the special screen 205A. When viewed in the height direction, the reflection mirror 28 is below the projector 32, and above the special screen 205A is the main screen 5. It is the same.

  The projector 32 is arranged at a position above the main screen 5 so that the projected projection light LP reaches the reflection mirror 28. Further, the reflection mirror 28 is disposed in a direction in which the projection light projected by the projector 32 is directed toward the main screen 5. The projector 32 is provided in the game frame 3A, and the reflection mirror 28 is provided in the logo accessory 26 attached to the game board 2 fixed to the game frame 3A. For this reason, even if the pachinko gaming machine 1 is moved or the door frame 3B is opened and closed, the relative positional relationship between the projector 32 and the reflecting mirror 28, and further, the relative relationship between the projector 32 and the main screen 5 is increased. The positional relationship is maintained unchanged. Therefore, even if the pachinko gaming machine 1 is moved or the door frame 3B is opened and closed, an image can be projected from the projector 32 at an appropriate position on the main screen 5. Further, since the reflection mirror 28 is provided on the back side of the logo accessory 26, the reflection mirror 28 can be provided without impairing the design.

  In the image projected from the projector 32 (projected image), the color tone bias caused by the projection state from the projector 32 onto the image display area 5X is adjusted. In order to adjust the color tone bias caused by the projection state, a color correction filter 28F is disposed and provided on the surface of the reflection mirror 28. The projection state is a state when the projector 32 projects an image on the main screen 5 (or the special screen 205A). For example, a distance or an angle between the projector 32 and the main screen 5 (or the special screen 205A), or the like. It refers to the positional relationship, the illuminance and illuminance distribution of the image projected from the projector 32. The color correction filter 28F is configured by, for example, a polarization filter. The color correction filter 28F is a color correction filter that corrects a part of an image so that the contrast is higher (darker) than the other part. In the color correction filter 28F, the three colors are projected so that a portion near the lower end of the image projected from the projector 32 and displayed in the image display area 5X of the main screen 5 (or the special screen 205A) is more clearly visible than the other portions. Correct attributes, for example lightness and saturation.

  The projector 32 is mounted on the projector moving device 32A. The projector moving device 32A includes a base and a moving member that can move forward, backward, up, down, left and right with respect to the base. The base in the projector moving device 32A is attached to the game frame 3A, and the projector 32 is attached to the moving member. For this reason, the projector 32 is movable up and down, front and rear, and left and right with respect to the game frame 3A. Here, the vertical position of the projector 32 relative to the main screen 5 in the up / down / left / right direction and the relative distance of the projector 32 relative to the main screen 5 are referred to as a projection posture. To do. Conversely, if the projector 32 does not move, the projection posture of the projector 32 is maintained without change.

  The reflection mirror 28 is attached to the mirror moving device 28A. The mirror moving device 28A includes a fixed portion suspended from the accessory case 26B and a moving portion that moves up, down, left, and right relative to the fixed portion. The fixed part is fixed to the inside of the logo accessory 26, and the reflection mirror 28 is attached to the moving part. For this reason, the reflecting mirror 28 is movable up and down and left and right relative to the logo accessory 26. These projector moving device 32A and mirror moving device 28A can be manually operated by an operator or the like.

  The projector 32 can be moved by the projector moving device 32A. The projector 32 is set with a first normal position and a second normal position. When the projector 32 is in the first normal position, the main screen 5 is focused, and the image projected from the projector 32 is appropriately displayed in a state where the main screen 5 is in focus. When the projector 32 is in the second normal position, the special screen 205A is focused, and the image projected from the projector 32 is appropriately displayed in a state where the special screen 205A is in focus. In other words, the first positive position of the projector 32 is a position where an image projected from the projector 32 is appropriately displayed on the main screen 5, and the second positive position of the projector 32 is an image projected from the projector 32. Is a position appropriately displayed on the special screen 205A. The main screen 5 is farther from the projector moving device 32A than the special screen 205A. For this reason, the first positive position of the projector 32 is in front of the second positive position (the one closer to the reflection mirror 28).

  The main screen 5 is provided in a screen mounting hole 2 </ b> A formed in the center of the game board 2, and is disposed in the back of the game board 2. The main screen 5 is fixedly provided in the back of the game board 2. For this reason, when the projector 32 does not move, the distance between the main screen 5 and the projector 32 is constant. When the reflecting mirror 28 does not move, the distance between the main screen 5 and the reflecting mirror 28 is also constant. The main screen 5 has a horizontally long rectangular shape, and performs variable display of decorative symbols (also referred to as effect symbols) and various effect displays. The special screen 205 </ b> A is disposed at a position farther from the main screen 5 when viewed from the projector 32. However, the light projected from the projector 32 is reflected by the reflecting mirror 28 and reaches the main screen 5 or the special screen 205A. Therefore, the special screen 205 </ b> A can appear in front of the main screen 5 when viewed from the irradiation side of the light emitted from the projector 32.

  Further, as shown in FIG. 1, the main screen 5 includes a flat display area 5A and a stereoscopic display area 5B. These flat display area 5A and stereoscopic display area 5B constitute an image display area 5X. Various images are displayed in the image display area 5X. The stereoscopic display area 5B includes a central stereoscopic display area 5BC, a right stereoscopic display area 5BR, and a left stereoscopic display area 5BL. These central stereoscopic display area 5BC, right stereoscopic display area 5BR, and left stereoscopic display area 5BL all have a figure shape. The main screen 5 is formed by sticking a figure-like three-dimensional object on a flat plate, the position where the three-dimensional object is not attached becomes a flat display area, and the position where the three-dimensional object is attached is the three-dimensional display area. 5B.

  In the flat display area 5A, a specific image, a background image, and the like described later are mainly displayed. In the central stereoscopic display area 5BC, the right stereoscopic display area 5BR, and the left stereoscopic display area 5BL, characters corresponding to the respective stereoscopic display areas are mainly displayed. In the example shown in FIG. 1, the main character image MC is displayed in the central stereoscopic display area 5BC, the first subcharacter image SC1 is displayed in the left stereoscopic display area 5BL, and the second subcharacter image SC2 is displayed in the right stereoscopic display area 5BR. Is displayed. When the special figure game is started, the effect is executed in a state where the character images MC, SC1, and SC2 are displayed in the stereoscopic display areas 5BC, 5BL, and 5BR in principle.

  Note that the main character image MC, the first sub-character image SC1, and the second sub-character image SC are displayed in the central stereoscopic display area 5BC, the left stereoscopic display area 5BL, and the right stereoscopic display area 5BR, respectively. Other images may be displayed. For example, the displayed characters may be switched so that the first sub character image SC1 or the second sub character image SC2 is displayed in the central stereoscopic display area 5BC. Further, an image other than a character, for example, a background image may be displayed in the stereoscopic display area 5B, or a character image may be displayed in the flat display area 5A.

  The image display area 5X on the main screen 5 is a projection area where a video (image) projected from the projector 32 is displayed. The image projected from the projector 32 is reflected by the reflection mirror 28 and displayed on the image display area 5X on the main screen 5. An image displayed in the image display area 5X on the main screen 5 is formed by an image projected by the projector 32. The image display area 5 </ b> X is formed in both the flat display area 5 </ b> A and the stereoscopic display area 5 </ b> B of the main screen 5, and an effect is executed by so-called projection mapping using an image from the projector 32.

  By projecting an image on the stereoscopic display area 5B on the main screen 5, as shown in FIG. 3A, an image that appears as a stereoscopic image in conformity with the stereoscopic shape is displayed in the stereoscopic display area 5B. In addition, in the state where the image is not projected on the stereoscopic display area 5B, as shown in FIG. 3B, the stereoscopic shape in the stereoscopic display area 5B is in a state where it is difficult to visually recognize. It is difficult to recognize the shape.

  Since the stereoscopic display area 5B is provided, the distance between the projector 32 and the main screen 5 is not uniform. Specifically, when the projector 32 is arranged on the surface of the main screen 5, the stereoscopic display area 5B is closer to the flat display area 5A. Therefore, the focal point of the image projected from the projector 32 is a position corresponding to the surface of the stereoscopic display region 5B on a predetermined axis, for example, the optical axis in the image projected from the projector 32 (hereinafter referred to as “stereoscopic surface equivalent position”). And a position corresponding to the plane display area 5A (hereinafter referred to as “plane surface equivalent position”), for example, an intermediate position thereof. By setting the focal point between the position corresponding to the three-dimensional surface and the position corresponding to the planar surface, it is possible to reduce the distortion of the image over the entire surface of the main screen 5. Further, instead of setting the focus between the position corresponding to the three-dimensional surface and the position corresponding to the plane surface, the focus may be adjustable. May be adjustable.

  Markers 35 </ b> A to 35 </ b> D are drawn at the corners of the flat display area 5 </ b> A on the main screen 5. The markers 35 </ b> A to 35 </ b> D are drawn in a color that is difficult to visually recognize with the naked eye, for example, white, and when an image is projected on the main screen 5, it is very difficult for the player to visually recognize the marker. The markers 35 </ b> A to 35 </ b> D are used when adjusting the display image described later. The marker may be a small hole or a depression formed in the main screen 5 in addition to the one drawn in white or the like.

  Further, the projector 32 and the reflection mirror 28 that reflects the image projected by the projector 32 are arranged above the main screen 5, and the image projected from the projector 32 is reflected by the reflection mirror 28 and is displayed in front of the main screen 5. Projected onto the main screen 5 from above. Thus, in the projector 32, the optical axis of the projection light LP and the display surface (planar display area 5A) of the main screen 5 are not orthogonal to each other, and the image is projected onto the main screen 5 from the oblique projection direction with respect to the display surface of the main screen 5. Project. Since the projector 32 projects an image from an oblique projection direction, the image displayed on the main screen 5 has a trapezoidal shape. The main screen 5 has a rectangular shape, and the main screen 5 does not coincide with the image area projected from the projector 32, and the main screen 5 is wider than the image displayed on the main screen 5.

  For this reason, as shown in FIG. 3A, the area formed in the lower part of the flat display area 5A in the image display area 5X within the flat display area 5A in the main screen 5 is wide. A region formed as the wide portion 5XW and formed in a portion above the flat display region 5A is a narrow portion 5XN that is narrower than the wide portion 5XW. The narrow portion 5XN has a trapezoidal shape, the wide portion 5XW has a rectangular shape, and the image display area 5X has a hexagonal shape. In the following description, the shape of the image display region 5X may be referred to as a trapezoidal shape by approximating a hexagonal shape. Further, since the main screen 5 has a rectangular shape, the left and right positions of the narrow portion 5XN are non-projection areas 5NL and 5NR that do not receive the image projected from the projector 32 or do not display the image even if it reaches. .

  The non-projection regions 5NL and 5NR correspond to regions outside the narrow portion 5XN, and are regions having a difference in width between the wide portion 5XW and the narrow portion 5XN in the image display region 5X. In other words, the difference between the width of the wide portion 5XW and the width of the narrowest portion of the narrow portion 5XN is the maximum width of the non-projection regions 5NL and 5NR. The sub LED 33 provided in the lower front side inside the game frame 3A irradiates the non-projection areas 5NL and 5NR with the irradiation light LL to cause the non-projection areas 5NL and 5NR to emit light. ) Is not displayed. Note that many portions of the flat display area 5A are included in the narrow portion 5XN, and a small portion is included in the wide portion 5XW. The 3D display area 5B is all included in the wide portion 5XW. However, another aspect may be adopted as to which of the wide portion 5XW and the narrow portion 5XN includes the flat display region 5A and the stereoscopic display region 5B. For example, the wide portion 5XW or the narrow portion 5XN may include the entire flat display region 5A or the entire stereoscopic display region 5B, or may include a part of each.

  Further, peripheral members on the main screen 5, specifically, the center frame 4C, nails, windmills and the like are formed of a hardly reflective material. As the hard-reflective material, a material such as black, which is a color that hardly reflects the projection light LP, or a material that hardly reflects the projection light LP, such as carbon black, chromium oxide, or a material with a rough surface. A thing may be used.

  As shown in FIG. 4, the special screen device 205 includes a screen accommodating cylinder 205B that winds up the special screen 205A. The special screen 205A is made of, for example, cloth and can be wound around the screen housing cylinder 205B. Further, the front surface of the special screen 205A is white and the back surface is black.

  The special screen device 205 includes a left lift motor 205ML and a right lift motor 205MR. The left lifting motor 205ML is disposed on the left side of the screen housing cylinder 205B, and the right lifting motor 205MR is disposed on the right side of the screen housing cylinder 205B. A left ball screw 205GL is provided above the left lift motor 205ML, and a right ball screw 205GR is provided above the right lift motor 205MR. Each of the left ball screw 205GL and the right ball screw 205GR extends along the vertical direction.

  The special screen device 205 includes a left slider 205SL that moves up and down with rotation of the left ball screw 205G, and a right slider 205SR that moves up and down with rotation of the right ball screw 205GR. The left slider 205SL moves up and down as the left elevating motor 205ML operates and the left ball screw 205GL rotates around the vertical axis. The right slider 205SR moves up and down as the right elevating motor 205MR operates and the right ball screw 205GR rotates around the vertical axis. Note that both the left slider 205SL and the right slider 205SR may be moved up and down by a mechanism other than the left ball screw 205GR and the right ball screw 205GL, such as a rack and pinion mechanism or a belt mechanism.

  The left lifting motor 205ML and the right lifting motor 205MR operate in synchronization with each other. For this reason, the left slider 205SL and the right slider 205SR are always arranged at the same height position. An elevating frame 205F is disposed between the left slider 205SL and the right slider 205SR. The lifting frame 205F is held by the left slider 205SL and the right slider 205SR. For this reason, the elevating frame 205F moves up and down together with the left slider 205SL and the right slider 205SR.

  The upper end of the special screen 205A is attached to the lifting frame 205F. As shown in phantom lines in FIG. 2, the elevating frame 205F can be accommodated in a special screen accommodation hole 2AH formed below the screen attachment hole 2A. The upper end surface of the elevating frame 205F is planar. The screen accommodating cylinder 205B is provided below the special screen accommodating hole 2AH. In a state where the special screen 205A is accommodated in the screen accommodating cylinder 205B, the upper end surface of the elevating frame 205F is substantially flush with the bottom surface of the screen attachment hole 2A.

  The screen accommodating cylinder 205B includes a cylinder 205BT and a winding shaft 205BA that is arranged coaxially with the cylinder 205BT. A gear mechanism 205H is provided at one end of the winding shaft 205BA, and the gear mechanism 205H is connected to the left lifting motor 205ML. A special screen 205A can be wound around the winding shaft 205BA.

  When the left elevating motor 205ML is operated, the left slider 205SL moves up and down and the winding shaft 205BA of the screen housing cylinder 205B rotates. When the left lifting / lowering motor 205ML operates in the direction in which the left slider 205SL descends, the winding shaft 205BA rotates in the direction to wind the special screen 205A. On the contrary, when the left lifting / lowering motor 205ML is operated in the direction in which the left slider 205SL is raised, the winding shaft 205BA rotates in the direction in which the special screen 205A is unwound.

  An upper left stopper solenoid 205UL is provided above the left ball screw 205GL, and an upper right stopper solenoid 205UR is provided above the right ball screw 205GR. When the upper left stopper solenoid 205UL is set, the downward movement of the left slider 205SL is restricted, and when the upper left stopper solenoid 205UL is released, the left slider 205SL can be moved downward. Similarly, when the upper right stopper solenoid 205UR is set, the downward movement of the right slider 205SR is restricted, and when the upper right stopper solenoid 205UR is released, the right slider 205SR can be moved downward.

  A lower left stopper solenoid 205DL is provided below the left ball screw 205GL, and a lower right stopper solenoid 205DR is provided below the right ball screw 205GR. When the lower left stopper solenoid 205DL is set, the upward movement of the left slider 205SL is restricted, and when the lower left stopper solenoid 205DL is released, the upward movement of the left slider 205SL becomes possible. Similarly, when the right lower stopper solenoid 205DR is set, the upward movement of the right slider 205SR is restricted, and when the right lower stopper solenoid 205DR is released, the right slider 205SR can be moved upward.

  When the movement of the left slider 205SL and the right slider 205SR is restricted by the upper left stopper solenoid 205UL and the upper right stopper solenoid 205UR, respectively, the special screen device 205 is in a state where the lifting frame 205F is disposed at the highest position (FIG. 4). (Hereinafter referred to as “set state”). The special screen 205A has the largest exposure area when set.

  On the other hand, when the movement of the left slider 205SL and the right slider 205SR is restricted by the lower left stopper solenoid 205DL and the lower right stopper solenoid 205DR, respectively, the special screen device 205 is in a state where the lifting frame 205F is disposed at the lowest position ( 2 is a state indicated by an imaginary line (hereinafter referred to as “storage state”). When the special screen 205A is in the stored state, the special screen 205A is not exposed.

  An upper left sensor 205ZL is provided in the vicinity of the upper left stopper solenoid 205UL, and an upper right sensor 205ZR is provided in the vicinity of the upper right stopper solenoid 205UR. The upper left sensor 205ZL detects the left slider 205SL when the special screen device 205 is in the set state, and the upper right sensor 205ZR detects the right slider 205SR when the special screen device 205 is in the set state. The upper left end sensor 205ZL and upper right end sensor 205ZR are disposed at the operating ends (upper operating ends) of the left slider 205SL and the right slider 205SR, respectively.

  When the upper left sensor 205ZL and upper right sensor 205ZR detect the left slider 205SL and the right slider 205SR, respectively, the special screen device 205 is in a set state. The upper left end sensor 205ZL and the upper right end sensor 205ZR respectively detect the origin position signal when the special screen device 205 is in the set state, and the projector display control unit 213 in the effect control CPU 120 when detecting the left slider 205SL and the right slider 205SR. Send to.

  A left origin sensor 205YL is provided in the vicinity of the lower left stopper solenoid 205DL, and a right origin sensor 205YR is provided in the vicinity of the lower right stopper solenoid 205DR. The left origin sensor 205YL detects the left slider 205SL when the special screen device 205 is in the stored state. The right origin sensor 205YR detects the right slider 205SR when the special screen device 205 is in the retracted state. The left origin sensor 205YL and the right origin sensor 205YR are disposed at the operation ends (lower operation ends) of the left slider 205SL and the right slider 205SR, respectively.

When the left origin sensor 205YL and the right origin sensor 205YR detect the left slider 205SL and the right slider 205SR, respectively, the special screen device 205 is stored. The left origin sensor 205YL and the right origin sensor 205YR respectively detect the origin position signal when the special screen device 205 is in the set state and detect the left slider 205SL and the right slider 205SR in the effect control CPU 120 (FIG. 7). The data is transmitted to the display control unit 213.

  Further, as shown in FIG. 5, decorative symbol display areas 5L, 5C, 5R, hold display areas 5H1, 5H2, hold number display area 5F, and current display area 5K are arranged on the main screen 5. In the decorative symbol display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R, decorative symbols are variably displayed corresponding to the special symbol game. Thereafter, in response to the fixed special symbol being derived and displayed as the variable display result in the special symbol game, the fixed decorative symbol (final stop symbol) that is the variable display result in the decorative symbol display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R is derived and displayed. Is done. The decorative symbols that are variably displayed in the decorative symbol display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R are also referred to as the left symbol, the middle symbol, and the right symbol, respectively. The variable display of the identification information may be collectively referred to as a variable display game. However, the variable display game includes variable display of decorative symbols together with the above-described special game and general game.

  When the variable display result in the special game is “big hit”, a definite decorative symbol that is a predetermined big hit combination is derived and displayed in the decorative symbol display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R. In addition, when the variable display result in the special game is not “big hit”, in the decorative symbol display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R, a definite decorative symbol different from a predetermined big hit combination is derived and displayed. An example of the predetermined jackpot combination is a combination in which the left symbol, the middle symbol, and the right symbol are the same symbol (for example, ("7" "7" "7")).

  In the holding display areas 5H1 and 5H2, the variable display holding number of decorative symbols corresponding to the special game is displayed in an identifiable manner. For example, in the hold display areas 5H1 and 5H2, the decorative symbols can be changed in such a manner that the winning order (digestion order) for each decorative symbol corresponding to the first special symbol game and the decorative symbol corresponding to the second special symbol game is known. The number of pending displays corresponding to the number of pending displays is displayed. Specifically, in the first hold display area 5H1, the decorative symbols corresponding to the first special figure game are displayed in a line according to the winning order, and in the second hold display area 5H2, the second special figure is displayed. The display of the decorative symbols corresponding to the game is arranged and displayed according to the winning order. In the hold display areas 5H1 and 5H2, the hold display corresponding to the variable display to be started is erased (digested) and erased each time variable display of the decorative symbols corresponding to the special game is started. When there is another hold display other than the hold display, the display position of the other hold display is moved (shifted) to the hold display side (current display area 5K side) where the display position of the other hold display is deleted.

  In the hold number display area 5F, similarly to the hold display areas 5H1 and 5H2, the hold number of the variable display of decorative symbols corresponding to the special game is displayed in an identifiable manner. The display mode is a mode that is displayed with arithmetic numbers. In the current display area 5K, a current display (sometimes referred to as a digestion display or an active display) is displayed. The current display is displayed according to the variable display of the decorative symbol corresponding to the digested hold display (displayed instead of the hold display digested when the hold display is digested). Note that the hold display and the current display are shown as simple figures, for example, circles.

  These decorative symbol display areas 5L, 5C, 5R, hold display areas 5H1, 5H2, hold number display area 5F, and current display area 5K are all displayed in the flat display area 5A. Therefore, the decorative symbols displayed in the decorative symbol display areas 5L, 5C, 5R, the hold display displayed in the hold display areas 5H1, 5H2, the hold number display displayed in the hold number display area 5F, and the current display area 5K. In this case, the current display is displayed in the flat planar display area 5A.

  In the gaming machine 1, various effects can be executed. For example, in the gaming machine 1, a reach effect that is performed in a state (reach state) that partially matches a predetermined jackpot combination, for example, is executed until a confirmed decorative symbol is derived and displayed. . The state in which the jackpot combination partially matches is, for example, a state in which the same left symbol and right symbol are derived and displayed, and a middle symbol is still variably displayed. Further, in the gaming machine 1, it is possible to execute an effect based on the display mode of the hold display and an effect based on the display mode of the current display. Further, the gaming machine 1 can also perform effects using the speakers 8 (8L, 8R) and the game effect lamp 9 shown in FIG. In the gaming machine 1, by executing these effects, for example, the jackpot expectation (reliability) is notified or suggested to the player.

  The expectation degree (reliability) of a certain effect A is, for example, (probability that the effect A is executed when the jackpot is hit) × (probability that the effect is executed) / {(the effect A is executed when the jackpot is reached) (Probability) × (probability of winning jackpot) + (probability of effect A being executed when jackpot is not hit) × (probability of not hitting jackpot)} (when the jackpot expectation is “1”) It ’s a “big hit”).

  It should be noted that the determination or determination regarding the production (determination or determination regarding whether or not the production is performed, the type and content of the production to be performed, etc.) may be performed at the time of starting winning or at the time of starting variable display.

  Further, as shown by shading in FIG. 6, the projectable area 32R of the image by the projector 32 is made wider than the image display area 5X including the flat display area 5A and the stereoscopic display area 5B. In particular, the projectable region 32R of the image by the projector 32 includes up to a region including a part of the non-projection regions 5NL and 5NR above the flat display region 5A. Here, even if the region is included in the projectable region 32R, there is a portion that is not included in the image display region 5X.

  FIG. 7 is a configuration diagram showing various control boards and the like. For example, as shown in FIG. 7, the gaming machine 1 includes a main board 11, an effect control board 12, an audio control board 13, a lamp control board 14, a relay board 15, a power supply board 16, a special screen control board 135, and the like. ing. In the gaming machine 1, for example, a payout control board, an information terminal board, a launch control board, an interface board, a touch sensor board, and the like may be mounted. These boards serve as control means for controlling the gaming machine.

  Among these boards, the control boards such as the main board 11, the effect control board 12, and the payout control board other than the power supply board 16 are provided on the back side of the game board 2. On the other hand, the power supply board 16 is on the back side of the decorative structure 27 provided on the surface of the game board 2 and on the front side of the game board 2, in other words, the flat display area 5A and the three-dimensional display area 5B of the main screen 5. It is arranged on the front side. Further, the power supply board 16 is provided on the back side of the decorative structure 27 (see FIG. 1). For this reason, the power supply board 16 is covered with the decorative structure 27 and cannot be visually recognized by the player.

  The main board 11 is a main control board. The main board 11 controls the first hold indicator 25A, the second hold indicator 25B, the general-purpose hold indicator 25C, the first special symbol display device 4A, the second special symbol display device 4B, and the normal symbol display device 20. A function, a function of outputting an effect control command to the effect control board 12 via the relay board 15, a function of outputting various kinds of information to the hall management computer, and the like.

  The effect control command output to the effect control board 12 side is, for example, a first start opening prize designation command (second start opening prize designation command) for notifying the first start prize opening (second start prize opening). The first reserved memory number notification command (second reserved memory number notification command) for notifying the first special figure reserved memory number (second special figure reserved memory number), and the variable display result is a big hit as the determination result at the time of winning. Symbol designating command that indicates whether or not it is a judgment result or jackpot type judgment result, variation category designation command that designates a variation pattern type (category, group) such as a special symbol or decorative design, variation pattern designation that designates a variation pattern A command, a variable display result notification command for designating a variable display result such as a special symbol or a decorative symbol, and the current gaming state of the gaming machine 1 (for example, a low probability state, a high probability state, a low base state) It is a game state specification command for designating a high-base status, etc.).

  On the main board 11, for example, as shown in FIG. 7, a game control microcomputer 100, a switch circuit 110, a solenoid circuit 111 and the like are mounted. The switch circuit 110 outputs detection signals from the gate switch 21, the first start port switch 22 </ b> A, the second start port switch 22 </ b> B, and the count switch 23 to the game control microcomputer 100. The solenoid circuit 111 outputs a solenoid drive signal from the game control microcomputer 100 to the solenoid 81 for the ordinary electric accessory and the solenoid 82 for the big prize door.

  The game control microcomputer 100 includes a ROM 101, a RAM 102, a CPU 103, a random number circuit 104, and an I / O 105, for example, as shown in FIG. For example, the CPU 103 counts various random values (numerical data indicating random values) used for various determinations (determinations) in an updatable manner. For example, the CPU 103 causes the random number circuit 104 or the like to use the random number value MR1 for special figure display result determination (determination), the random value MR2 for jackpot type determination (determination), the random value MR3 for determining the variation category, and the normal map display result. The random number value MR4 for determination and the random value MR5 for determining the variation pattern are counted so as to be updatable. The random value MR1 is a random value used for determining (determining) whether or not to make a “big hit” for a variable display result of a special symbol or the like in a special figure game (whether to control to the big hit gaming state). The random value MR2 is a random value used to determine (determine) the jackpot type as one of a plurality of types when the variable display result is “big jackpot”. The random value MR3 is a random value used for determining one of a plurality of types of variation categories prepared in advance. The random value MR4 is set to determine whether or not the variable symbol display result of the normal symbol in the normal game is “per normal” (whether or not the normal variable winning ball device 6B (electric tulip-type accessory) is controlled to be in the expanded open state. ) Is a random value used to determine (determine). The random value MR5 is a random value used for determining one of a plurality of types of variation patterns prepared in advance.

  The ROM 101 stores a program executed by the CPU 103. The ROM 101 also stores data constituting various tables used for the CPU 103 to perform various determinations (determinations). The RAM 102 corresponds to the hold number indicating the winning order (for example, the winning order) in such a manner that the winning order (digestion order) is known as information regarding the variable display that has not yet been started as the holding information (special drawing holding memory, ordinary drawing holding memory). Add) remember. The special figure holding storage may be specifically numerical data indicating a value such as the random value MR1 at the time of winning (or information indicating a determination (determination) result based on the numerical data). More specifically, the regular-pending storage may be numerical data indicating the value of the random value MR4 at the time of winning (or information indicating a determination (determination) result based on the numerical data). The RAM 102 also stores information (for example, various flags) indicating the current gaming state (for example, a low probability state, a high probability state, a low base state, a high base state, etc.). The RAM 102 may be a backup RAM that is backed up by a backup power supply circuit provided on the power supply board 16.

The effect control board 12 is a sub-side control board. The effect control board 12 has a function of inputting an effect control command, a function of determining (determining) an effect in video projection of the projector 32, and the like.
As shown in FIG. 7, for example, the effect control board 12 includes an effect control CPU 120, a ROM 121, a RAM 122, a display control unit 123, a random number circuit 124, and an I / O 125. The effect control CPU 120 counts various random number values for effect determination (decision) so as to be updatable by the random number circuit 124 or the like. In addition, the effect control CPU 120 performs various determinations (determinations) by executing the program read from the ROM 121.

  The ROM 121 stores a program executed by the effect control CPU 120. The ROM 121 stores data constituting various tables used for the production control CPU 120 to make various determinations (determinations). The RAM 122 displays information relating to variable display that has not yet been started as hold information (information indicated by a variable category designation command, a symbol designation command, etc.) in a manner in which the winning order (digestion order) is known (for example, the winning order is indicated). Store it in association with the buffer number. In addition, the RAM 122 stores a result of determination by the effect control CPU 120 (for example, determination content of a display mode such as a hold display). In addition, the RAM 122 may store information (for example, various flags) indicating the current gaming state (for example, a low probability state, a high probability state, a low base state, a high base state, etc.).

  The display control unit 123 in the effect control board 12 includes a projector control unit 260 and a sub LED control unit 270 as shown in FIG. The projector control unit 260 includes an image data ROM 261, a VDP (video display processor) 262, and an SDRAM 263. The image data ROM 261 is a ROM for storing original image data in advance. The original image data includes character image data and moving image data, specifically, person, character, figure, symbol, etc. (including decorative designs), and background image image data. The original image data includes image data of a predetermined image that is a white, non-patterned single color. The predetermined image is an image projected from the projector when changing the focus when the image is projected from the main screen 5 onto the special screen 205A. The predetermined image may be an image other than a white non-pattern single color. For example, the image may be an achromatic or chromatic non-pattern single color image other than white, or may be an image with a simple pattern such as simple shapes arranged monotonously. Further, an image in which radiation spreads from one point or a plurality of points may be used. Moreover, sandstorm (white noise, sandstorm), lattice pattern, dot pattern, etc. may be used.

  The VDP 262 reads the original image data stored in the image data ROM 261 and generates display image data corresponding to the display image projected on the projector 32 from the original image data. The effect control CPU 120 outputs to the VDP 262 a command for reading necessary original image data from the image data ROM 261 in which various image data are stored in accordance with the received effect control command. The VDP 262 reads the original image data from the image data ROM 261 in response to a command from the effect control CPU 120. The VDP 262 generates display image data based on the read original image data.

  The VDP 262 is an integrated circuit on which a system register 202, an attribute register 203, a drawing control unit 206, an image bus interface 204, a data transfer control unit 211, a projector display control unit 213, an output unit 214, and the like are mounted. The system register 202 stores various settings of the VDP 262 and the like. The attribute register 203 stores attributes (parameters used when drawing a character and data specifying the character drawing order, the number of colors, the enlargement / reduction ratio, the palette number, coordinates, and the like). The drawing control unit 206 performs drawing control of an image in a drawing area described later in the frame buffer area. The data transfer control unit 211 performs control to transfer original image data stored in the image data ROM 261 to the frame buffer area.

  The projector display control unit 213 outputs a video signal (R (red), G (green), B (blue)) signal and a synchronization signal for displaying the display image data stored in the frame buffer area. Further, the projector display control unit 213 determines whether the screen for focusing the image projected from the projector 32 is the main screen 5 or the special screen 205A based on the origin position signal transmitted from the sensors 205SX. The projector display control unit 213 can project an image with a focus corresponding to each of the main screen 5 and the special screen 205A. The output unit 214 outputs the video signal output from the projector display control unit 213 to the projector 32.

  The VDP 262 is provided with a system bus and an image bus. The system bus and the image bus are connected to the effect control CPU 120 (see FIG. 7) via the CPU interface 201, and the image bus is an image bus. The image data ROM 261 is connected via the interface 204. A system register 202 is connected to the system bus, and an attribute register 203 is connected to the image bus, so that the effect control CPU 120 can access the system register 202 and the attribute register 203.

  The drawing control unit 206, the data transfer control unit 211, and the projector display control unit 213 are connected to the system bus so that the system register 202 can be accessed. The drawing control unit 206 and the data transfer control unit 211 are connected to an image bus so that the image data ROM 261 and the attribute register 203 can be accessed.

  A VRAM bus is provided inside the VDP 262, and the VRAM bus is connected to the SDRAM 263 via the VRAM bus interface 209. A drawing control unit 206, a data transfer control unit 211, and a projector display control unit 213 are connected to the VRAM bus so that the frame buffer area of the SDRAM 263 can be accessed via the VRAM bus.

  The system register 202 includes a system control register for storing instructions such as initial setting, drawing, and data transfer, an interrupt control register for storing an interrupt signal output instruction to be described later, a drawing area in the frame buffer area, a palette data A drawing register for storing an arrangement area, a transfer source address for data transfer, a data transfer register for storing a transfer destination address, a display register for storing a frame buffer area, and the like are allocated.

  The CPU interface 201 outputs a V blank interrupt signal to the effect control CPU 120 at each start of V blank (an image update period), and outputs other various interrupt signals to the effect control CPU 120. To do. The projector display control unit 213 performs display processing for outputting the image data in the frame buffer area designated by the display register as a video signal.

  In the frame buffer area of the SDRAM 263, a palette area in which palette data is arranged, a character buffer in which original image data of necessary characters is read from the image data ROM 261 and stored, and the drawing control unit 206 draws an image. An image buffer for temporarily saving palette data (data in which the display color of the character is defined) when temporarily rendering, and for temporarily saving display image data when the rendering control unit 206 renders an image Each area is assigned.

  In addition, a drawing area for storing display image data of an image projected from the projector 32 and displayed on the main screen 5 is allocated to the frame buffer area. As shown in FIG. 9A, a drawing area 262R and an actual drawing area 262A are allocated to the frame buffer area. The actual drawing area 262A is assigned to a part of the drawing area 262R. When the image drawn in the drawing area 262R is projected from the projector 32 onto the main screen 5 when the projector 32 is in the first normal position, the image is projected onto the projectable area 32R shown in FIG. When the image drawn in the actual drawing area 262A is projected from the projector 32 onto the main screen 5, the image is projected onto the image display area 5X shown in FIG. The actual drawing area 262A is the first data storage area of the present invention, and the area excluding the actual drawing area 262A from the drawing area 262R is the second data storage area of the present invention. Display image data generated by converting the original image data can be stored over the drawing area 262R including the second data storage area. The VDP 262 stores the generated display image data in the drawing area 262R of the SDRAM 263.

  The actual drawing area 262A is divided into polygons, and an attribute is set in each polygon to form an image in the image area. In the actual drawing area 262A, a predetermined area, for example, an area in which an image displayed in the stereoscopic display area 5BC is drawn can be adjusted as a polygon different from other areas. When the actual drawing area 262A is designated by the display register, an image drawn and stored in the actual drawing area 262A is projected from the projector 32. An image projected from the projector 32 is displayed on the main screen 5. The image drawn in the actual drawing area 262A and the display image displayed in the display area can be adjusted by converting each of them.

  The effect control CPU 120 can access the system register 202 and the attribute register 203 via the CPU interface 201, and executes an execution command to the system register 202 and the attribute register 203 according to the process data defining the projection pattern of the projector 32. In addition, the VDP 262 is indirectly controlled by storing necessary data.

  In the process data, the setting contents performed by the effect control CPU 120 for the system register 202 and the attribute register 203 are defined for each V blank. The setting contents of the system register 202 include drawing, data transfer commands, image data and palette data for data transfer, and attribute settings. The setting contents of the attribute register 203 are attributes, that is, parameters used when drawing a character.

  In the process data, an attribute is set so that the image is updated every V blank. For this reason, the image is updated every V blank.

  Here, the drawing control will be briefly described. In order for the drawing control unit 206 to perform drawing processing, original image data such as characters necessary for drawing must be arranged in the frame buffer area. For this reason, it is necessary to arrange original image data such as a character as source data of display image data in the frame buffer area.

  For this reason, when performing various effects, the CPU 120 for effect control issues a transfer command for transferring the original image data of all characters necessary for executing the effect from the image data ROM 261 to the frame buffer area. In accordance with this transfer command, the data transfer control unit 211 places the original image data of all characters necessary for the execution of the effect in the frame buffer area. When performing an effect, the same character is often used for drawing repeatedly, but the data stored in the image data ROM 261 is compressed and takes time to read it. By placing the original image data of all necessary characters in the frame buffer area at the first stage of execution, it takes less time to draw than reading data from the image data ROM 261 for each frame. It will be. When the effect control CPU 120 executes the effect, a transfer command for transferring the original image data of all the characters necessary for the moving image reproduction from the image data ROM 261 to the frame buffer area is executed. The transfer command for the original image data of the character necessary for the transfer may be executed each time.

  Further, in order for the drawing control unit 206 to perform drawing processing, it is necessary to set an attribute in the attribute register 203. Since the attribute is different for each V blank, the attribute according to the process data is stored in the attribute register 203 for each V blank.

  Then, the effect control CPU 120 sets an attribute in the attribute register 203 for each V blank after starting the effect, and then commands execution of reading of the attribute. Along with this, the drawing control unit 206 reads the attribute of the attribute register 203 and instructs the output of the reading end interrupt signal when the reading is completed. In response to this, the effect control CPU 120 commands the execution of drawing, and the drawing control unit 206 draws the display image data of the image projected by the projector 32 and displayed on the main screen 5 in accordance with the read attribute.

  After rendering the display image data, the projector display control unit 213 of the effect control CPU 120 causes the projector 32 to project an image corresponding to the display image data onto the main screen 5 or the special screen 205A. At this time, the projector display control unit 213 controls the projector moving device 32A and adjusts the position of the projector 32 according to whether the screen for displaying an image is the main screen 5 or the special screen 205A. When the screen on which an image is displayed is the main screen 5, the projector display control unit 213 controls the projector moving device 32 </ b> A so that the projector 32 is disposed at the first normal position. In addition, when the screen on which an image is displayed is the special screen 205A, the projector display control unit 213 controls the projector moving device 32A so that the projector 32 is disposed at the second normal position.

  The sub LED control unit 270 is configured to control the sub LED 33 according to various effects such as a variable display of decorative symbols, an effect based on a display mode of the hold display or the current display, based on a command or control data from the CPU 120 for effect control. Controls lighting, flashing, etc.

  The sound control board 13 controls the speaker 8 based on a command, control data, or the like from the effect control board 12 (effect control PCU 120). The lamp control board 14 controls the game effect lamp 9 based on a command, control data, or the like from the effect control board 12 (effect control PCU 120).

  The special screen control board 135 includes commands and control data from the effect control board 12 (effect control PCU 120) and sensors 205SX (left origin sensor 205YL, right origin sensor 205YR, upper left end sensor 205ZL, upper right end sensor 205ZR). Based on the transmitted origin position signal, drive control of the lifting motor 205M (left lifting motor 205ML, right lifting motor 205MR) in the special screen device 205 is performed. The special screen 205A (see FIG. 2 and FIG. 4) appears and is accommodated by the vertical movement control of the vertical movement motor 205M.

  The power supply board 16 is installed independently of each control board such as the main board 11, the effect control board 12, and the payout control board, and generates a voltage used by each control board and mechanism component in the pachinko gaming machine 1. For example, the power supply board 16 generates AC24V, VLP (DC + 24V), VSL (DC + 30V), VDD (DC + 12V), VCC (DC + 5V), and VBB (DC + 5V). The power supply board 16 only needs to be equipped with a backup power supply circuit and a clear switch. The backup power supply circuit may include a capacitor that is charged from a power supply line of VDD (DC + 5V), for example.

  In the pachinko gaming machine 1 according to the present embodiment, an effect is executed by displaying an image projected from the projector 32 on the main screen 5 or the special screen 205A. Hereinafter, an example of an effect by displaying an image on the main screen 5 from the projector 32 in the pachinko gaming machine 1 and an operation effect in the pachinko gaming machine 1 will be described, and then an effect by displaying the image on the special screen 205A. An example of the effect including the effects of the pachinko gaming machine 1 will be described.

  First, an example of an effect produced by displaying an image on the main screen 5 from the projector 32 in the pachinko gaming machine 1 and operational effects in the pachinko gaming machine 1 will be described. For example, when the first start condition is satisfied after winning the normal winning ball apparatus 6A, an effect is started in which the variable symbol display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R shown in FIG. In addition, a reach effect is executed until the fixed decorative symbol is derived and displayed after the variable display is started, or a jackpot effect is executed during the jackpot game to which the transition is made after the jackpot symbol is derived and displayed as a special symbol. Or These effects are displayed by projecting the image projected from the projector 32 onto the main screen 5.

  The image projected from the projector 32 first reaches the reflection mirror 28 disposed inside the logo accessory 26. At the reflection mirror 28, the projected image is reflected toward the main screen 5. On the main screen 5, the projected image is displayed on the flat display area 5A and the stereoscopic display area 5B, and various effects are executed.

  Among these, when an image is projected onto the stereoscopic display area 5B, an effect by displaying a stereoscopic image formed by combining the stereoscopic shape in the stereoscopic display area 5B and the projected image is executed. By performing such an effect by displaying a stereoscopic image, it is possible to execute an effect that is more interesting than an effect using a planar image. In particular, since the screen is three-dimensional, the three-dimensional shape can be expressed more realistically than when a so-called 3D display is performed on a flat screen, so it is more interesting than the production using a flat image. Production can be performed.

  In the flat display area 5 </ b> A, an effect of image display using a video projected from the projector 32 is executed. Here, in the flat display area 5A of the main screen 5, as shown in FIG. 1, non-projection areas 5NL and 5NR where the image projected from the projector 32 does not reach are generated due to the nature of the projector 32 and the like.

  Irradiated light emitted from the sub LED 33 is shown on the non-projection areas 5NL and 5NR. In this way, by irradiating the non-projection areas 5NL and 5NR with the irradiation light of the sub LED 33, although there is an area where the projector 32 cannot project an image, it is possible to suitably perform an effect. The non-projection areas 5NL and 5NR may be supplemented with the irradiation light of the sub-LEDs 33 in addition to the aspect in which the irradiation light from the sub-LEDs 33 is simply irradiated.

  Further, in the flat display area 5A, decorative symbols are displayed in the decorative symbol display areas 5L, 5C, 5R, the hold display is displayed in the hold display areas 5H1, 5H2, the hold number display is displayed in the hold number display area 5F, and the current display area 5K. Each display is displayed this time. These decorative symbols, hold display, hold number display, and current display image (hereinafter referred to as “specific information image”) include information that is required to be surely transmitted to the player as the game progresses. By displaying such a specific information image in the flat planar display area 5A, it is possible to prevent the player from misidentifying information included in the specific information image.

  The specific information image may include an image of information other than the above image. For example, a volume adjustment display image for guiding volume adjustment, a light amount adjustment display image for guiding light amount adjustment, and a small symbol image with small decorative symbols may be included. In the image display area 5X in the flat display area 5A, the specific information image is displayed by including all of the images by the video projected from the projector 32. Instead of such an image display mode, the specific information image may be displayed in the non-projection areas 5NL and 5NR outside the image display area 5X in the flat display area 5A. However, since it is difficult to display an image with the sub-LED 33, in this case, in the non-projection areas 5NL and 5NR, an image can be displayed by a display device such as a projector other than the projector 32 or a liquid crystal display device. Preferred.

  Further, the specific information image is not displayed entirely in the flat display area 5A, but a part of the specific information image may be displayed in the stereoscopic display area 5B, or may be displayed in the stereoscopic display area. . In particular, since the decorative symbols are displayed in large characters, a part or all of them may be displayed in the stereoscopic display area 5B. In addition, a flat display area is also used for a complete display request image that is less involved in the progress of the game but has a problem caused by disordered image display, for example, a complete display request image that requires complete display of a celebrity portrait or character. It may be displayed on 5A and not displayed on the stereoscopic display area 5B. The specific image includes a specific information image and a complete display request image. In addition, various effects are executed in the flat display area 5A and the stereoscopic display area 5B, but these effects may be executed only in the flat display area 5A or only in the stereoscopic display area 5B. Good. The flat display area 5A is formed above the main screen 5, and the stereoscopic display area 5B is formed below the main screen 5, but may be formed at other positions. For example, the flat display area 5A may be disposed below and the stereoscopic display area 5B may be disposed above, the flat display area 5A may be disposed on the right side or the left side, and the stereoscopic display area 5B may be disposed on the opposite left or right side. It may be. Alternatively, the 3D display area 5B may be formed so that the flat display area 5A is formed at the center and surrounds the flat display area 5A, or the 3D display area 5B is formed at the center and surrounds the 3D display area 5B. Thus, the flat display area 5A may be formed.

  A part of the image projected from the projector 32 onto the main screen 5 has a trapezoidal shape. In the present embodiment, since the main screen 5 is rectangular, it is conceivable to perform so-called trapezoidal correction that matches the length of the long side of the trapezoid of the image projected on the main screen 5 with the length of the short side. However, due to restrictions such as the distance relationship between the main screen 5 and the projector 32 for performing keystone correction, the image cannot be corrected to a rectangle even by the keystone correction, and the image of the projector 32 cannot be displayed at the upper left and right positions of the trapezoid. Non-projection areas 5NL and 5NR are generated. In the present embodiment, the non-projection areas 5NL and 5NR are irradiated with the irradiation light of the sub LED 33, so that light is applied to the entire rectangular main screen 5, and thus the main screen 5 is rectangular. Can be recognized. In addition, since an image can be displayed in all areas of the main screen 5 having a horizontally long rectangular shape, even if there is an area that cannot be projected by the projector, it is possible to execute the effect suitably. Therefore, a decrease in interest can be suppressed.

  In the present embodiment, the sub LED 33 is disposed on the lower front side inside the game frame 3A, and the relative position relationship with the main screen 5 is that the sub LED 33 is disposed on the lower front surface of the main screen 5. Yes. The sub LED 33 may be arranged at other positions, for example, the upper front surface of the main screen 5, or the right front surface or the left front surface.

  The images displayed in the non-projection areas 5NL and 5NR may be formed by a display device other than the sub LED 33. For example, instead of the sub LED 33, another sub projector different from the projector 32 may be used, or a liquid crystal display device is arranged in the non-projection areas 5NL and 5NR of the main screen 5 to display an image on the liquid crystal display device. May be. Also, other display devices such as a CRT (Cathode Ray Tube) display or an EL display may be used.

  Further, the non-projection areas 5NL and 5NR are formed in the plane area, but a three-dimensional object such as an accessory may be provided in the non-projection area, and the three-dimensional object may be emitted by irradiating with the sub LED. Alternatively, the three-dimensional object may be made of a light-transmitting material, and a sub LED or the like may be disposed on the back side of the three-dimensional object so that the three-dimensional object emits light.

  Further, the projection light LP projected from the projector 32 is projected in a range wider than the area of the reflection mirror 28. For this reason, the projection light LP projected from the projector 32 becomes light that illuminates the decorative material 26 </ b> A in the logo accessory 26 in addition to an image reflected by the reflection mirror 28 and projected onto the main screen 5. Since the decorative material 26A is made of a light-transmitting material, the light projected from the projector 32 is transmitted and decorated.

  Further, as shown in FIG. 9B, the projection light LP projected on the reflection mirror 28 is provided on the back surface of the decorative material 26A, the inner surface of the housing 26B for the accessory, and the back surface of the reflection mirror 28, as shown in FIG. Diffuse reflection between. Due to this irregular reflection of light, the luminance of the light passing through the decorative material 26A can be increased. Furthermore, the inner surface of the accessory casing 26B and the back surface of the reflecting mirror 28 are white, and the light reflectance is high. For this reason, the amount of light irregularly reflected between the inner side surface of the logo accessory 26 and the back surface of the reflecting mirror 28 is increased, and the luminance of the light passing through the decorative material 26A can be further increased.

  In order to increase the luminance of the light passing through the decorative material 26A, the amount of light absorption is reduced between the inner side surface of the logo accessory 26 and the back surface of the accessory case 26B in the reflection mirror 28, and the reflection amount is increased. It may be made to become. Specifically, in addition to white as described above, the accessory casing 26B may be formed of a material having a high light reflectance, or a layer made of a material having a high light reflectance may be formed. Also good.

  Further, depending on the display of the main screen 5 and the contents of the effect using the logo accessory 26, the projection range of the projection light LP projected from the projector 32 is limited to the inside of the reflection mirror 28, The projection light LP may reach the inside of the logo accessory 26 beyond the range. For example, when an effect with a high expectation level for big hits is not executed, the projection light LP projected from the projector 32 is limited to the inside of the reflection mirror 28, and the logo object 26 is not decorated by passing the projection light LP. When an effect with a high expectation degree of big hit is executed, the projection light LP projected from the projector 32 may be set in a wider range than the reflection mirror 28, and decoration may be performed by the projection light LP being transmitted through the logo accessory 26. . When performing decoration by allowing the projection light LP to pass through the logo accessory 26, various decorations can be easily performed by the projection light LP projected from the projector 32.

  Further, although the projector 32 is disposed relatively upward as viewed from the main screen 5, it may be disposed below as viewed from the main screen 5, or may be disposed on the right side or the left side. Good. When the projector 32 is disposed relatively downward as viewed from the main screen 5, for example, the reflecting mirror 28 is disposed on the back side of the normal winning ball device 6A, the ordinary variable winning ball device 6B, or the special variable winning ball device 7. May be. When the projector 32 is arranged on the right or left side when viewed from the main screen 5, the reflection mirror 28 may be arranged on the back side of the decorative structure on the right or left side of the main screen 5. .

  When projecting an image from the projector 32 to the main screen 5, it is preferable to secure a certain distance between the main screen 5 and the projector 32. For this reason, for example, the projector 32 is preferably arranged on the back side of the game board 2. However, each control board such as a main board 11, an effect control board 12, a power supply board 16, and a payout control board for executing control in the pachinko gaming machine 1 is generally provided on the back side of the pachinko gaming machine 1. Since these control boards are provided, it is difficult to secure a space for arranging the projector 32 on the back side of the game board 2.

  In this regard, in the pachinko gaming machine 1 described above, the power supply board 16 is provided on the back side of the decorative structure 27. For this reason, it is not necessary to provide the power supply board 16 on the back side of the game board 2, so that a space for arranging the projector 32 can be easily secured. Therefore, the distance between the screen and the projector can be ensured. In addition, since the power supply board 16 is disposed on the back surface of the decorative structure 27, which is the front surface of the game board 2, it is possible to avoid exposure that can be visually recognized by the player.

  In addition, the projector 32 has a relatively large amount of heat radiation with use. Further, among the control boards, the heat dissipation amount of the power supply board 16 is larger than that of other control boards. By disposing the projector 32 and the power supply board 16 having a large amount of heat radiation separately on the back surface and the front surface of the game board 2, the heat radiation amount can be distributed.

  In the above embodiment, the power supply board 16 among the control boards is arranged on the front side of the game board 2, but other control boards, for example, the effect control board 12, the sound control board 13, and the lamp control board 14. May be arranged on the front side of the game board 2. Further, the main board 11 and the payout control board may be arranged on the front side of the game board 2. However, since it is difficult for the back side of the game board 2 to be illegally operated on the pachinko gaming machine 1 installed on the game island, as a security measure, the number of game balls to be paid out is controlled. It is desirable that the boards involved, such as the main board 11 and the payout control board, be arranged on the back side of the game board 2.

  Further, the irradiation of the irradiation light by the sub LED 33 may be suppressed for a while after the power is turned on (turned on) until the projection light from the projector 32 can be projected, for example. Good. Before the projector 32 can project when the power is turned on, the projector 32 needs to be warmed up. During the warming up operation, appropriate projection control from the projector 32 may not be possible. is there. When irradiation light is emitted from the sub LED 33 in a state in which projection light from the projector 32 cannot be projected, only the non-projection areas 5NL and 5NR in the main screen 5 are in a bright state, which may cause a sense of incongruity. In this respect, during the preparation time after the power is turned on, by suppressing the irradiation of the irradiation light from the sub LED 33, only the non-projection areas 5NL and 5NR in the main screen 5 become bright. Discomfort can be reduced. In addition, as an aspect which suppresses irradiation of the irradiation light from sub LED33, irradiation of irradiation light may be stopped or interrupted | blocked, and you may make it make the light quantity of irradiation light small.

  Further, a lens may be provided on the optical path of the projection light projected from the projector 32 such as each opening between the projector 32 and the main screen 5. By providing a lens on the optical path of the projection light projected from the projector 32, the size of the image projected from the projector 32 can be adjusted. A fish-eye lens may be used as a lens provided on the optical path of the projection light projected from the projector 32. By using a fisheye lens, it is possible to display a large image.

  Further, when irradiating light to the non-projection areas 5NL and 5NR, the non-projection areas 5NL and 5NR are not conspicuous than the image display area 5X, but the main screen 5 is not a trapezoid but a rectangle. Such an impression may be given to the player. Specifically, the image display area 5X and the non-projection areas 5NL, 5NR are formed of different materials, and the material used in the non-projection areas 5NL, 5NR is more than the material used in the image display area 5X. The reflectance may be lowered due to blackness or rough surface. Further, when the image display area 5X and the non-projection areas 5NL and 5NR are integrally formed, the non-projection areas 5NL and 5NR are painted black, or surface treatment is performed to roughen the surface, and reflection is performed. The rate may be lowered.

  If the positional relationship between the projector 32 and the main screen 5 and the special screen 205A is deviated, an image projected from the projector 32 may not be projected at an appropriate position on the main screen 5 and the special screen 205A. Therefore, adjustment work is performed to adjust the image displayed on the main screen 5 and the special screen 205A by adjusting the projection posture of the projector 32, display image data stored in the SDRAM 263, and the like. The adjustment work is executed before the gaming machine 1 is shipped or when the position of the projector 32, the main screen 5 and the special screen 205A is shifted after a lapse of time after the gaming machine 1 is installed in the game hall. . Hereinafter, the adjustment of the display image will be described using the display image displayed on the main screen 5 as an example. The display image displayed on the special screen 205A can be adjusted in the same manner.

  FIG. 10 is a diagram for explaining an image displayed on the screen when the display image is adjusted. In the gaming machine 1, the image display area 5X has a trapezoidal shape, but for ease of explanation, the image display area 5X will be described as a rectangular shape. When the display image is adjusted, the size of the display image is adjusted by performing vertex transformation on the display image data in the drawing area 262R (see FIG. 9A) assigned to the SDRAM 263 (see FIG. 8). .

  In order to adjust the size of the display image, an image based on the display image data stored in the drawing area 262R from the projector 32 shown in FIG. 2 to the main screen 5 is displayed in the image display area 5X shown in FIG. Project to. The main screen 5 is set with a projectable area 32R wider than the image display area 5X, and the display image data stored in the drawing area 262R is projected and displayed inside the projectable area 32R, for example. .

  In the adjustment of the display image, predetermined adjustment image data is stored in the drawing area 262R, and an adjustment image based on the adjustment image data is projected onto the main screen 5. When the adjusted image is projected on the main screen 5, for example, as shown in FIG. 10B, the adjusted image 45 is displayed inside the projectable region 32R. The adjustment image 45 includes a character image 45A and a frame image 45B. Here, the operator visually observes the degree of blurring of the characters displayed inside the projectable area 32R and performs focus adjustment.

  The focus adjustment is performed by adjusting the distance from the projector 32 (see FIG. 2) with respect to the main screen 5. Adjustment of the distance from the projector 32 with respect to the main screen 5 is performed by moving the projector 32 by the projector moving device 32A. The focus adjustment may be performed by the focus adjustment function when the projector 32 has the focus adjustment function.

  After the focus adjustment is completed, position adjustment patterns 46A to 46D are displayed at the four corners of the adjustment image 45 as shown in FIG. Here, in adjusting the display image, adjustment of the display image by moving the projector 32 with the projector moving device 32A will be described. When the projector 32 is moved by the projector moving device 32A as shown in FIG. 11, the image to be adjusted becomes as shown in FIG. For example, as shown in FIG. 11, when the projector 32 is moved in the left direction 32YL, the display image 32P is moved in the left direction 32PL as shown in FIG. On the other hand, when the projector 32 is moved in the right direction 32YR, the display image 32P is moved in the left direction 32PR.

  Also, as shown in FIG. 11, when the projector 32 is moved in the upward direction 32ZU, the display image 32P is moved in the upward direction 32PU as shown in FIG. On the other hand, when the projector 32 is moved downward 32ZD, the display image 32P moves downward 32PD as shown in FIG.

  Further, as shown in FIG. 11, when the projector 32 is moved in the front direction 32XN, which is a direction to approach the main screen 5, as shown in FIG. 12C, the display image 32P is moved in the contraction direction 32PN. Shrink and shrink. On the other hand, as shown in FIG. 11, when the projector 32 is moved in the depth direction 32XF, which is a direction away from the main screen 5, the display image 32P is displayed in the enlargement direction 32PF as shown in FIG. Expand and expand. The display image is rotated by redrawing the display image data stored in the drawing area 262R. For example, when the display image data stored in the drawing area 262R is rotated in the clockwise direction, the projected image is rotated in the clockwise direction 32XM1, as shown in FIG. At this time, as shown in FIG. 12D, the display image 32P rotates in the clockwise direction 32PM1. When the display image data stored in the drawing area 262R is rotated in the clockwise direction, the projected image is rotated in the counterclockwise direction 32XM2. At this time, as shown in FIG. 12D, the display image 32P rotates in the counterclockwise direction 32PM2.

  As the projector 32 moves, the position of the reflecting mirror 28 is also adjusted by the mirror moving device 28A (FIG. 2). The position of the reflection mirror 28 is adjusted so that the image projected from the projector 32 reaches the main screen 5 along with the position adjustment of the projector 32. However, the reflection mirror 28 may be fixed, and the display image may be adjusted by adjusting the position of the projector 32.

  Returning to FIG. 10C, when the patterns 46 </ b> A to 46 </ b> D are displayed on the adjustment image 45, the projector 32 is moved by the projector moving device 32 </ b> A (FIG. 2), and any of the markers 35 </ b> A to 35 </ b> D provided on the main screen 5. Any one of the patterns 46A to 46D is matched. Here, as shown in FIG. 10D, the upper left pattern 46A is aligned with the upper left marker 35A.

  Subsequently, the patterns 46B to 46D in the adjustment image 45 are matched with the markers 35B to 35D, respectively. When aligning the patterns 46B to 46D with the markers 35B to 35D, respectively, the adjustment image data drawn in the drawing area 262R is first redrawn so as to rotate about the upper left pattern 46A, and the upper left pattern 46A and the lower left pattern 46A. The pattern 46B is positioned on a straight line connecting the upper left marker 35A and the lower left marker 35B. Next, the distance from the projector 32 to the main screen 5 is adjusted, and the upper left pattern 46A and the lower left pattern 46B are matched with the upper left marker 35A and the lower left marker 35B, respectively. Subsequently, the adjustment image data drawn in the drawing area 262R is redrawn so as to match the remaining upper right pattern 46C and lower right pattern 46D with the upper right marker 35C and lower right marker 35D, respectively. In this way, the patterns 46A to 46D in the adjustment image 45 are matched with the markers 35A to 35D on the main screen 5 as shown in FIG.

  When the display image is adjusted in this way, as shown in FIG. 13A, an image displayed in an important area such as the center in the image display area 5X is displayed in the area as necessary. Adjust specific parts. The important area here may include, for example, a 3D display area 5BC and an area where a specific image (specific information image or complete display request image) is displayed. Each image is an image that is displayed when various effects are executed, and in the adjustment of the specific portion, for example, a character or the like is surely displayed in an image display area such as the stereoscopic display area 5BC. Adjustment for this is performed by the VDP 262. When adjusting a specific part, prepare several sample images from various images, and adjust the specific image included in this sample image to be displayed in a predetermined display area such as a stereoscopic display area. Do.

  In the adjustment of the display image described here, the marker 35A to 35D and the pattern 46A to 46D are matched with each other so that the pattern is matched with another marker by rotating the image. However, other embodiments may be used. For example, before the marker and the pattern are matched, the relative position between the adjustment image 45 and the main screen 5 may be roughly aligned, and then the image and the pattern may be rotated to match the marker and the pattern. In this case, other markers and patterns may be provided at the center of the image.

  The VDP 262 divides the actual drawing area 262A as shown in FIG. The actual drawing area 262A includes a central specific divided area 262B and a non-specific divided area 262C around the specific divided area 262B. Among these, the specific divided area 262B and the non-specific divided area 262C can be converted independently. With the division of the actual drawing area 262A, the original image data stored in the actual drawing area 262A is divided in the same manner. Further, the display image corresponding to the display image data stored in the specific divided area 262B is a specific part, and the display image corresponding to the display image data stored in the non-specific divided area 262C is a non-specific part other than the specific part. . The specific divided area 262B may include a heavy area such as a stereoscopic display area 5BC or an area where a specific image (specific information image or complete display request image) is displayed.

  The polygons in the specific divided area 262B are divided into polygons finer than those in the non-specific divided area 262C. As shown in FIG. 13A, in the image display area 5X, original image data or display image data (hereinafter also referred to as “original image data etc.”) stored in the center specific divided area 262B in the actual drawing area 262A. A specific display area 35T for displaying the image is set, and a non-specific display area 35U for displaying an image such as original image data stored in the non-specific divided area 262C is set around the specific display area 35T. An image display area 5X is formed by the specific display area 35T and the non-specific display area 35U.

  As shown in FIG. 13A, when the image displayed in the specific display area 35T matches the predetermined area, it is not necessary to adjust the original image data stored in the specific divided area 262B. On the other hand, when the image displayed in the specific display area 35T does not match the predetermined area, the original image data stored in the specific divided area 262B is adjusted. When adjusting the original image data stored in the specific divided area 262B, as shown in FIG. 13B, the positions of the four corners in the non-specific display area 35U around the specific display area 35T are not changed. The original image data and the like in the specific divided area 262B are sequentially converted and adjusted.

  Here, as shown in FIG. 14, the polygons in the specific divided area 262B are made finer than the polygons in the non-specific divided area 262C. For this reason, it is possible to finely adjust a specific portion when performing alignment or the like in the specific divided region 262B. Further, polygons are roughly set for the non-specific divided area 262C. The information displayed in the non-specific display area 35U is less important than the information displayed in the specific display area 35T. Can be reduced.

  In adjusting the specific divided area 262B, as shown in FIG. 15A, after adjusting the non-specific divided area 262C except the specific divided area 262B, the adjustment of the specific divided area 262B is performed. May be performed. Alternatively, as shown in FIG. 15B, after adjusting the specific divided area 262B and the non-specific divided area 262C together, the specific divided area 262B may be adjusted.

  When the specific portion is adjusted as necessary in this way, characters are displayed and focus adjustment is performed again as shown in FIG. Thereafter, as shown in FIG. 13D, a predetermined confirmation image (target image) is displayed in the image display area 5X, and the final confirmation of the image is performed. After the final confirmation is made, the adjustment of the display image ends.

  In the gaming machine 1 having the above configuration, the projector 32 projects a display image on the image display area from an oblique projection direction with respect to the image display area 5X of the main screen 5. For this reason, since the image based on the adjustment image data has a trapezoidal shape before the adjustment of the display image, when the adjustment image data is adjusted so that the image is rectangular, the adjusted rectangular image is A rectangular image within the range of the image based on the adjusted image data is obtained. Therefore, if the drawing area 262R is common to the actual drawing area 262A, an image cannot be displayed over the entire image display area 5X.

  In this regard, in the gaming machine 1 described above, the drawing area 262R is allocated as a larger area than the actual drawing area 262A. For this reason, when the trapezoidal image is adjusted to a rectangular shape by adjusting the display image, the adjusted image can be displayed within the range of the image display area 5X. Therefore, a normal image can be projected without depending on the image correction by the projector 32. However, the image displayed in the drawing area 262R may be corrected and projected by the correction function of the projector 32.

  In the gaming machine 1 described above, when the display image is adjusted, the projector 32 is moved up and down, left and right, or the display image data stored in the drawing area 262R is rotated. For this reason, a display image can be adjusted efficiently. In adjusting the display image, the vertical and horizontal positions are adjusted by moving the projector 32, and the rotation position of the display image is adjusted by rotating the display image data. Although it is relatively easy to move the projector 32 in the up, down, left, and right directions, the movement in the rotational direction has a difficulty in that the projector 32 needs to be held. By performing such adjustment of the rotation direction with the display image data, the display image can be adjusted more efficiently.

  The main screen 5 is provided with markers 35A to 35D. By providing the markers 35A to 35D, the markers 35A to 35D can be used as marks when adjusting the display image. Therefore, the display image can be adjusted more efficiently.

  In the present embodiment, the markers 35A to 35D are provided at the corners of the main screen 5, but may be provided at other positions. For example, it may be provided in each of the flat display area 5A and the stereoscopic display area 5B, or may be provided at a specific position in the flat display area 5A, for example, at the center position of the flat display area. Further, it may be provided at a characteristic part in the stereoscopic display area 5B, for example, a part where the face of the character is displayed, or may be provided at the boundary between the flat display area 5A and the stereoscopic display area 5B. Alternatively, a plurality of markers may be provided so as to draw a predetermined shape such as a regular hexagon or an ellipse.

  In the above gaming machine 1, original image data stored in the specific divided area 262 </ b> B corresponding to the specific portion of the image displayed on the main screen 5, and the non-specific portion of the image displayed on the main screen 5. The original image data and the like stored in the corresponding non-specific divided area 262C can be adjusted independently. For this reason, with respect to the original image data or the like stored in the specific divided area 262B, the specific portion can be adjusted independently of the original image data stored in the non-specific divided area 262C. Therefore, it is possible to suppress the occurrence of image distortion in the specific portion.

  The adjustment of the original image data stored in the specific divided area 262B is performed after the adjustment of the original image data stored in the non-specific divided area 262C. For this reason, after the adjustment for the entire non-specific divided area 262C, the adjustment for the partial specific divided area 262B is performed. Therefore, the display image can be adjusted efficiently.

  In the specific divided area 262B and the non-specific divided area 262C, the original image data is divided and converted into a plurality of parts. For this reason, it is possible to finely adjust the display image. In particular, the specific divided area 262B is divided more finely than the non-specific divided area 262C. Therefore, the display image corresponding to the specific divided area 262B can be adjusted more finely.

  The specific portion is an image displayed in the stereoscopic display area 5B in the display image. In the stereoscopic display area 5B, a characteristic effect is often executed as compared with the flat display area 5A, and therefore, the stereoscopic display area 5B is a portion having higher importance in the effect display. Generation | occurrence | production of the distortion about the image in the stereoscopic display area 5B with such high importance can be suppressed.

  In the above embodiment, the operator manually adjusts the display image displayed on the main screen 5, but an automatic adjustment device that adjusts the display image may be used. Hereinafter, an example using the automatic adjustment device will be described. FIG. 16 is a diagram illustrating a configuration of the automatic adjustment device. As shown in FIG. 16, the automatic adjustment device 42 includes a command input device 38. The command input device 38 is electrically connected to the effect control board 12. In addition, the effect control board 12 is provided with a motor drive control unit 126. Further, the automatic adjustment device 42 includes a projector drive motor 32B and a mirror drive motor 28B. Both the projector drive motor 32B and the mirror drive motor 28B are electrically connected to the effect control board 12.

  Both the projector drive motor 32B and the mirror drive motor 28B are servo motors. The projector drive motor 32B drives the projector moving device 32A based on the drive signal transmitted from the effect control board 12. The mirror drive motor 28B drives the mirror moving device 28A based on the drive signal transmitted from the effect control board 12.

  The command input device 38 has eight keys, an up key, a down key, a right key, a left key, a front key, a rear key, a right rotation key, and a left rotation key. When each key is operated while adjusting the display image, an operation signal is transmitted to the effect control board 12. The effect control board 12 is processed by the display control unit 123 or the motor drive control unit 126 when receiving the operation signal.

  When the up key operation signal is transmitted from the command input device 38, the effect control board 12 generates an ascending signal that raises the projector 32 and the reflecting mirror 28 so that the image displayed on the main screen 5 rises. The effect control board 12 transmits the generated rising signal to the projector drive motor 32B and the mirror drive motor 28B.

  When the down key operation signal is transmitted from the command input device 38, the effect control board 12 generates a lowering signal for lowering the projector 32 and the reflecting mirror 28 so that the image displayed on the main screen 5 is lowered. The effect control board 12 transmits the generated descending signal to the projector drive motor 32B and the mirror drive motor 28B.

  When the left key operation signal is transmitted from the command input device 38, the effect control board 12 transmits a left movement signal for moving the projector 32 and the reflection mirror 28 so that the image displayed on the main screen 5 moves to the left. Generate. The effect control board 12 transmits the generated left movement signal to the projector drive motor 32B and the mirror drive motor 28B.

  When the right key operation signal is transmitted from the command input device 38, the effect control board 12 transmits a right movement signal for moving the projector 32 and the reflection mirror 28 so that the image displayed on the main screen 5 moves to the right. Generate. The effect control board 12 transmits the generated right movement signal to the projector drive motor 32B and the mirror drive motor 28B.

  When the front key operation signal is transmitted from the command input device 38, the effect control board 12 generates a forward signal for moving the projector 32 forward so that the image displayed on the main screen 5 is enlarged. The effect control board 12 transmits the generated forward signal to the projector drive motor 32B.

  When the rear key operation signal is transmitted from the command input device 38, the effect control board 12 generates a backward signal that causes the projector 32 to retract so that the image displayed on the main screen 5 is reduced. The effect control board 12 transmits the generated backward signal to the projector drive motor 32B.

  When the right rotation key operation signal is transmitted from the command input device 38, the effect control board 12 displays an image obtained by rotating the image displayed on the main screen 5 in the clockwise direction on the VDP 262 provided in the display control unit 123 (FIG. 8). (See). The effect control board 12 causes the projector 32 to project an image corresponding to the generated image.

  When the left rotation key operation signal is transmitted from the command input device 38, the effect control board 12 generates an image obtained by rotating the image displayed on the main screen 5 counterclockwise in the VDP 262 provided in the display control unit 123. To do. The effect control board 12 causes the projector 32 to project an image corresponding to the generated image.

  Next, display image adjustment will be described. FIG. 17 is a diagram for explaining an image displayed on the screen when the display image is adjusted. First, an image based on the display image data stored in the drawing area 262R is projected from the projector 32 onto the main screen 5 as shown in FIG. When the adjusted image is projected onto the main screen 5, an adjusted image 45 is displayed on the main screen 5, as shown in FIG. The adjustment image 45 includes a character image 45A and a frame image 45B. Here, the operator visually observes the degree of blurring of characters displayed on the main screen 5 and performs focus adjustment.

  Subsequently, focus adjustment is performed using the automatic adjustment device 42. The focus adjustment is performed by moving the projector 32 forward or backward and adjusting the distance from the projector 32 to the main screen 5. The focus adjustment may be performed by the focus adjustment function when the projector 32 has the focus adjustment function.

  After the focus adjustment is completed, the position adjustment patterns 46A to 46D are displayed at the four corners of the adjustment image 45 as shown in FIG. When the patterns 46 </ b> A to 46 </ b> D are displayed on the adjustment image 45, the worker operates the up / down / left / right keys appropriately to move the projector 32, and the patterns 46 </ b> A to 46 </ b> D are placed on any of the markers 35 </ b> A to 35 </ Match any of 46D.

  Subsequently, the patterns 46B to 46D in the adjustment image 45 are matched with the markers 35B to 35D, respectively. When the display image is adjusted in this way, as shown in FIG. 18A, the image displayed in the specific display area 35T in the image display area 5X is surely displayed in the area as necessary. Adjust specific parts.

  When adjusting the specific part, as shown in FIG. 18B, the positions of the four corners in the non-specific display area 35U around the specific display area 35T are not changed, and the adjustment of the image in the specific display area 35T is performed. I do. Then, as shown in FIG. 18C, characters are displayed and focus adjustment is performed again. Thereafter, as shown in FIG. 18D, an arbitrary confirmation image (target image) is displayed in the image display area 5X, and the final confirmation of the image is performed. After the final confirmation is made, the adjustment of the display image ends.

  Thus, by adjusting the display image using the automatic adjustment device 42, when the projector moving device 32A is moved, input is performed by the command input device 38 and a servo motor can be used. Therefore, it is possible to move the projector moving device 32A more accurately and reliably than manually moving the projector moving device 32A.

  In the case of using the automatic adjustment device 42, the work by the worker may be completely eliminated and the automation may be performed completely. For example, an image displayed on the main screen 5 is captured by an imaging unit such as a camera, and image processing is performed on the image captured by the imaging unit, so that the main screen 5 and the image displayed on the main screen 5 are shifted. Is detected. Based on the detected shift, the projector drive motor 32B and mirror drive motor 28B of the automatic adjustment device 42 may be operated, and the image may be rotated to adjust the image.

  Next, an example of an effect including an effect by displaying an image on the special screen 205A and an effect in the pachinko gaming machine 1 will be described. The effect of displaying an image on special screen 205A is executed as a special screen appearance effect during the specific super reach β effect. Hereinafter, the progress of the game in the pachinko gaming machine 1 will be schematically described.

  In the pachinko gaming machine 1, the general symbol display 20 starts the general game based on the fact that the general diagram start condition is satisfied after the general diagram start condition is satisfied. In the regular game, after the variable display of the normal symbol is started (after the change of the normal symbol is started), the fixed normal symbol which becomes the variable display result of the normal symbol after a predetermined time as the normal symbol change time has elapsed. Is stopped (derived display). At this time, if a specific normal symbol (a symbol per ordinary symbol), such as a number indicating “7”, is stopped and displayed as the fixed ordinary symbol, the variable symbol display result of the ordinary symbol becomes “per ordinary symbol”. On the other hand, if a normal symbol other than the symbol per symbol such as a number or symbol other than the number indicating “7” is stopped and displayed as the fixed ordinary symbol, the variable symbol display result of the normal symbol is “ordinary loss”. Become. Corresponding to the fact that the variable symbol display result of the normal symbol is “per normal”, the normal variable winning ball apparatus 6B is set in the expanded open state, and is controlled to return to the normal open state after a predetermined time.

  In the pachinko gaming machine 1, a special game (first special game) is started by the first special symbol display device 4A based on the fact that the first start condition is satisfied after the first start condition is satisfied. A special game (second special game) is started by the second special symbol display device 4B on the basis that the second start condition is satisfied after the start condition is satisfied. In the special figure game, after the variable display of the special symbol is started (after the change of the special symbol is started), when the variable display time as the special figure change time elapses, the fixed special that becomes the variable display result of the special symbol Derives and displays a symbol (special image display result). At this time, if a specific special symbol (big hit symbol) is stopped and displayed as a confirmed special symbol, it becomes a “big hit” as a specific display result, and if a special symbol different from the big bonus symbol is stopped and displayed as a fixed special symbol, “ It will be “losing”. If a predetermined special symbol (small hit symbol) different from the big hit symbol or the small hit symbol is stopped and displayed, the “small hit” as the predetermined display result may be used.

  In the pachinko gaming machine 1 according to the present embodiment, as an example, special symbols indicating the numbers “3”, “5”, and “7” are jackpot symbols, and a special symbol indicating the symbol “−” is a lost symbol. It should be noted that each symbol such as a jackpot symbol and a lost symbol in the first special symbol game by the first special symbol display device 4A is different from each symbol in the second special symbol game by the second special symbol display device 4B. Alternatively, a special symbol common to both special symbol games may be a jackpot symbol or a lost symbol.

  After the variable display result in the special figure game becomes “big hit”, the pachinko gaming machine 1 is controlled to the big hit gaming state which is a specific gaming state. The pachinko gaming machine 1 executes a round (also referred to as “round game”) advantageous for the player a predetermined number of times (a predetermined number of rounds) in the big hit gaming state. The round is the opening cycle of the big prize opening. In addition, after the variable display result in the special game is “small hit”, the pachinko gaming machine 1 is controlled to the small hit game state which is a special game state different from the big hit game state.

  The pachinko gaming machine 1 opens and closes the big prize opening door of the special variable winning ball device 7 in each round (each round) after the variable display result in the special game becomes “big hit”, and wins a big prize. The mouth state (open state, closed state) is changed. For example, the pachinko gaming machine 1 changes the big prize opening from the closed state to the open state at the start of the round, and then changes the big prize opening from the open state to the closed state. In other words, the pachinko machine 1 opens the grand prize opening door at the start of the round and keeps the grand prize opening open, and then closes the grand prize opening door and keeps the grand prize opening closed. End the round.

  The pachinko gaming machine 1 changes the big prize opening to the open state once per round (changes the big prize opening from the open state to the closed state during one round). In addition, the pachinko gaming machine 1 may change the big prize opening to the open state a plurality of times per round. For example, the pachinko gaming machine 1 may change the grand prize opening to an open state twice per round (during the round, the grand prize opening is open → closed → open → closed) May change with the state).

  In addition, the grand prize opening is maintained in the closed state instead of the aspect in which the round is started by changing the big prize opening from the closed state to the open state as described above (the aspect in which the grand prize opening door is immediately opened at the start of the round). It may be a mode in which the round starts (a mode in which the grand prize opening door is not opened at the start of the round). That is, the pachinko machine 1 keeps the grand prize opening closed without opening the grand prize opening door at the start of the round, and then opens the grand prize opening door and keeps the grand prize opening open. Alternatively, the grand prize opening door may be closed to end one round.

  The predetermined number of times (predetermined number of rounds) in which the round is executed in the big hit gaming state may not be a fixed (constant) number of times (for example, always 10 times). For example, the predetermined number of times (predetermined number of rounds) in which the round is executed in the big hit gaming state is any one selected (lottery) from a plurality of types of times (for example, 2, 8, 16) It may be the number of times.

  That is, in the pachinko gaming machine 1, in the jackpot gaming state, the number of executions of the round is the upper limit number (if the predetermined number is a fixed number, the fixed number is selected from a plurality of types. Repeat the round until the selected number of times is reached. In addition, the pachinko gaming machine 1 ends the execution of the round when a predetermined condition is satisfied (for example, a game ball has not won a prize winning opening) even before the number of rounds reaches the upper limit. May be.

  In the round, the big prize opening is either a predetermined time (opening period) after opening the big prize opening door, or a predetermined number (for example, nine) of winnings to the big prize opening occurs. It is maintained in an open state until the period until. The predetermined time (open period) during which the prize winning opening is maintained in the round may not be a fixed (constant) time (for example, always 29 seconds). For example, the predetermined time (open period) during which the prize winning opening is maintained in the open state in the round is any one selected (lottery) from a plurality of types of times (for example, 0.1 seconds and 29 seconds). It may be time.

  In the round, the big prize opening is maintained in a closed state (closed state in the round) until a predetermined time (closed period) elapses. For example, in the case of a mode in which the round starts with the grand prize opening being changed from the closed state to the open state, the grand prize opening is until a predetermined time (closing period) has elapsed after the grand prize opening door is closed. Stay closed for a period of time. Further, for example, in the case of a mode in which a round starts with the grand prize opening maintained in a closed state, the big prize opening is in a closed state for a period until a predetermined time (closing period) elapses after the round starts. Maintained. The predetermined time (closing period) during which the grand prize winning opening is kept closed in the round may not be a fixed (constant) time (for example, always 3 seconds). For example, the predetermined time (closing period) during which the grand prize winning opening is maintained closed in the round is any time selected (lottery) from a plurality of types of times (for example, 1 second, 3 seconds). There may be.

  From the above, in the big hit gaming state, the pachinko gaming machine 1 executes, for example, each round of changing the big prize opening from the open state (29 seconds) to the closed state (3 seconds), or opens the big prize opening. Each round of changing from state (29 seconds) to closed state (3 seconds) is executed 16 times, or the grand prize opening is opened (0.1 seconds) → closed state (1 second) → open state (0.1 Each round that is changed from (second) to closed state (one second) can be executed twice. Also, the pachinko gaming machine 1 in the big hit gaming state performs the round of changing the grand prize opening from the open state (29 seconds) to the closed state (3 seconds) eight times and then opens the big prize port (0. It is also possible to execute each round changing from 1 second) to closed state (1 second) eight times.

  Of the rounds in the big hit gaming state, a round having a relatively long predetermined time (opening period) in which the big prize opening is in an open state (for example, a round in which the open state is 29 seconds) is also referred to as a normal open round. A round in which the predetermined time (opening period) for which the big prize opening is in an open state is relatively short (for example, a round in which the open state is 0.1 second) is also referred to as a short-term open round.

  Of the special symbols that are jackpot symbols, the jackpot symbol corresponding to the normal opening round (the jackpot symbol controlled to the jackpot gaming state in which the normal opening round is executed later) may be referred to as the normal opening round jackpot symbol. . Of the special symbols that are jackpot symbols, the jackpot symbol corresponding to the short-term opening round (the jackpot symbol controlled to the jackpot gaming state in which the short-term opening round is executed later) may be referred to as the short-term opening round jackpot symbol.

  In the big hit gaming state (normal open big hit state) controlled after the normal open round big hit symbol is derived as the fixed special symbol in the special figure game, the normal open round is executed a predetermined number of times (a predetermined number of rounds). Also, in the big hit gaming state (short term open big hit state) controlled after the short-term open round big hit symbol is derived as a definite special symbol in the special figure game, the short-term open round is executed a predetermined number of times (a predetermined number of rounds). The If the number of executions of the normal opening round is larger in the normal opening big hit state than the short opening big hit state, the short opening is executed in addition to the normal opening round in the normal opening big hit state. In the big hit state, a normal opening round may be executed in addition to the short-term opening round.

  As described above, the pachinko gaming machine 1 has the value obtained by the player in each jackpot game state as the jackpot game state controlled after the variable display result in the special figure game becomes “big hit”, that is, the game It is possible to prepare (realize) various jackpot gaming states with different degrees of advantage (for example, the number of winning balls (number of balls)) viewed from the player.

  As an example of the case where the short-term free round is not used, the round is advantageous to the player over the jackpot gaming state in which the round (normally open round) is executed eight times and the jackpot gaming state in which the round (normally open round) is executed eight times. A jackpot gaming state in which (normally open round) is executed 16 times can be prepared. In the above example, if there is no difference in the number of times that the winning prize opening is changed to the open state in each round (normally open round) or the time (open time) of each open state, the round (normally open round) is determined. In the big hit gaming state executed 16 times, it is possible to expect twice as many balls as the big hit gaming state executed eight times (normally open round).

  As an example of using short-term open rounds, a jackpot gaming state (actually eight rounds of jackpot gaming state) in which eight short-term open rounds are executed after executing eight regular opening rounds, and a bonus game state of substantial eight rounds. It is possible to prepare a jackpot gaming state in which a normal open round is executed 16 times, which is advantageous to the player. In the above example, there is no difference in the number of times that the big prize opening is changed to the open state in each normal open round and the time (open time) of each open state, and the number of items that can be obtained in the short-term open round If it is so small as to be negligible, in the big hit gaming state in which the normal opening round is executed 16 times, it is possible to expect a double play in the big hit gaming state of 8 rounds.

  In addition, even if the predetermined time (opening period) has not passed since the opening of the grand prize opening door, if the predetermined number of winnings to the big prize opening occurs, the grand prize opening changes from the open state to the closed state. However, the value obtained by the player may be varied by providing a difference in the predetermined number. For example, a big hit gaming state in which the above-mentioned predetermined number is set to 5 and the normal opening round (opening time is 29 seconds) is executed 8 times, and the normal opening round (the opening time is 29 seconds) is set to 8 above. A jackpot gaming state in which the normal opening round (opening time is 29 seconds), in which the predetermined number is 10, which is more advantageous to the player than the jackpot gaming state to be executed once, may be prepared.

  Further, the value obtained by the player may be varied by providing a difference in the number of prize balls to be paid out based on the occurrence of winning in the big winning opening. For example, it is more advantageous for the player than the big hit gaming state in which the normal opening round with 6 prize balls is executed 16 times and the big hit gaming state in which the normal opening round with 6 prize balls is executed 16 times. A big hit gaming state in which a normal open round with 12 award balls is executed 16 times may be prepared.

  Further, in addition to the value obtained by the player by the jackpot gaming state itself (value obtained by the player during the jackpot gaming state), the type of state of the pachinko gaming machine 1 controlled after the jackpot gaming state (for example, , Normal state, time-short state, probability change state) and the period (eg, time-short state, probability change state) of the pachinko gaming machine 1 controlled after the big hit game state (for example, the number of time reductions, ST The value obtained by the player after the jackpot gaming state may be varied by varying the number of times).

  In the present embodiment, the pachinko gaming machine 1 is controlled after the 8R probability variable big hit (described later) is set as the big hit gaming state that is controlled after the variable display result in the special figure game becomes “big hit”. A big hit gaming state in which the normal open round is executed 8 times and a big hit gaming state in which the normal open round controlled after the 16R probability variable big hit (described later) is executed 16 times are prepared.

  In the decorative symbol display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R arranged in the display area of the main screen 5, the first special symbol game by the first special symbol display device 4A and the second special symbol game by the second special symbol display device 4B. In response to the start of any of the special figure games, the variable display of the decorative symbols is started. In the decorative symbol display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R, the variable display state of the decorative symbol is a specific variable during the period from the start of the variable display of the decorative symbol to the end of the variable display due to the stop display of the confirmed decorative symbol. There may be a predetermined reach state that constitutes a part of the display combination.

  The reach state refers to a decorative pattern (also referred to as “reach variation pattern”) that has not been stopped yet when the decorative symbols that are stopped and displayed in the display area of the main screen 5 constitute a part of the jackpot combination. Is a display state in which the variation continues, or a display state in which all or part of the decorative symbols change synchronously while constituting all or part of the jackpot combination. In the following description, reaching a reach state is also referred to as reach establishment (reach establishment).

  Further, among the combinations of decorative symbols displayed in the decorative symbol display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R, when all the decorative symbols are stopped and displayed, combinations other than the big hit combination are referred to as lost combinations. A combination of decorative symbols that are stopped and displayed as part of the jackpot combination is also referred to as a reach combination. In addition, a combination of decorative symbols including a reach combination is also referred to as a reach lose combination, and a combination of decorative symbols not including a reach combination is also referred to as a non-reach loss combination. Further, when the reach combination is displayed, the reach variation symbol may be displayed together with the reach combination, or may not be displayed. In addition, the reach combination may be displayed in an area in the main screen 5 or the special screen 205A other than the decorative symbol display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R with the execution of the reach effect.

  Further, in response to the reach state, the variation speed of the decorative pattern is reduced, or a character image (an effect image imitating a person) different from the decorative pattern is displayed in the display area of the main screen 5. By changing the display mode of the background image, playing back and displaying a moving image different from the decorative design, or changing the variation mode of the decorative design, a different rendering operation from before reaching the reach state is executed. There is a case. Such effect operations such as the display of the character image, the change of the display mode of the background image, the reproduction display of the moving image, and the change of the variation mode of the decorative pattern are referred to as reach effect (or reach effect display). In addition, not only the display operation on the main screen 5 but also the sound output operation by the speaker 8, the light emission operation of the lamp 9 (lighting operation, blinking operation, extinguishing operation), or the operation of the special screen device 205 etc. It may be included that the operation mode is different from the operation mode before reaching the reach state.

  As an effect operation in the reach effect, a plurality of types of effect patterns (also referred to as “reach patterns”) having different operation modes (reach modes) may be prepared in advance. Then, depending on the production pattern, the possibility that the jackpot combination or the like is finally stopped and displayed after the reach production may be varied (also referred to as “hit expectation” or “hit reliability”). As a result, the jackpot expectation can be made different depending on which of a plurality of types of reach effects is executed, that is, depending on which reach effect appears. As an example, in the present embodiment, the reach mode of normal reach and the reach mode of super reach that has a higher expectation degree of big hits than normal reach are set (prepared) in advance.

  In addition, during the variable display of the decorative design, a slide effect or a pseudo-continuous effect realized by a variable display operation of the decorative design or the like can be executed as one aspect of the variable display effect. In the slide effect, the decorative symbols are changed in all of the decorative symbol display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R, and then a plurality of decorative symbol display areas (for example, “left” and “right” decorative symbol display areas 5L and 5R) are displayed. After temporarily displaying the decorative symbols at, a predetermined number (for example, “1” or “2”) of the decorative symbol display areas (for example, “left” decorative symbol display area) in the temporarily stopped display of the decorative symbols display area 5L and the “right” decorative symbol display area 5R, or both), the decorative symbol is changed again, and then the stop symbol is displayed, thereby performing the effect display for changing the decorative symbol to be stopped and displayed. Thus, in the slide effect, a plurality of decorative symbols are temporarily stopped and displayed until a fixed decorative symbol resulting in variable display is derived and displayed after variable display of the decorative symbols is started, and then variable for a predetermined number of decorative symbols. By executing the display again, there are a case where the variable display state of the decorative symbol becomes the reach state and a case where the decorative symbol constituting the non-reach combination is stopped and displayed without reaching the reach state.

  In the pseudo-continuous production, in response to the fact that one of the first start condition and the second start condition of the special figure game is satisfied once, the fixed decoration that becomes a variable display result after the variable display of the decorative symbols is started. Before the symbols are derived and displayed, all of the decorative symbols in the decorative symbol display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R (for example, a predetermined pseudo-continuous chance is a part of the decorative symbol display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R). Or temporarily displayed), in the decorative symbol display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R, a re-variable display, which is an effect display for starting variable display of all the decorative symbols, is performed in a predetermined manner. Times (for example, up to 4 times).

  The number of re-variable displays (number of re-variable displays) in the pseudo-continuous effect is the number of variable displays (first variable display) until all the decorative symbols are temporarily stopped for the first time in the decorative symbol display areas 5L, 5C, 5R ( 1), the number of re-variable displays (final variable display) after all decorative symbols have been temporarily stopped (last time), and the number X of re-variable displays between the first variable display and the last variable display ( X is 0 or 1 or more) and the number of times (X + 1) less than the number of times (X + 2) obtained by adding together. In addition, the number of re-variable display times is the same as the number of times that all decorative symbols are temporarily displayed in the decorative symbol display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R (the number of temporary stops). The first variable display to the first temporary stop display are also referred to as the first pseudo-continuous, the second variable display (the first re-variable display) to the second temporary stop display are also referred to as the second pseudo-continuous, The third variable display (second revariable display) to the third temporary stop display are also referred to as the third pseudo-ream, and the fourth variable display (third revariable display) to fourth temporary stop display. This is also called the fourth pseudo-ream. Further, the number of pseudo-continuations in the pseudo-continuous production is also referred to as the number of pseudo-series fluctuations (or the number of pseudo-series). That is, the number of pseudo continuous fluctuations, the number of re-variable display times, and the number of temporary stops are the same. The increase in the number of pseudo-continuations such as the first, second, third,... Is also referred to as “the pseudo-continuation continues”.

  In the variable display effect of “pseudo-continuous”, the re-variable display (re-variation) is performed once to four times, so that the decoration pattern is variable based on the fact that the first start condition or the second start condition is satisfied once. The display can appear as if it were started 2-5 times in a row. In the present embodiment, an example in which revariable display (revariation) is performed once or twice (see FIG. 21) is shown, but revariable display (revariation) may be performed three or more times.

  In the pseudo-continuous effect, before reaching reach in the change (before reaching the reach state), the pseudo-continuous chance is temporarily displayed in any or all of the decorative symbol display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R. As shown, the decorative symbols in all of the decorative symbol display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R may be temporarily stopped, or after reach is established, any one of the decorative symbol display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R may be temporarily stopped. The decorative symbols in all the decorative symbol display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R may be temporarily stopped so that the pseudo consecutive chances are temporarily stopped and displayed. That is, the temporary stop display effect mode in the pseudo-continuous effect includes at least an effect mode in which the temporary stop display is performed before the reach state is reached, and an effect mode in which the chance symbol is temporarily stopped after the reach state is reached. May be. The chance symbol can be stopped and displayed even when the reach state is not reached.

  The slip effect (similar to the pseudo-ream effect) is a notice or suggestion to the player that there is a possibility that any reach effect, or a certain reach effect may be executed, or that the degree of expectation of the big hit is high. May be. Hereinafter, an effect for giving a notice or suggestion to a player that there is a possibility that any reach effect or a certain reach effect may be executed or that the degree of expectation of jackpot is high may be collectively referred to as a notice effect. In addition to the slide effect and the pseudo-continuous effect, the notice effect may use a variable display operation different from the slide effect and the pseudo-continuous effect. For example, a background image display or a message window display There may be those that use an effect operation different from the variable display effect, such as hold display, audio output, and light emission (lighting, blinking, extinguishing).

  Note that a variable display effect (variable display operation) different from the slip effect and the pseudo-continuous effect may be executed as the notice effect. For example, change start timing (for example, when the left symbol, middle symbol, and right symbol start changing at the same time, start timing at the same time, or when the left symbol, middle symbol, and right symbol do not start changing at the same time. For the first time the symbol that starts to change is the timing at which the change starts, etc.) and the effect that makes the change start order of the left symbol, middle symbol, and right symbol different from the normal time May be executed as In addition, a display operation other than the variable display operation may be executed as a notice effect. For example, an effect that makes the background image different from the normal time or an effect that makes the hold display different from the normal time may be executed as the notice effect. The notice effect may be due to an operation other than the display operation. For example, the notice effect may be a sound output from the speaker 8, light emission from the lamp 9, or the like.

  The notice effect may be executed (started) before the player can determine (actually confirm) whether the notice effect or the content suggested by the notice effect is realized. For example, a notice effect that notifies or suggests to a player that the variable display state of a decorative pattern due to winning of a certain game ball may become a reach state has at least a variable display state of the decorative pattern due to winning of the game ball. What is necessary is just to be executed (started) before entering the reach state (or the non-reach state). In addition, the notice effect that notifies or suggests to the player that the variable display result due to winning of a certain game ball may be a “hit” is because at least the confirmed decorative pattern due to winning of the game ball is stopped and displayed May be executed (started) before.

  It is sufficient for the notice effect to include a pre-read notice effect (also referred to as “pre-judgment notice effect”). The pre-reading notice effect determines whether or not the variable display results in a “big hit” based on the hold information of the special-purpose game before starting the variable display subject to the notice. (Prefetching) is a notice effect to be executed based on the determination result. In the following description, the hold information that is the target of the pre-reading notice effect is referred to as target hold information, and the first hold display corresponding to the target hold information is referred to as the target first hold display and corresponds to the target hold information. The second hold display to be performed is referred to as a target second hold display, and the variable display corresponding to the target hold information is also referred to as a target variable display. In addition, the pre-reading notice effect is executed during the digestion of the target hold information (when the target hold information including the variable display of the target is being digested) and before the target hold information. There are a case where it is executed during digestion of the hold information and a case where it is executed during digestion of the hold information of the target and during the digestion of the hold information before the target hold information.

  The stage action that becomes a pre-reading notice effect by winning a certain game ball is that the player determines whether or not the content of the pre-reading notice effect is realized after winning the game ball (after the start condition is established). It may be executed (started) before it can be determined. For example, a stage action that is a pre-reading advance notice for informing (indicating) to a player that there is a possibility of reaching a reach state due to a winning of a certain game ball is at least a decorative pattern by winning of the game ball. Any variable display state may be executed (started) before the reach state (or non-reach state) is reached. In addition, at least a play operation of a pre-reading notice effect for informing (suggesting) a player that a variable display result may be a “hit” by winning a game ball What is necessary is just to be executed (started) before the winning decorative symbol by winning is stopped and displayed.

  In addition, as the pre-reading notice effect (pre-determined notice effect), a hold effect according to the display mode of the first hold display in the first hold display area 5H1 or the second hold display in the second hold display area 5H2 may be prepared. . In the hold effect, a first hold display that is added to the first hold display area 5H1 when the first start prize is generated and a second hold display that is added to the second hold display area 5H2 when the second start prize is generated are displayed in a notice mode. An effect to be displayed (holding effect at the time of addition) and the already displayed first hold display and second hold display change to the notice mode (including a change from one notice mode to another notice mode. The same applies hereinafter). An effect (hold change effect) or an effect that is executed when the first hold display or the second hold display changes to the notice mode, and the character or the like is directly or indirectly displayed on the display area of the main screen 5. Is an effect that is executed when the first hold display or the second hold display does not change to the notice mode, and the character or the like is directly displayed in the display area of the main screen 5. Manner or indirectly effect the action (pending action Gase effect) may be included, such as. When the hold action effect is executed, the display mode of the first hold display (or second hold display) that is the target of action changes, but when the hold action effect effect is executed, the first hold display (or The display mode of (second hold display) does not change.

  Moreover, the active display effect by the display mode of the active display in the active display area AHA may be prepared as the notice effect. In the active display effect, an active display to be added to the active display area AHA is displayed in a notice mode (active display effect at the time of addition), or an already displayed active display is changed to a notice mode (from a certain notice mode to another This includes an effect to change to the notice mode (the same applies hereinafter) (active display change effect) and an effect to be executed when the active display changes to the notice mode. Directly or indirectly acting (active display effect), or an effect executed when the active display does not change to the notice mode, and the character or the like in the display area of the main screen 5 is directly displayed on the active display. Includes direct or indirect effects (active display effect) It may be. The active display change effect is an effect that changes the special image to the notice mode. In other words, the active display, the active display frame surrounding the active display, and information corresponding to the active display (for example, characters or images displayed around the active display or the active display frame) It is a production that changes. Note that there may be a case where an active display change gaze effect that is an effect mode that is at least partially in common with the active display change effect is executed. Note that an active display change effect or an active display change effect may be executed as a main notice effect such as a step-up notice effect. When the active display action effect is executed, the display mode of the active display that is the target of action changes. However, when the active display action effect is executed, the display mode of the active display does not change.

  The display mode of the active display in the active display effect may be determined before the change (for example, at the time of starting winning) or may be determined at the time of the change. Further, the hold effect and the active display effect may be collectively referred to as a hold effect.

  When a special symbol that becomes a lost symbol is stopped (derived) as a confirmed special symbol in the special symbol game, the variable symbol display state is not changed to the reach state after the variable symbol variable display is started. In addition, a fixed decorative pattern that is a predetermined non-reach combination may be stopped and displayed. Such a decorative display variable display mode is referred to as a “non-reach” (also referred to as “normal loss”) variable display mode when the variable display result is “losing”.

  When a special symbol that becomes a lost symbol is stopped (derived) as a confirmed special symbol in the special symbol game, the variable symbol display state is reached after the variable symbol variable display starts. Correspondingly, after the reach effect is executed, a fixed decorative pattern that is a predetermined reach-losing combination may be stopped and displayed. Such a variable display result of the decorative design is referred to as a variable display mode of “reach” (also referred to as “reach lose”) when the variable display result is “losing”.

  In the present embodiment, a special symbol indicating the number “3” among the special symbols (special symbols indicating the numbers “3”, “5”, and “7”) as the big hit symbol as the confirmed special symbols in the special symbol game. When the symbol or the special symbol indicating the number “5” is stopped and displayed, “8R probability variation big hit”, which is one mode of “big hit”, is set. Further, when the special symbol indicating the number “7” is stopped and displayed, “16R probability variable big hit” which is one mode of “big hit” is obtained. The round that is controlled when the 8R probability variable big hit is a normally open round. That is, in the present embodiment, the special symbol indicating the numbers “3” and “5” is a normal open round jackpot symbol. The round controlled when the 16R probability variation big hit is a normally open round. That is, in this embodiment, the special symbol indicating the number “7” is a normal open round jackpot symbol.

  In the present embodiment, as described above, when the special symbol indicating the number “5” is stopped and displayed, it is 8R probability variation big hit, but when the special symbol indicating the number “5” is stopped and displayed. It may be set to “2R probability variation big hit (also referred to as“ surprise accuracy ”)” in which a short-term opening round is executed. In this case, the special symbol indicating the number “5” is a short-term open round jackpot symbol. In the “big hit”, “8R probability variation big hit”, “16R probability variation big hit”, and “2R probability variation big hit” are called “big hit types”.

  In the case of 16R probable big hit, specifically, when the special symbol indicating the number “7” is stopped and displayed, the variable display of the decorative symbol is started, the reach state is reached, and a predetermined reach effect is achieved. After being executed, the definite decorative symbol that is a big hit combination corresponding to the 16R probability variation big hit is stopped and displayed. An example of the jackpot combination corresponding to the 16R probability variation jackpot is the same decorative pattern having an odd number of symbols on a predetermined effective line (for example, a straight line on the side) formed by the decorative symbol display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R. Are arranged in three (ie, “1”, “1”, “1”, “3”, “3”, “3”, “5”, “5”, “ 5 ”,“ 7 ”,“ 7 ”,“ 7 ”).

  In the case of 8R probability variation big hit, specifically, when the special symbol indicating the number “3” or the special symbol indicating the number “5” is stopped and displayed, the variable display of the decorative symbol is started. After reaching the reach state and executing a predetermined reach effect, the definite decorative symbol that is a jackpot combination corresponding to the 8R probability variation jackpot is stopped and displayed. An example of the jackpot combination corresponding to the 8R probability variation jackpot is a pattern in which three identical decorative symbols are arranged on a predetermined effective line formed by the decorative symbol display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R. In other words, “2”, “2”, “2”, “4”, “4”, “4”, “6”, “6”, “6”, “8”, “8”, and “8”).

  In this embodiment, the 2R probability variation big hit is not provided. However, when the 2R probability variation big hit is provided, if the 2R probability variation big hit is achieved, the decorative symbol variable display is started and the reach state is reached and a predetermined reach effect is achieved. After being executed, or without being in a reach state, it is only necessary to stop and display the confirmed decorative symbol that is a big hit combination corresponding to the 2R probability variable big hit. An example of a jackpot combination corresponding to a 2R probability variable jackpot is a different decorative symbol (one of at least three symbols) on a predetermined effective line formed by the decorative symbol display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R. 3 decorative patterns (for example, “1”, “3”, “5”, “3”, “5”, “7”, “5”, “5”, “7”) ”) Or a combination of decorative symbols including a chance symbol or the like (for example, a combination of“ 1 ”,“ accuracy ”,“ 2 ”, where“ accuracy ”is an example of a chance symbol).

  In the special figure game, when the special symbol indicating the number “7” is stopped and displayed, the fixed decorative symbol corresponding to the big hit combination corresponding to the 16R probability changing big hit is stopped and the 8R probability changing on the surface. There may be a case where a fixed decorative symbol that is a jackpot combination corresponding to the jackpot is stopped and displayed.

  Based on the fact that the 16R probability variable big hit is reached, the normal open round is controlled to the normal open big hit state in which 16 rounds are executed, and after that, the time-varying control (time reduction control) and the probability variable control (probability fluctuation control) are performed. ) Is performed. Further, based on the fact that the 8R probability variable big hit has been reached, the normal open round is controlled to a normal open big hit state in which the normal open round is executed eight times (rounds), and after that, the probability change control is performed together with the time reduction control.

  By performing the probability variation control, the probability that the variable display result is “big hit” in each special figure game is improved to be higher than that in the normal state. The probability variation control is performed when a special game with a predetermined number of STs (also referred to as the probability variation number) is executed after the end of the big hit gaming state, or when the variable display result is “big hit”. End when is established first. Therefore, even if the variable display result does not become “big hit” when the probability variation control is being performed, the probability variation control is not performed if the special game of the predetermined number of ST times (number of probability variation) is digested. finish. The predetermined number of STs is, for example, 70 times. The normal state is a normal game state different from a specific game state such as a big hit game state. The same control as the initial setting state of the pachinko gaming machine 1 (for example, the state in which the initialization process is executed after power-on as in the case where the system reset is performed) is performed.

  In addition, by performing the time-saving control, the special symbol variable display time (special symbol variation time) in the special symbol game is shortened compared to the normal state. Time-shortening control is performed when either of a predetermined time-saving special-purpose game is executed after the end of the big hit gaming state and the variable display result is “big hit” is satisfied first. To finish. Therefore, even if the variable display result does not become “big hit” when the time-shortening control is being performed, the time-shortening control is ended when the predetermined time-saving special game is consumed. Note that the predetermined number of time reductions is, for example, 70 times.

  As described above, in the present embodiment, the control is made to the normally open big hit state based on the fact that the 8R probability variation big hit or the 16R probability variation big hit has been reached, and the probability variation control for a predetermined number of STs (for example, 70 times) is completed after the end. Is performed, and time reduction control is performed a predetermined number of times (for example, 70 times).

  In this embodiment, the number of time reductions after the big hit (8R probability variation big hit, 16R probability variation big hit) and the ST number (number of probability variation) are the same (both 70 times), but the big hit (8R probability variation big hit, 16R). The number of time reductions after the probability variation big hit) may be different from the ST number (the number of probability variation). In this embodiment, the number of STs after the 8R probability variation big hit (the number of probability variation) and the number of STs after the 16R probability variation big hit (the number of probability variation) are the same (both 70 times). The number of STs after the big hit (the number of probability variation) may be different from the number of STs after the 16R probability variation big hit (the number of probability variation). Further, in this embodiment, the number of time reductions after the 8R probability variation big hit is the same (both 70 times) after the 16R probability variation big hit, but the number of time reductions after the 8R probability variation big hit. And the short time after the 16R probability variation big hit may be different. In the following description, a big hit gaming state, a state where probability variation control is performed, a state where time reduction control is performed, and the like may be referred to as advantageous states.

  In this embodiment, the 2R probability variable big hit is not provided. However, when the 2R probability variable big hit is provided, the short-term open big hit is executed based on the fact that the 2R probability variable big hit is performed. After the completion of the control, the probability variation control may be performed together with the time-shortening control as in the case of 16R probability variation big hit or 8R probability variation big hit.

  In the present embodiment, even when the variable display result does not become “big hit” when probability variation control is being performed, when a special game with a predetermined number of STs (probability variation number) is consumed. Although the probability variation control ends, the probability variation control may not be terminated until the variable display result becomes “big hit” without providing the ST count (number of probability variation). In such a mode, as a mode of “big hit”, it is good to provide a normal big hit that is not subjected to probability variation control after the end. For example, when an 8R normal big hit is provided, based on the fact that the 8R normal big hit is achieved, the normal open round is controlled to a normal open big hit state in which eight rounds are executed. (Time reduction control may or may not be performed).

  In addition, even if the probability variation control is ended when the probability variation control is ended by the probability variation control lottery executed every time the special game is started after the big hit gaming state is ended, the probability variation control is terminated. Good. In such an embodiment, after the special game with the predetermined number of STs (the probability of change) is not digested until the special game with the predetermined number of STs (the number of changes with certainty) is exhausted, A probabilistic falling lottery may be performed in each game. The same applies to the time reduction control.

  When the time reduction control is performed, the normal symbol display unit 20 uses the normal symbol display unit 20 to make the normal symbol change time (normal symbol change time) shorter than that in the normal state, or to change the normal symbol in each time the normal symbol game. Control for improving the probability that the display result is “per normal figure” than in the normal state, and tilt control of the movable blade piece in the normal variable winning ball apparatus 6B based on the fact that the variable display result is “per normal figure”. The game ball can easily pass (enter) the second start winning opening, such as a control to make the tilt control time for performing longer than that in the normal state, and a control to increase the number of tilts than in the normal state. Control that is advantageous to the player is performed by increasing the possibility that the start condition is satisfied. In this way, the control that facilitates the entry of the game ball into the second start winning opening in accordance with the time-shortening control and is advantageous to the player is also referred to as high opening control. As the high opening control, any one of these controls may be performed, or a plurality of controls may be combined.

  By performing the high opening control, the frequency at which the second start winning opening becomes the expanded opening state is higher than when the high opening control is not performed. Therefore, the second start condition for executing the second special figure game by the second special symbol display device 4B is easily established, and the second special figure game can be executed frequently, so that the variable display result Is reduced to become a “big hit”. The period during which the high opening control can be performed is also referred to as a high opening control period, and this period may be the same as the period during which the time reduction control is performed.

  A gaming state in which both the short time control and the high opening control are performed is also referred to as a short time state or a high base state. The gaming state in which the probability variation control is performed is also referred to as a probability variation state or a high probability state. A gaming state in which the time-shortening control or the high opening control is performed together with the probability variation control is also referred to as a high probability high base state. The probability variation state in which only the probability variation control is performed and the short time control or the high opening control is not performed is also referred to as a high probability low base state. It should be noted that only the gaming state in which the time-shortening control or the high opening control is performed together with the probability variation control is sometimes referred to as a “probability variation state”, and may be referred to as a time variation probability variation state in order to be distinguished from the high probability low base state. On the other hand, a probability variation state (high probability low base state) in which only time variation control is performed and time reduction control or high opening control is not performed is sometimes referred to as a time variation probability variation state in order to be distinguished from a high accuracy high base state. The short time state in which the short time control or the high opening control is performed without performing the probability variation control is also referred to as a low probability high base state. The normal state in which neither the probability variation control, the time reduction control, nor the high opening control is performed is also referred to as a low probability low base state. When at least one of the time reduction control and the probability change control is performed in a game state other than the normal state, the special game (second special game) can be frequently executed, and each special game (first special game) The probability that the variable display result in the figure game or the second special figure game will be a “big hit” is increased, which is advantageous to the player. A gaming state advantageous to a player different from the big hit gaming state is also referred to as a special gaming state.

  A re-lottery effect may be executed for a decorative pattern. For example, as a re-lottery effect, in the decorative symbol display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R, after temporarily displaying a decorative symbol that is a big hit combination corresponding to the 8R probability variation big hit, the variation is changed again with the same decorative symbols aligned. , Any one of the decorative symbols corresponding to the big hit combination corresponding to the 16R probability variation big hit and the decorative symbols corresponding to the big hit combination corresponding to the 8R probability variable big hit may be finally stopped and displayed as the confirmed decorative symbols.

  In addition, after the definite decorative symbol corresponding to the big hit combination corresponding to the 8R probability variable big win is derived and displayed, the period until the end of the eighth round (or after the end of the eighth round, the next variable display game is executed). In the period until it is started, a round-number promotion effect for notifying that the jackpot is a 16R probability variable jackpot may be executed. In this embodiment, the 2R probability variation big hit is not provided. However, when the 2R probability variation big hit is provided, the same applies to the case where a definite decorative symbol corresponding to the big hit combination corresponding to the 2R probability variation big hit is derived and displayed.

  Further, in the present embodiment, the normal big hit is not provided, but after the fixed decorative symbol that is the big hit combination corresponding to the normal big win is derived and displayed when the normal big hit is provided, the period until the final round ends ( Or, after the end of the final round, during the period until the next variable display game is started), a probability variation promotion effect that informs that the jackpot is a probability variation jackpot may be executed.

  In addition, the promotion effect (round number promotion effect, probability change promotion effect) executed during the round is referred to as jackpot medium promotion effect (bonus medium number of rounds promotion effect, jackpot medium chance change promotion effect), and after the final round ends The promotion effect (round number promotion effect, probability change promotion effect) to be executed may be referred to as an ending promotion effect (ending round number promotion effect, ending probability change promotion effect).

  Further, the control signal transmitted from the main board 11 to the effect control board 12 shown in FIG. The control command transmitted from the main board 11 to the effect control board 12 via the relay board 15 is, for example, an effect control command transmitted and received as an electric signal.

  FIG. 19A is an explanatory diagram showing an example of the contents of the effect control command used in the present embodiment. The effect control command has, for example, a 2-byte structure, and the first byte indicates MODE (command classification), and the second byte indicates EXT (command type). The first bit (bit 7) of the MODE data is always “1”, and the first bit of the EXT data is “0”. Note that the command form shown in FIG. 19A is an example, and other command forms may be used. In this example, the control command is composed of two control signals. However, the number of control signals constituting the control command may be one or a plurality of three or more.

  In the example shown in FIG. 19A, the command 8001H is a first change start command for designating the start of change in the first special figure game by the first special symbol display device 4A. The command 8002H is a second change start command that specifies the start of change in the second special figure game by the second special symbol display device 4B. The command 81XXH is a variation pattern designation command for designating a variation pattern such as a decorative symbol variably displayed in each of the decorative symbol display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R corresponding to the variable display of the special symbol in the special symbol game. Here, XXH indicates an unspecified hexadecimal number, and may be a value arbitrarily set according to the instruction content by the effect control command. In the variation pattern designation command, different EXT data is set according to the variation pattern to be designated.

  Command 8CXXH is a variable display result notification command for designating a variable display result such as a special symbol or a decorative symbol. In the variable display result notification command, for example, as shown in FIG. 19B, the determination result or jackpot type whether the variable display result is “lost”, “16R probability variation big hit” or “8R probability variation big hit” Different EXT data is set according to the determination result.

  The command 8F00H is a symbol confirmation command for designating a confirmed ornament symbol (final stop symbol) in each ornament symbol display area 5L, 5C, 5R. The command 95XXH is a gaming state designation command for designating the current gaming state in the pachinko gaming machine 1. In the gaming state designation command, for example, different EXT data is set according to the current gaming state in the pachinko gaming machine 1. Command 9F00 (H) is an effect control command (customer waiting demonstration designation command) for designating a customer waiting demonstration.

  The command 9200H is a power failure recovery designation command that designates execution of a power failure recovery process. The power failure recovery designation command is a command for causing the gaming machine 1 to execute a power failure recovery process after power supply is resumed from the power failure state. Receiving the power failure recovery designation command, the effect control CPU 120 executes power failure recovery processing. The effect control CPU 120 performs, for example, an initial operation of the effect device as the power failure recovery process. As an initial operation of the effect device, for example, a power failure recovery screen may be displayed on the main screen 5 informing the player that the power has recovered from the power failure. Further, an initial operation for operating the special screen device 205 may be performed as an initial operation of the rendering device. The initial operation is executed when the power is turned on, when the power is restored from a power failure, or when a predetermined time elapses after the variable display ends. The initial operation includes a long initial operation and a short initial operation. The initial operation will be further described later. Moreover, you may make it perform the test lighting of the lamp | ramp 9, the output of the monitor sound from the speaker 8, etc. as an initial operation of a production | presentation apparatus.

  The command A0XXH is a hit start designation command (also referred to as “fanfare command”) for designating display of an effect image indicating the start of the big hit gaming state. The command A1XXH is a large winning opening opening notification command for notifying that the big winning opening is in the open state in the big hit gaming state. The command A2XXH is a notification command after the big winning opening is opened to notify that the big winning opening is changed from the open state to the closed state in the big hit gaming state. Command A3XXH is a hit end designation command for designating display of an effect image at the end of the big hit gaming state.

  In the hit start designation command and the hit end designation command, for example, EXT data similar to that of the variable display result notification command is set, so that different EXT data may be set according to the predetermined determination result or the big hit type determination result. . Alternatively, in the hit start designation command and the hit end designation command, the correspondence relationship between the pre-determined result and the big hit type determination result and the set EXT data may be different from the correspondence relationship in the variable display result notification command. . In the notification command during the opening of the big winning opening and the notification command after the opening of the big winning opening, for example, different EXT data corresponding to the number of round executions (for example, “1” to “16”) in the normal opening big hit state or the short-term opening big hit state Is set.

  The command B100H is based on the fact that the first start prize is generated when the game ball that has passed (entered) the first start prize port formed by the normal prize ball device 6A is detected by the first start port switch 22A. This is a first start opening prize designation command for notifying that the first start condition for executing the first special figure game by the symbol display device 4A is satisfied.

  The command B200H is based on the fact that the game ball that has passed (entered) the second start winning opening formed by the normally variable winning ball apparatus 6B is detected by the second start opening switch 22B and the second start winning is generated. This is a second start opening prize designation command for notifying that the second start condition for executing the second special figure game by the special symbol display device 4B is satisfied.

  The command C1XXH is a first reserved memory number notification command for notifying the first special figure reserved memory number so that the first special figure reserved memory number can be specified in the first reserved display area 5H1 or the like. The command C2XXH is a second reserved memory number notification command for notifying the second special figure reserved memory number so that the special figure reserved memory number can be specified in the second reserved display area 5H2.

  For example, the command transmitted as the on-hold storage information may be a first start opening prize specifying command or a second starting opening prize specifying that specifies whether a start winning is made at the first starting winning opening or a starting winning is made at the second starting winning opening. A command is transmitted, and a first reserved memory number notification command and a second reserved memory number notification command for specifying the first special figure reserved memory number and the second special figure reserved memory number are transmitted. It should be noted that when the number of reserved memories increases, a reserved memory number addition designation command (a first reserved memory number addition designation command or a second one) indicating that the first special figure reserved memory number or the second special figure reserved memory number has increased. When the reserved memory count decreases, the reserved memory count addition designation command (the second reserved figure count designation command) indicates that the first special figure reserved memory count or the second special figure reserved memory count has decreased. 1 reserved memory number subtraction designation command or second reserved memory number subtraction designation command) may be transmitted.

  Instead of the first pending storage number notification command and the second pending storage number notification command, a total pending storage number notification command for notifying the total pending storage number may be transmitted. Further, a total pending storage number addition designation command (total pending storage number subtraction designation command) for notifying an increase (or decrease) in the total pending storage number may be transmitted.

  The command C4XXH and the command C6XXH are effect control commands (winning determination result designation command) indicating the contents of the determination result at the time of winning. Of these, the command C4XXH is a symbol designating command indicating a determination result as to whether or not the variable display result is “big hit” and a determination result of the big hit type as the winning determination result. The command C6XXH is a variation category command that indicates a determination result of a variation category (also referred to as “variation pattern type”) as a winning determination result. The variation category is a name when the variation patterns of decorative symbols are classified (aggregated) by type. In other words, the variation category is a group name of each group including a variation pattern of one or more decorative symbols categorized into a common group.

  The command E0XXH is an initialization designation command that designates initialization. Receiving the initialization designation command, the effect control CPU 120 executes an initialization process according to the EXT data XX (hexadecimal number) of the initialization designation command. For example, in the EXT data, the initial operation of the effect device such as the main screen 5 or the special screen device 205 can be designated. In this embodiment, the initialization designation command is transmitted to the sub-board in the initialization process of step S71 executed once when the power is turned on in the main process of the CPU 103 described later with reference to FIG. However, the initialization designation command may be transmitted at another timing.

  In the present embodiment, in the winning random number determination process (FIG. 32A), the variable display result is determined as “big hit” based on the random value MR1 for determining the special figure display result when the start winning is generated. If it is determined as “big hit”, the type of jackpot is determined based on the random value MR2 for determining the big hit type, and the variation category (based on the random value MR3 for determining the variation category) is determined. Fluctuation pattern type) is determined. Then, a value corresponding to the determination result is set in the EXT data of the symbol designating command and the variation category command, and control to transmit to the effect control board 12 is performed. The effect control CPU 120 mounted on the effect control board 12 can recognize whether or not the variable display result is determined to be “big hit” based on the value set in the symbol designation command and the big hit type, The variable category can be recognized based on the value set in the category command.

  For effect control commands such as a change pattern designation command and a variable display result notification command, the effect control CPU 120 controls one or more effect devices (main screen 5, speaker 8, lamp 9, special screen device 205, etc.). Used when. Hereinafter, the effect control command used for controlling the image display operation on the main screen 5 is a display control command, the effect control command used for controlling the audio output from the speaker 8 is an audio control command, and the light emission operation (lighting) of the lamp 9 The effect control command used for controlling the operation, blinking operation, and extinguishing operation is also referred to as a lamp control command. Note that, among the effect control commands, there may be a display control command, a voice control command, and a lamp control command.

  The game control microcomputer 100 mounted on the main board 11 is, for example, a one-chip microcomputer, and includes a ROM (Read Only Memory) 101 for storing a game control program, fixed data, and the like, and a game control work. A RAM (Random Access Memory) 102 that provides an area, a CPU (Central Processing Unit) 103 that executes a control program by executing a game control program, and updates numerical data indicating random values independently of the CPU 103 A random number circuit 104 for performing the processing and an I / O (Input / Output port) 105 are provided.

  As an example, in the game control microcomputer 100, a process for controlling the progress of the game in the pachinko gaming machine 1 is executed by the CPU 103 executing a program read from the ROM 101. At this time, the CPU 103 reads fixed data from the ROM 101, the CPU 103 writes various fluctuation data to the RAM 102 and temporarily stores the fluctuation data, and the CPU 103 temporarily stores the various fluctuation data. The CPU 103 receives the input of various signals from outside the game control microcomputer 100 via the I / O 105, and the CPU 103 goes outside the game control microcomputer 100 via the I / O 105. A transmission operation for outputting various signals is also performed.

  FIG. 20 is an explanatory diagram illustrating a random number value counted on the main board 11 side. As shown in FIG. 20, in this embodiment, on the side of the main board 11, a random value MR1 for determining a special figure display result, a random value MR2 for determining a jackpot type, a random value MR3 for determining a variation category, Numeric data indicating the random number value MR4 for determining the display result and the random value MR5 for determining the variation pattern are controlled to be countable. In addition, in order to improve a game effect, random numbers other than these may be used. Such random numbers used to control the progress of the game are also referred to as game random numbers.

  The random number circuit 104 only needs to count numerical data indicating some or all of these random number values MR1 to MR5. For example, the CPU 103 uses a random counter different from the random number circuit 104 such as a random counter provided in the game control counter setting unit 154 shown in FIG. Numerical data indicating a part of MR5 may be counted.

  Next, the decorative pattern variation pattern will be described. Hereinafter, the variation pattern corresponding to the case where the variable display result is “losing” is referred to as “losing variation pattern”. The loss variation pattern includes a “non-reach variation pattern” (“non-reach loss variation pattern”, “non-reach” corresponding to the case where the variable display mode of the decorative pattern is “non-reach” among the cases where the variable display result is “loss” (Also referred to as “(loss) variation pattern”) ”or“ reach variation pattern ”(“ reach loss variation pattern ”) corresponding to the case where the variable display mode of the decorative symbol is“ reach ”among the cases where the variable display result is“ losing ”. Also referred to as).

  A variation pattern corresponding to a case where the variable display result is “big hit” is referred to as a “hit variation pattern”. The hit fluctuation pattern includes a “big hit fluctuation pattern” corresponding to the case where the variable display result is “big hit” and a “small hit fluctuation pattern” corresponding to the case where the variable display result is “small hit”. Also good. As the big hit variation pattern, a plurality of fluctuation patterns corresponding to each of the big hit types may be prepared.

  Non-reach variation patterns are prepared for multiple variation patterns with different variation times, corresponding to time-short control executed when the total number of reserved memories is large, or when the gaming state is in the probabilistic state or the short-time state. Good. As a result, by selecting one of the variation patterns according to the total number of reserved memories and the gaming state, it is possible to control to shorten the variation time according to the total number of reserved memories and the gaming state.

  For variation patterns including a reach effect such as a big hit variation pattern and a reach variation pattern, a variation pattern corresponding to the reach mode of each reach effect is prepared. Note that the fluctuation pattern in which the reach effect of normal reach is executed is referred to as “normal reach fluctuation pattern”, and the fluctuation pattern in which the reach effect of super reach is executed is referred to as “super reach fluctuation pattern”.

  FIG. 21 shows a specific example of the variation category and the variation pattern in the present embodiment. In FIG. 21, the variation category “PA1” is a shortened / non-reach (lost) variation category. The variation pattern “PA1-1” belongs to the variation category “PA1”. The fluctuation category “PA2” is a non-reach (losing) fluctuation category. Variation patterns “PA2-1” to “PA2-3” belong to the variation category “PA2”. The fluctuation category “PA3” is a normal reach (losing) fluctuation category. The variation categories “PA3-1” and “PA3-2” belong to the variation category “PA3”. The fluctuation category “PA4” is a super reach α (losing) fluctuation category. Variation patterns “PA4-1” to “PA4-4” belong to the variation category “PA4”. The fluctuation category “PA5” is a super reach β (losing) fluctuation category. The variation patterns “PA5-1” to “PA5-4” belong to the variation category “PA5”. The fluctuation category “PB3” is a normal reach (big hit) fluctuation category. The variation patterns “PB3-1” and “PB3-2” belong to the variation category “PB3”. The fluctuation category “PB4” is a super reach α (big hit) fluctuation category. Variation patterns “PB4-1” to “PB4-4” belong to the variation category “PB4”. The fluctuation category “PB5” is a super reach β (big hit) fluctuation category. The variation patterns “PB5-1” to “PB5-4” belong to the variation category “PB5”.

  The variation pattern “PA2-1” belonging to the variation category “PA2” is a non-reach variation pattern in which the special figure variation time is a normal length. The variation pattern “PA2-2” is a non-reach variation pattern in which a slip effect is executed. Note that the special figure fluctuation time of the fluctuation pattern “PA2-2” is longer than the special figure fluctuation time of the fluctuation pattern “PA2-1” because the slip effect is executed. The same applies to other fluctuation patterns in which a slip effect is executed. Further, the fluctuation pattern “PA2-3” is a non-reach (losing) fluctuation pattern in which pseudo continuous fluctuation (effect) is executed once. Note that the special figure fluctuation time of the fluctuation pattern “PA2-3” is longer than the special figure fluctuation time of the fluctuation pattern “PA2-1” because the pseudo continuous fluctuation (effect) is executed. The same applies to other variation patterns in which pseudo continuous variation (effect) is executed. The variation pattern “PA1-1” belonging to the variation category “PA1” is a non-reach variation pattern in which the special figure variation time is shorter than the variation pattern “PA2-1”.

  The variation pattern “PA3-1” belonging to the variation category “PA3” is a normal reach variation pattern in which the special figure variation time is a normal length. Further, the fluctuation pattern “PA3-2” is a normal reach (lost) fluctuation pattern in which pseudo continuous fluctuation (effect) is executed once. The variation pattern “PA4-1” belonging to the variation category “PA4” is a super reach α (lost) variation pattern in which the special figure variation time is a normal length. The fluctuation pattern “PA4-2” is a super reach α (lost) fluctuation pattern in which pseudo-continuous fluctuation (effect) is executed as a gas. Note that the special figure fluctuation time of the fluctuation pattern “PA4-2” is longer than the special figure fluctuation time of the fluctuation pattern “PA4-1” because the pseudo continuous fluctuation (effect) is executed as a gas. The same applies to other variation patterns in which pseudo-continuous variation (effect) is executed as a gas. The fluctuation pattern “PA4-3” is a super reach α (losing) fluctuation pattern in which pseudo continuous fluctuation (production) is executed once. The fluctuation pattern “PA4-4” is a super reach α (lost) fluctuation pattern in which pseudo-continuous fluctuation (effect) is executed twice.

  The variation pattern “PA5-1” belonging to the variation category “PA5” is a super reach β (loss) variation pattern in which the special figure variation time is a normal length. The fluctuation pattern “PA5-2” is a super reach β (losing) fluctuation pattern in which pseudo-continuous fluctuation (effect) is executed as a gas. The fluctuation pattern “PA5-3” is a super reach β (losing) fluctuation pattern in which pseudo continuous fluctuation (effect) is executed once. The fluctuation pattern “PA5-4” is a super reach β (loss) fluctuation pattern in which pseudo-continuous fluctuation (effect) is executed twice.

  The fluctuation pattern “PB3-1” belonging to the fluctuation category “PB3” is a normal reach fluctuation pattern in which the special figure fluctuation time is a normal length. Further, the fluctuation pattern “PB3-2” is a normal reach (big hit) fluctuation pattern in which pseudo continuous fluctuation (effect) is executed once. The fluctuation pattern “PB4-1” belonging to the fluctuation category “PB4” is a super reach α (big hit) fluctuation pattern in which the special figure fluctuation time is a normal length. The fluctuation pattern “PB4-2” is a super reach α (big hit) fluctuation pattern in which pseudo-continuous fluctuation (effect) is executed as a gas. The fluctuation pattern “PB4-3” is a super reach α (big hit) fluctuation pattern in which pseudo continuous fluctuation (effect) is executed once. The fluctuation pattern “PB4-4” is a super reach α (big hit) fluctuation pattern in which pseudo-continuous fluctuation (effect) is executed twice.

  The fluctuation pattern “PB5-1” belonging to the fluctuation category “PB5” is a super reach β (big hit) fluctuation pattern in which the special figure fluctuation time is a normal length. The fluctuation pattern “PB5-2” is a super reach β (big hit) fluctuation pattern in which pseudo-continuous fluctuation (effect) is executed as a gas. The fluctuation pattern “PB5-3” is a super reach β (big hit) fluctuation pattern in which pseudo continuous fluctuation (effect) is executed once. Further, the fluctuation pattern “PB5-4” is a super reach β (big hit) fluctuation pattern in which pseudo continuous fluctuation (effect) is executed twice.

  Among these fluctuation patterns, the super reach β fluctuation pattern (super reach β (big hit) fluctuation pattern or super reach β (loss) after the quasi-continuous fluctuation executed in the fluctuation patterns “PA5-4” and “PB5-4”. ) In the variation pattern), a special screen appearance effect is executed. In the special screen appearance effect, an effect that appears in front of the main screen 5 is executed. The special screen appearance effect will be further described later. In addition, the super reach β after the quasi-continuous change twice is also referred to as a specific super reach β.

  In this embodiment, the 2R probability variation big hit (rush accuracy) is not provided, but when the 2R probability variation big hit (rush accuracy) is provided, the variation categories “PC1”, “PC2”, “PC3” for the 2R probability variation big hit (rush accuracy) are provided. May be provided. Variation patterns “PC1-1” to “PC1-3” belong to the variation category “PC1”. The fluctuation pattern “PC1-1” is a non-reach (surprising) fluctuation pattern in which the special figure fluctuation time is a normal length. The fluctuation pattern “PC1-2” is a non-reach (accuracy) fluctuation pattern in which a slip effect is executed. The variation pattern “PC1-3” is a non-reach (probability) variation pattern in which pseudo continuous variation (effect) is executed once.

  The variation patterns “PC2-1” to “PC2-4” belong to the variation category “PC2”. The fluctuation pattern “PC2-1” is a super reach α (surprise) fluctuation pattern in which the special figure fluctuation time is a normal length. The fluctuation pattern “PC2-2” is a super reach α (surprise) fluctuation pattern in which pseudo-continuous fluctuation (effect) is executed as a gas. The variation pattern “PC2-3” is a super reach α (surprise) variation pattern in which pseudo continuous variation (effect) is executed once. The variation pattern “PC2-4” is a super reach α (surprise) variation pattern in which pseudo continuous variation (production) is executed twice.

  Variation patterns “PC3-1” to “PC3-4” belong to the variation category “PC3”. The fluctuation pattern “PC3-1” is a super reach β (surprise) fluctuation pattern in which the special figure fluctuation time is a normal length. The fluctuation pattern “PC3-2” is a super reach β (surprise) fluctuation pattern in which pseudo-continuous fluctuation (effect) is executed as a gas. The variation pattern “PC3-3” is a super reach β (surprise) variation pattern in which pseudo continuous variation (effect) is executed once. The variation pattern “PC3-4” is a super reach β (surprise) variation pattern in which pseudo continuous variation (production) is executed twice.

  In addition to the game control program, the ROM 101 included in the game control microcomputer 100 shown in FIG. 7 stores various data used to control the progress of the game. For example, the ROM 101 stores data constituting a plurality of determination tables, determination tables, setting tables and the like prepared for the CPU 103 to perform various determinations, determinations, and settings. In addition, the ROM 101 stores data (for example, information for specifying the contents of the control command) constituting a plurality of command tables used for the CPU 103 to transmit control signals to be various control commands from the main board 11, The data constituting the table is stored.

  FIG. 22 shows a configuration example of the display result determination table stored in the ROM 101. In the display result determination table 130A shown in FIG. 22, for example, a fixed special symbol that is a variable display result in the first special symbol game (the special symbol game using the first special symbol) by the first special symbol display device 4A is derived and displayed. In order to determine whether or not to control the jackpot gaming state with the variable display result as “big hit (16R probability change big hit, 8R probability change big hit)” based on the random value MR1 for determining the special figure display result. It is a table that is referred to. Further, the display result determination table 130A is displayed before the definite special symbol that is a variable display result is derived and displayed in the second special symbol game (the special symbol game using the second special symbol) by the second special symbol display device 4B. The variable display result is referred to as “big hit (16R probability change big hit, 8R probability change big hit)” to determine whether or not to control the big hit gaming state based on the random value MR1 for determining the special figure display result. It is a table.

  In the display result determination table 130A, the numerical value (determination value) to be compared with the random value MR1 for determining the special figure display result according to the gaming state in the pachinko gaming machine 1 is “big hit (16R probability variation big hit, 8R probability variation big hit) ”And“ Lose ”are assigned to special map display results. Specifically, in the display result determination table 130A, a numerical value (determination) to be compared with the random number MR1 for determining the special figure display result depending on whether the low probability low base state or the high probability high base state is set. Value) is assigned to the special figure display result of “big hit” or “losing”.

  In the display result determination table 130A, when the gaming state is the high probability state, more determined values are assigned to the special figure display result of “big hit” than when the gaming state is the low probability state. Specifically, in the low-accuracy state, a predetermined number (specifically, 190) of determined values (a value in the range of “8000” to “8189”) are assigned to the special figure display result of “big hit”. On the other hand, in the high-accuracy state, more than the predetermined number (specifically, 819) of decision values “8000” to “8818” are assigned to the special figure display result of “big hit”. With such a setting, in the probability variation state (high probability state) in which the probability variation control is performed in the pachinko gaming machine 1, the special figure display result is “big hit” compared to the normal state or the short time state (low probability state). As a result, the probability of being determined to be controlled to the big hit gaming state becomes high.

  Note that different display result determination tables are used for the first special figure and the second special figure. In the first special figure display result determination table for the first special figure, the special figure display result of “small hit” has a predetermined range. In the second special figure display result determination table for the second special figure, a special figure display result in which the predetermined value in the predetermined range is smaller than the first special figure display result determination table is “small hit”. May be assigned. Accordingly, it is possible to avoid frequent occurrence of “small hits” in a gaming state in which a game ball is likely to enter the second start winning opening formed by the normally variable winning ball apparatus 6B.

  FIG. 23 shows a configuration example of the jackpot type determination table 131 stored in the ROM 101. The jackpot type determination table 131 determines the jackpot type as one of a plurality of types based on the random number MR2 for determining the jackpot type when it is determined that the special figure display result is “big hit” and the game state is controlled to the jackpot game state. This is a table to be referred to. In the big hit type determination table 131, the first special symbol game (special game using the first special symbol) by the first special symbol display device 4A is executed, or the second special symbol game by the second special symbol display device 4B. Depending on whether or not (special game using the second special figure) is executed, the numerical value (decision value) to be compared with the random value MR2 for determining the big hit type is the big hit type (16R probability variation big hit, 8R probability variation) Jackpot).

  In the setting example of the big hit type determination table 131, when the game is the first special figure game, that is, when the special figure to be changed (also referred to as a fluctuation special figure) is the first special figure, a predetermined number (specifically, 50) determined values (values in the range of “0” to “49”) are assigned to 16R probability variation big hits. On the other hand, in the case of the second special figure game, that is, when the variable special figure is the second special figure, the determined values (“0” to “0”) more than the predetermined number (specifically, 80). 79 ”) is assigned to the 16R probability variation jackpot. With such a setting, in the second special figure game, the 16R probability variation big hit is more likely than the first special figure, so that the game state in which the game ball can easily enter the second start winning opening formed by the normally variable winning ball apparatus 6B ( In the high-accuracy and high-base state (specifically, up to the 70th rotation after the end of the big hit), it is possible to enhance the expectation that the 16R-probable big hit will be achieved.

  In this embodiment, the 2R probability variation big hit (clash accuracy) is not provided, but when the 2R probability variation big hit (crash probability) is provided, in the case of the second special figure game, the case is the first special figure game. A small number of determined values may be assigned to the 2R probability variation big hit (surprise). With such a setting, in the second special figure game, 2R probability variation big hit (crash probability) is less likely than in the first special figure, so that the game ball can easily enter the second start winning opening formed by the normally variable winning ball apparatus 6B. In the gaming state, it is possible to avoid the occurrence of 2R probability variation big hit (crash probability), which makes it difficult to obtain a prize ball, and to prevent a decrease in gaming interest by extending the game.

  Further, the ROM 101 stores a variation category determination table that is referred to in order to determine the variation category as one of a plurality of types. Specifically, the ROM 101 stores a plurality of variation category determination tables having different types of variation categories that can be determined in the variation category determination table and different determination ratios. In the variation category determination table, a numerical value (determination value) to be compared with the random number MR3 for determining the variation category is assigned to each variation category. That is, the ROM 101 stores a plurality of variation category determination tables having different determined values (for example, the range and number of determined values) assigned to at least one variation category among a plurality of types of variation categories. Yes. Instead of a plurality of variation category determination tables, one large variation category determination table including information on all the variation category determination tables may be stored in the ROM 101.

  Further, the ROM 101 stores a variation pattern determination table that is referred to in order to determine a variation pattern as one of a plurality of types. Specifically, the ROM 101 stores a plurality of variation pattern determination tables having different types of variation patterns that can be determined in the variation pattern determination table, different determination ratios, and the like. In the variation pattern determination table, a numerical value (determination value) to be compared with the variation pattern determination random value MR5 is assigned to each variation pattern. That is, the ROM 101 stores a plurality of variation pattern determination tables having different determination values (for example, a range or number of determination values) assigned to at least one variation pattern among a plurality of types of variation patterns. Yes. Note that one large variation pattern determination table including information of each variation pattern determination table may be stored in the ROM 101 instead of the plurality of variation pattern determination tables.

  The RAM 102 included in the game control microcomputer 100 shown in FIG. 7 may be a backup RAM that is partially or entirely backed up by a backup power supply created on a predetermined power supply board. That is, even if the power supply to the pachinko gaming machine 1 is stopped, a part or all of the contents of the RAM 102 is stored for a predetermined period (until the backup power supply cannot be supplied because the capacitor as the backup power supply is discharged). The In particular, at least the data corresponding to the game state, that is, the control state of the game control means and the data indicating the number of unpaid prize balls may be stored in the backup RAM. The data corresponding to the control state of the game control means is data necessary for restoring the control state before the occurrence of a power failure or the like based on the data (for example, a special figure) Process flags). Further, data corresponding to the control state and data indicating the number of unpaid prize balls are defined as data indicating the progress state of the game.

  Such a RAM 102 is provided with a game control data holding area 150 as shown in FIG. 24, for example, as an area for holding various data used for controlling the progress of the game in the pachinko gaming machine 1. Yes. The game control data holding area 150 shown in FIG. 24 includes a first special figure hold storage unit 151A, a second special figure hold storage unit 151B, a general figure hold storage unit 151C, a game control flag setting unit 152, and a game. A control timer setting unit 153, a game control counter setting unit 154, and a game control buffer setting unit 155 are provided.

  The first special figure storage unit 151A is a special game (not yet started) even though the game ball has passed (entered) through the first starting winning opening formed by the normal winning ball apparatus 6A and the first starting winning is generated. Hold data (first special figure hold information) of the first special figure game) by the first special symbol display device 4A is stored. As an example, the first special figure reservation storage unit 151A associates a reservation number with a winning order (game ball detection order) to the first start winning opening, and a random number is generated by the CPU 103 based on the passage (entrance) of the game ball. The numerical data indicating the random number values MR1 to MR3 extracted from the circuit 104 and the like are stored as the hold data (first special figure hold information) until the storage number reaches a predetermined upper limit value (for example, “4”).

  The second special figure holding storage unit 151B is a special game that has not yet started, although the game ball has passed (entered) through the second start winning opening formed by the normal variable winning ball apparatus 6B and a second start winning has occurred. Hold data (second special figure hold information) of (second special figure game by the second special symbol display device 4B) is stored. As an example, the second special figure holding storage unit 151B associates a holding number with a winning order (game ball detection order) to the second start winning opening, and makes a random number by the CPU 103 based on the passage (entrance) of the game ball. The numerical data indicating the random number values MR1 to MR3 extracted from the circuit 104 and the like are stored as the hold data (second special figure hold information) until the stored number reaches a predetermined upper limit value (for example, “4”).

  The first special symbol game hold data (first special figure hold information based on the establishment of the first start condition) by the first special symbol display device 4A and the second special symbol game by the second special symbol display device 4B. The hold data (second special figure hold information based on the establishment of the second start winning prize) may be stored in association with the hold number in the common hold storage unit.

  The general-purpose hold storage unit 151C stores on-hold data related to a general-purpose game that has not yet been started by the normal symbol display device 20 even though the game ball that has passed through the passing gate 41 is detected by the gate switch 21. Information). For example, the universal figure storage unit 151C determines the common figure display result extracted from the random number circuit 104 or the like by the CPU 103 based on the passage of the game balls in association with the reservation numbers in the order in which the game balls have passed the passing gate 41. For example, numerical data indicating the random number MR4 is stored as hold data (ordinary hold information) until the stored number reaches a predetermined upper limit (eg, “4”).

  The game control flag setting unit 152 is provided with a plurality of types of flags that can be updated in accordance with the progress of the game in the pachinko gaming machine 1. For example, the game control flag setting unit 152 stores data indicating a flag value and data indicating an on state or an off state for each of a plurality of types of flags. As a specific example, the game control flag setting unit 152 stores data indicating a flag value, data indicating an on state or an off state, and the like for each of a probability variation flag and a time reduction flag.

  The game control timer setting unit 153 is provided with various timers used for controlling the progress of the game in the pachinko gaming machine 1. For example, the game control timer setting unit 153 stores data indicating timer values in each of a plurality of types of timers.

  The game control counter setting unit 154 is provided with a plurality of types of counters for counting the count values used for controlling the progress of the game in the pachinko gaming machine 1. For example, the game control counter setting unit 154 stores the first reserved memory number count value and the second special figure reserved memory number, which are stored values of the first reserved memory number counter for counting the first special figure reserved memory number. The second reserved memory number count value that is the stored value of the second reserved memory number counter for counting, the total reserved memory number count value that is the stored value of the total reserved memory number counter for counting the total reserved memory number, etc. Remembered. The game control counter setting unit 154 also stores a variation count value that is a stored value of a variation counter for counting one or both of the ST count (probable variation count) and the short time count.

  The game control buffer setting unit 155 is provided with various buffers that temporarily store data used for controlling the progress of the game in the pachinko gaming machine 1. For example, the game control buffer setting unit 155 stores data indicating buffer values in each of a plurality of types of buffers.

  The I / O 105 included in the game control microcomputer 100 shown in FIG. 7 has an input port for taking in various signals transmitted to the game control microcomputer 100 and various signals to the outside of the game control microcomputer 100. And an output port for transmission.

  As shown in FIG. 7, the effect control board 12 is provided with an effect control CPU 120 that performs a control operation in accordance with a program, a ROM 121 that stores an effect control program, fixed data, and the like, and a work area for the effect control CPU 120. A random number circuit that updates the numerical data indicating the random number value independently of the RAM 122, the display control unit 123 that executes processing for determining the control content of the display operation on the main screen 5, and the effect control CPU 120. 124 and I / O 125 are mounted.

  As an example, in the effect control board 12, when the effect control CPU 120 executes an effect control program read from the ROM 121, a process for controlling the effect operation by the effect electric component is executed. At this time, the effect control CPU 120 reads the fixed data from the ROM 121, the effect control CPU 120 writes the various data to the RAM 122 and temporarily stores the data, and the effect control CPU 120 stores the effect data in the RAM 122. Fluctuation data reading operation for reading out various fluctuation data temporarily stored, the reception control CPU 120 for receiving the input of various signals from the outside of the presentation control board 12 via the I / O 125, and the presentation control CPU 120 for I / O A transmission operation for outputting various signals to the outside of the effect control board 12 via O125 is also performed.

  The effect control CPU 120, the ROM 121, and the RAM 122 may be included in a one-chip effect control microcomputer mounted on the effect control board 12.

  The effect control board 12 is a wiring for transmitting an information signal (video signal) indicating an effect image for the main screen 5 and a line for transmitting an information signal (effect sound signal) indicating a command for the audio control board 13. A wiring for transmitting an information signal (an electrical signal) indicating a command to the lamp control board 14 is connected. Furthermore, on the effect control board 12, wiring for transmitting from the controller sensor unit 31C an information signal (operation detection signal) indicating that the player's operation action on the stick controller 31A has been detected, and a game for the push button 31B. A wiring for transmitting an information signal (operation detection signal) indicating that the user's operation action has been detected from the push sensor 31D is also connected.

  A special screen control board 135 is connected to the effect control board 12. The special screen control board 135 controls the operation of the lifting motor 205M in accordance with an instruction from the effect control CPU 120. As described above, the special screen control board 135 includes sensors 205SX (left origin sensor 205YL, right origin sensor 205YR, upper left end sensor) that detect the upper and lower origin positions of the left slider 205SL and the right slider 205SR that move the lifting frame 205F up and down. Sensor 205ZL and upper right end sensor 205ZR) are connected. Further, the special screen control board 135 is connected to a lift motor (left lift motor 205ML and right lift motor 205MR) that lifts and lowers the left slider 205SL and the right slider 205SR. As the sensors 205SX, a contact type sensor such as a micro switch or a non-contact type sensor such as a photo sensor or a capacitance sensor can be used.

  Sensors 205SX are sensors that detect that the left slider 205SL and the right slider 205SR are at the upper and lower origin positions and output an origin position signal. When detecting the left slider 205SL and the right slider 205SR, the sensors 205SX change the origin position signal from the off state to the on state, or from the on state to the off state. In the present embodiment, the case where the sensors 205SX detect digital (ON / OFF) signals will be described, but the sensors 205SX may output analog values, for example. For example, a resolver or a rotary encoder attached to a laser sensor or a motor may be used to output an analog value.

  The special screen control board 135 controls the output to the left lift motor 205ML and the right lift motor 205MR based on the origin position signal input from the sensors 205SX, the variation pattern designation command transmitted from the main board 11, and the like. When the left slider 205SL and the right slider 205SR move up or down, the special screen control board 135 is located at a position where the sensors 205SX detect the left slider 205SL and the right slider 205SR (the operation ends of the left lifting motor 205ML and the right lifting motor 205MR). ), The left slider 205SL and the right slider 205SR are controlled to move. For example, when the special screen control board 135 raises the left slider 205SL, the left slider 205SL reaches the operation end detected by the upper left sensor 205ZL (at this time, the origin position signal of the upper left sensor 205ZL is off). Can be moved. The special screen control board 135 can be moved to the operating end (origin position) where the origin position signal of the left origin sensor 205YL is turned on when the left slider 205SL is lowered.

  Note that a left lift motor 205ML and a right lift motor 205MR are used as actuators for operating the left slider 205SL and the right slider 205SR. For this reason, the special screen control board 135 may have a function of a motor driver. Further, an electromagnetic solenoid or the like may be used as an actuator for operating the left slider 205SL and the right slider 205SR. When an electromagnetic solenoid is used, the special screen control board 135 may have a function of supplying a voltage for operating the electromagnetic solenoid.

  In the present embodiment, the case where the left origin sensor 205YL, the right origin sensor 205YR, the upper left end sensor 205ZL, and the upper right end sensor 205ZR are arranged to detect the positions of the left slider 205SL and the right slider 205SR is illustrated. For example, a sensor that detects that the left slider 205SL and the right slider 205SR are at the operation ends may be arranged. In addition, although there are two left elevating motor 205ML and right elevating motor 205MR, the number of actuators such as left elevating motor 205ML and right elevating motor 205MR is not limited to this. The operations of the left slider 205SL and the right slider 205SR and the operations of the lifting frame 205F and the special screen 205A associated therewith will be described later.

  On the effect control board 12, for example, the random number circuit 124 or the like counts the numerical data indicating various random values used for controlling the effect operation so as to be updatable. The random number used for controlling such a production operation is also called a production random number.

  In addition to the effect control program, the ROM 121 mounted on the effect control board 12 shown in FIG. 7 stores various data used to control the effect operation. For example, the ROM 121 stores data constituting a plurality of determination tables, determination tables, setting tables and the like prepared for the effect control CPU 120 to make various determinations, determinations, and settings.

  Specifically, the ROM 121 stores various tables for executing the hold effect. For example, in the ROM 121, the display mode of the first hold display displayed in the first hold display area 5H1 is determined as one of a plurality of types as a table for executing the hold effect at the time of addition of the first hold display. The 1st hold | maintenance display mode determination table referred in order to do may be memorize | stored. Specifically, the ROM 121 may store a plurality of first hold display mode determination tables that are different from each other in the types of display modes that can be determined in the first hold display mode determination table and the respective determination ratios. . Each first hold display mode determination table includes a numerical value (determination value) to be compared with a random number value (not shown) for determining the display mode of the first hold display at the time of addition for each display mode of the first hold display. ) May be assigned. Instead of the plurality of first hold display mode determination tables, one large first hold display mode determination table including information of all the first hold display mode determination tables may be stored in the ROM 121. Similarly, in the ROM 121, the display mode of the second hold display displayed in the second hold display area 5H2 is set to any one of a plurality of types as a table for executing the add hold effect of the first hold display. A second hold display mode determination table referred to for determination may be stored.

  Whether or not to change the display mode of the first hold display already displayed in the first hold display area 5H1 to another display mode as a table related to the execution of the hold change effect of the first hold display in the ROM 121. The first pending change presence / absence determination table that is referred to in order to determine the display mode, and when it is determined that the display mode is to be changed to another display mode, it is referred to in order to determine which display mode is to be changed to a plurality of types. A first hold change mode determination table may be stored. Specifically, the ROM 121 includes a plurality of first hold change presence / absence determination tables having different determination ratios that change to another display mode and no change to another display mode, and the first hold change mode determination. A plurality of first pending change mode determination tables may be stored in which the types of display modes that can be determined in the table and the respective determination ratios are different from each other. Each first pending change presence / absence determination table may be assigned a numerical value (determination value) to be compared with a random number value (not shown) for determining whether there is a change or not. In each of the first hold change mode determination tables, a numerical value (determination value) to be compared with a random number (not shown) for determining the display mode of the first hold display after the change is displayed for each display mode of the first hold display. ) May be assigned. Instead of a plurality of first hold change presence / absence determination tables, one large first hold change presence / absence determination table including information of all the first hold change presence / absence determination tables may be stored in the ROM 121. Further, instead of the plurality of first hold change mode determination tables, one large first hold change mode determination table including information of all the first hold change mode determination tables may be stored in the ROM 121. Similarly, whether or not to change the display mode of the second hold display already displayed in the second hold display area 5H2 to another display mode as a table related to the execution of the hold change effect of the second hold display in the ROM 121. 2nd pending change presence / absence determination table that is referred to in order to determine whether to change to another display mode, or to determine which display mode to change to another display mode The second pending change mode determination table may be stored.

  The ROM 121 stores a first hold change effect execution timing determination table that is referred to in order to determine the execution timing of the hold change effect of the first hold display (timing such as the number of changes to be executed later). May be. Specifically, the ROM 121 stores a plurality of first hold change effect execution timing determination tables that are different from each other in the type of execution timing that can be determined in the first hold change effect execution timing determination table. It may be. In each first hold change effect execution timing determination table, a numerical value (determination value) to be compared with a random value (not shown) for determining the execution timing of the first hold change effect is assigned to each execution timing. Just do it. Further, instead of the plurality of first hold change effect execution timing determination tables, one large first hold change effect execution timing determination table including information of all the first hold change effect execution timing determination tables is stored in the ROM 121. Also good. Similarly, the ROM 121 has a second hold change effect execution timing determination table that is referred to in order to determine the execution timing of the hold change effect of the second hold display (timing of how many changes will be executed later). It may be stored.

  Note that a table including information on two or more of the first hold display mode determination table, the first hold change presence / absence determination table, the first hold change mode determination table, and the first hold change effect execution timing determination table is a ROM 121. May be stored.

  Further, in the ROM 121, when it is determined that the display mode of the first hold display (or the second hold display) is changed to another display mode, the character or the like is directly displayed on the first hold display (or the second hold display). As a table related to the holding action effect to be applied indirectly or indirectly, an action effect execution presence / absence determination table referred to for determining whether or not to execute the holding action effect may be stored. Specifically, the ROM 121 may store a plurality of action effect execution presence / absence determination tables with different determination ratios of execution and non-execution. In each action effect execution presence / absence determination table, a numerical value (determination value) to be compared with a random number value (not shown) for execution presence / absence determination may be assigned to each of execution and non-execution. Further, when there are a plurality of effect modes of the holding action effect, when it is determined that the holding action effect is to be executed, the holding action effect effect that is referred to in order to determine which effect mode is selected from among the plurality of effect modes. The mode determination table may be stored in the ROM 121. Specifically, a plurality of hold action effect effect mode determination tables that are different from each other in the type of hold action effect effect modes that can be determined in the hold effect effect effect mode determination table and the respective determination ratios may be stored. . In each hold action effect effect mode determination table, a numerical value (determined value) to be compared with a random value (not shown) for determining the effect mode of the hold effect effect may be assigned to each effect mode.

  Further, in the ROM 121, when it is determined that the display mode of the first hold display (or second hold display) is not changed to another display mode, the character or the like is directly displayed on the first hold display (or second hold display). Alternatively, a table for determining whether or not to execute the holding action gaze effect may be stored as a table relating to the holding action gaze effect that is applied indirectly or indirectly. Specifically, the ROM 121 may store a plurality of action / gase effect execution presence / absence determination tables with different determination ratios of execution and non-execution. In each action gaze effect execution presence / absence determination table, a numerical value (determination value) to be compared with a random number value (not shown) for execution presence / absence determination may be assigned to each of execution and non-execution. In addition, when there are a plurality of presentation modes of the holding action gaze effect, the holding action that is referred to in order to determine which of the plurality of presentation modes is determined when it is determined to execute the holding action gasse effect. A gasse effect effect mode determination table may be stored in the ROM 121. Specifically, there are stored a plurality of hold action gaze effect effect mode determination tables that are different from each other in the type of effect mode of the hold action gaze effect that can be determined in the hold action gaze effect effect mode determination table. May be. Even if each holding mode has a numerical value (determined value) to be compared with a random value (not shown) for determining the holding mode effect production mode, each of the production modes is assigned to the respective holding mode gaze production production mode determination table. Good.

  When executing an active display change effect that changes a special image including an active display, the ROM 121 is referred to as a table related to the active display change effect to determine whether to execute the active display change effect. The active display change effect execution presence / absence determination table may be stored. Specifically, the ROM 121 may store a plurality of active display change effect execution presence / absence determination tables with different determination ratios of execution and non-execution. Each active display change effect execution presence / absence determination table may be assigned a numerical value (determination value) to be compared with a random number value (not shown) for execution presence / absence determination, with and without execution. Further, when there are a plurality of active display change effects, when the active display change effect is determined to be executed, the active display referred to determine which of the plurality of effects is selected. You may memorize | store the change production production | presentation aspect determination table in ROM121. Specifically, a plurality of active display change effect effect mode determination tables are stored in which the types of active display change effect effect modes that can be determined in the active display change effect effect mode determination table are different from each other. May be. Each active display change effect presentation mode determination table has a numerical value (determination value) to be compared with a random number (not shown) for determining the display mode of the active display change effect assigned to each of the effect modes. Good.

  The ROM 121 also includes a plurality of effect control patterns used by the effect control CPU 120 to control effect operations performed by various effect devices (for example, the main screen 5, the speaker 8, the lamp 9, the special screen device 205, etc.). Data to be stored is stored. By setting the effect control pattern, various variable display operations such as decorative symbols, notice effects (including pre-read notice effects), and the like are realized.

  The various effect control patterns are composed of data indicating the control contents of various effect operations executed in accordance with the progress of the game in the pachinko gaming machine 1. For example, the effect control pattern is a decoration corresponding to a plurality of types of variation patterns, in the period from when the variation of the special symbol is started in the special game until the finalized special symbol that is the special graphic display result is derived and displayed. Design operations such as variable display operation, reach production, re-lottery production, etc., or various production operations that do not involve variable display of decorative symbols (for example, a hold production for a display mode of a hold display in the first hold display area 5H1 , And the like, the data indicating the control contents of various rendering operations, such as the suspension rendering for the display mode of the suspension display in the second suspension display area 5H2.

  FIG. 25A shows a configuration example of the effect control pattern. The effect control pattern is, for example, control data for controlling various effect operations such as an effect control process timer determination value, display control data, audio control data, lamp control data, operation detection control data, special screen control data, and an end code. The contents of various effects control, the timing of switching the effects control, and the like may be set in time series. The effect control process timer determination value is a value (determination value) to be compared with the value of the effect control process timer (effect control process timer value) provided in a predetermined area of the effect control RAM incorporated in the effect control CPU 120. Thus, a determination value corresponding to the execution time (effect time) of each effect operation is set in advance. In place of the effect control process timer determination value, for example, a predetermined effect control command is received from the main board 11, or a predetermined process is executed as a process for controlling the effect operation in the effect control CPU 120. The data indicating the switching timing of effect control or the like may be set corresponding to predetermined control content or processing content.

  The display control data includes data indicating the display mode of the effect image in the display area of the main screen 5 such as data indicating the variation mode of each decorative pattern during variable display of the decorative symbol. That is, the display control data is data that designates the display operation of the effect image in the display area of the main screen 5. The audio control data includes data indicating an audio output mode from the speaker 8 such as data indicating an output mode of a production sound or the like interlocked with a variable display operation of the decorative symbol during variable display of the decorative symbol. That is, the audio control data is data that specifies an audio output operation from the speaker 8. The lamp control data includes, for example, data indicating the light emission operation mode of the lamp 9 (light emitter). That is, the lamp control data is data that designates the light emission operation (lighting operation, blinking operation, and extinguishing operation) of the lamp 9. The operation detection control data includes, for example, data indicating a period during which an operation on the operation unit such as the operation button 30 is effectively detected, control contents of the rendering operation when the operation is detected effectively, and the like. That is, the operation detection control data is data that designates an effect operation corresponding to an operation on the operation unit.

  The special screen control data is data for designating the rendering operation of the special screen device 205. The effect control CPU 120 controls the special screen device 205 to perform an effect operation in a predetermined operation pattern via the special screen control board 135 based on the special screen control data. The special screen control data includes at least one operation pattern of the special screen device 205. However, the special screen control data may include a plurality of operation patterns of the special screen device 205. For example, the special screen control data may include an operation pattern in which the special screen device 205 operates strongly and an operation pattern in which the special screen device 205 operates weakly. The strong operation is, for example, an operation pattern in which the special screen device 205 operates large or for a long time in the movable range (long initial operation). On the other hand, the weak operation is an operation pattern in which the special screen device 205 operates in a movable range smaller than the strong operation or for a short time (short initial operation). When the special screen control data includes a plurality of operation patterns of the special screen device 205, the effect control CPU 120 may select and execute the operation pattern according to the effect conditions. For example, the effect control CPU 120 may select a strong motion pattern during a super reach effect, a pseudo-continuous effect, a big hit effect, and the like, and may select a weak motion pattern during a normal reach. The special screen device 205 operates in a plurality of operation patterns, so that interest can be improved.

  Note that these control data do not have to be included in all the effect control patterns, but an effect control pattern including a part of the control data according to the contents of the effect operation by each effect control pattern. There may be.

  The effect control pattern may include control data for controlling the initial operation of the effect device. As described above, the initial operation of the effect device is an operation executed to confirm the operation of the effect devices such as the main screen 5, the speaker 8, the lamp 9, and the special screen device 205, for example. The effect control CPU 120 can cause the effect device to initially operate in a predetermined operation pattern by executing an effect control pattern including an operation pattern of an initial operation of the effect device. The plurality of operation patterns of the initial operation can be realized by preparing a plurality of effect control patterns for executing the initial operation and selecting a predetermined effect control pattern from the plurality of effect control patterns. . The effect control pattern selected in the initial operation may be designated based on the EXT data XX of the initialization designation command E0XXH, for example. The effect control pattern selected in the initial operation may be selected based on a predetermined condition by the effect control CPU 120 that has received the initialization designation command or the power failure recovery designation command.

  FIG. 25B is a diagram for explaining various rendering operations that are executed according to the contents of the rendering control pattern. The production control CPU 120 determines the control content of the production operation according to various control data included in the production control pattern. For example, when the effect control process timer value matches any of the effect control process timer determination values, the decorative design is displayed in a manner specified by the display control data associated with the effect control process timer determination value, and the character Control is performed to display effect images such as images and background images on the screen of the main screen 5. In addition, control is performed to output sound from the speaker 8 in a mode specified by the voice control data, and control is performed to cause the lamp 9 to emit light in a mode specified by the lamp control data, which is specified by the operation detection control data. Control is performed to receive the operation on the stick controller 31 </ b> A and the push button 31 </ b> B during the operation effective period, which is the period during which the operation is effective, and determine the content of the effect. Further, the effect control CPU 120 performs control to operate the special screen device 205 in a manner specified by the special screen control data. Note that dummy data (data not specifying control) may be set as data corresponding to a production component that does not become a control target even though it corresponds to the production control process timer determination value.

  The effect operation shown in FIG. 25 (B) corresponds to the entire period from the start of the change of the decorative design to the final stop, but is not limited to this, and during the variable display of the decorative design An effect control pattern for executing an effect operation corresponding to a part of the period (for example, a period of executing the notice effect) may be provided. Alternatively, in order to execute the presentation operation corresponding to a predetermined period other than the variable display of the decorative symbols (for example, a period in which a round is being executed in the jackpot gaming state, a period in which an ending effect is executed at the end of the jackpot gaming state, etc.) The effect control pattern may be provided.

  When setting the production control pattern, the pattern data constituting the relevant production control pattern may be read from the ROM 121 and temporarily stored in a predetermined area of the RAM 122, or the pattern data constituting the relevant production control pattern may be stored. The storage address in the ROM 121 may be temporarily stored in a predetermined area of the RAM 122, and the reading position of the stored data in the ROM 121 may be designated. After that, every time the production control process timer value is updated, it is determined whether or not it matches any of the production control process timer determination values. If the production control process timer value matches, the production operation according to the corresponding various control data is performed. Control. In this way, the effect control CPU 120 performs the effect devices (the main screen 5, the speaker 8, the lamp 9, the special data in accordance with the contents of the process data # 1 to process data #n (n is an arbitrary integer) included in the effect control pattern. Control of the screen device 205 or the like is advanced. In each process data # 1 to process data #n, display control data # 1 to display control data #n and voice control data # 1 to voice control associated with production control process timer determination values # 1 to #n are provided. Data #n, lamp control data # 1 to lamp control data #n, and operation detection control data # 1 to operation detection control data #n indicate the control content of the rendering operation in the rendering device and specify the execution of the rendering control. Control execution data # 1 to production control execution data #n are configured.

  A command according to the effect control pattern set in this way is output from the effect control CPU 120 to the display control unit 123, the sound control board 13, the lamp control board 14, and the like. In the display control unit 123 that receives a command from the effect control CPU 120, for example, a predetermined VDP or the like develops the image data indicated by the command by reading it from an image data memory such as CGROM and temporarily storing it in the VRAM. On the voice control board 13 that has received a command from the effect control CPU 120, for example, the voice synthesis IC reads out the voice data indicated by the command from the voice data ROM and temporarily stores it in the voice RAM or the like. .

  In the RAM 122 mounted on the effect control board 12 shown in FIG. 7, as an area for holding various data used for controlling the effect operation, for example, an effect control data holding area 190 as shown in FIG. Is provided. The effect control data holding area 190 shown in FIG. 26A includes an effect control flag setting unit 191, an effect control timer setting unit 192, an effect control counter setting unit 193, and an effect control buffer setting unit 194. Yes.

  The effect control flag setting unit 191 has a plurality of types of states whose states can be updated according to an effect operation state such as an effect image display state on the screen of the main screen 5, an effect control command transmitted from the main board 11, and the like. A flag is provided. For example, the effect control flag setting unit 191 stores data indicating the value of the flag and data indicating the on state or the off state for each of the plurality of types of flags. As a specific example, the production control flag setting unit 191 stores data indicating the value of the probability change flag, data indicating the on state or the off state, and the like for each of the probability change flag and the time reduction flag.

  The effect control timer setting unit 192 is provided with a plurality of types of timers used for controlling the progress of various effect operations such as an effect image display operation on the main screen 5. For example, the production control timer setting unit 192 stores data indicating timer values in each of a plurality of types of timers.

  The effect control counter setting unit 193 is provided with a plurality of types of counters used for controlling the progress of various effect operations. For example, the production control counter setting unit 193 stores data indicating the count value in each of the multiple types of counters. The effect control counter setting unit 193 also stores data indicating an effect number count value that is a stored value of an effect number counter for counting one or both of the number of time reductions and the number of probability changes.

  The effect control buffer setting unit 194 is provided with various buffers that temporarily store data used for controlling the progress of various effect operations. For example, the effect control buffer setting unit 194 stores data indicating buffer values in each of a plurality of types of buffers.

  In the present embodiment, data constituting the first start winning prize reception command buffer 194A as shown in FIG. The first start winning reception command buffer 194A is provided with a storage area (an area corresponding to buffer numbers “1” to “4”) corresponding to the maximum value (for example, “4”) of the total reserved storage number. . When there is a start winning at the first start winning opening, a start opening winning designation command (first starting slot winning designation command), a symbol designation command, a variable category command, a reserved memory number notification command (first reserved memory number notification command) ) Are transmitted from the main board 11 to the effect control board 12 as one set. The first start winning reception command buffer 194A has a storage area so that among these commands, a symbol designation command, a variable category command, and a first reserved memory number notification command can be stored in association with each other.

  The effect control CPU 120 stores the commands in the order received at the time of the first start prize from the head in the empty area of the first start prize reception command buffer 194A. At the time of the first start winning, command transmission is performed in the order of the first start opening winning designation command, the symbol designation command, the variation category command, and the first reserved memory number notification command. Therefore, if the command is received normally, as shown in FIG. 26 (B), in the storage areas corresponding to the buffer numbers “1” to “4”, the start opening prize designation command, the symbol designation command, the fluctuation The category command and the first pending storage number notification command are stored in this order. In FIG. 26B, commands are stored in storage areas corresponding to buffer numbers “1” to “3”.

  The commands stored in the first start winning reception command buffer 194A shown in FIG. 26 (B) are deleted one by one every time the decorative symbol variable display is started in synchronization with the first special game. Subsequent commands are shifted while maintaining the buffer number (in order of winning among commands). Specifically, when variable display of decorative symbols is started in conjunction with the first special figure game, the area corresponding to the smallest buffer number among the commands associated with the first start opening prize designation command is displayed. One stored command (one set) is deleted, and the command stored in the area corresponding to the buffer number larger than the buffer number of the deleted command (corresponding to the first start opening prize designation command) Command) is shifted while maintaining the winning order (buffer number size relationship).

  For example, in the storage state shown in FIG. 26B, when the variable display of decorative symbols is started in synchronization with the first special figure game, the command stored in the area corresponding to the buffer number “1” is deleted. The command stored in the area corresponding to the buffer number “2” is shifted to the buffer number “1”, and each command stored in the area corresponding to the buffer number “3” is changed to the buffer number “2”. Shifted.

  In the present embodiment, the data constituting the second start winning reception command buffer 194B as shown in FIG. 26C is stored in a predetermined area of the effect control buffer setting unit 194. In the second start winning reception command buffer 194B, a storage area (an area corresponding to buffer numbers “1” to “4”) corresponding to the maximum value (for example, “4”) of the total reserved storage number is provided. . When there is a start winning at the second start winning opening, a start opening winning specifying command (second starting opening winning specifying command), a symbol specifying command, a variable category command, a reserved memory number notification command (second reserved memory number notifying command) ) Are transmitted from the main board 11 to the effect control board 12 as one set. In the second start winning reception command buffer 194B, a storage area is secured so that among these commands, a symbol designation command, a variable category command, and a pending storage count notification command can be stored in association with each other.

  The effect control CPU 120 stores the commands in the order received at the second start winning prize from the head in the empty area of the second start winning reception command buffer 194B. At the time of the second start winning, command transmission is performed in the order of the second start opening winning designation command, the symbol designation command, the variation category command, and the reserved storage number notification command. Therefore, if the command is received normally, as shown in FIG. 26C, the second start opening prize designation command and the symbol designation command are stored in the storage areas corresponding to the buffer numbers “1” to “4”. The variable category command and the pending storage number notification command are stored in this order. In FIG. 26C, commands are stored in storage areas corresponding to buffer numbers “1” to “2”.

  The commands stored in the second start winning reception command buffer 194B shown in FIG. 26 (C) are deleted one by one every time the decorative symbol variable display is started in synchronization with the second special game. Subsequent commands are shifted while maintaining the buffer number (in order of winning among commands). Specifically, when variable display of decorative symbols is started in conjunction with the second special figure game, the area corresponding to the smallest buffer number among the commands associated with the second start opening prize designation command is displayed. One stored command (one set) is deleted, and the command stored in the area corresponding to the buffer number larger than the buffer number of the deleted command (corresponding to the second start opening winning designation command) Command) is shifted while maintaining the winning order (buffer number size relationship).

  For example, in the storage state shown in FIG. 26C, when the variable display of decorative symbols is started in synchronization with the second special figure game, the command stored in the area corresponding to the buffer number “1” is deleted. The command stored in the area corresponding to the buffer number “2” is shifted to the buffer number “1”.

  In the present embodiment, data constituting the first prefetch notice buffer 194C as shown in FIG. 26D is stored in a predetermined area of the effect control buffer setting unit 194. The first prefetch notice buffer 194C is provided with storage areas (areas corresponding to buffer numbers “1” to “4”) corresponding to the respective data constituting the first start winning reception command buffer 194A. That is, in the first prefetch notice buffer 194C, the contents of the decision concerning the prefetch notice effects related to the respective hold information determined by the effect control CPU 120 and the like are stored in association with the buffer numbers “1” to “4”. Is done. When the hold data (one set of commands) associated with a certain buffer number is deleted in the first start winning reception command buffer 194A of FIG. 26B due to the start of variable display of decorative symbols, etc. In the first prefetch notice buffer 194C, the contents associated with the buffer number are also deleted. Further, due to the start of variable display of decorative symbols, etc., the pending data (one set of commands) associated with a certain buffer number in the first start winning reception command buffer 194A of FIG. When shifted to a number, the contents associated with the buffer number in the first prefetch notice buffer 194C are also shifted to the other buffer number.

  In the present embodiment, data constituting the second prefetch notice buffer 194D as shown in FIG. 26E is stored in a predetermined area of the effect control buffer setting unit 194. The second prefetch notice buffer 194D is provided with storage areas (areas corresponding to the buffer numbers “1” to “4”) corresponding to the respective data constituting the second start winning reception command buffer 194B. That is, in the second prefetch notice buffer 194D, the contents of the prefetch notice effects related to the hold information determined by the effect control CPU 120 or the like are stored in association with the buffer numbers “1” to “4”. Is done. When pending data (one set of commands) associated with a certain buffer number is deleted in the second start winning reception command buffer 194B of FIG. 26C due to the start of variable display of decorative symbols, etc. In the second prefetch notice buffer 194D, the contents associated with the buffer number are also deleted. Further, due to the start of variable display of decorative symbols, etc., the pending data (one set of commands) associated with a certain buffer number in the second start winning reception command buffer 194B of FIG. When the number is shifted to a number, the contents associated with the buffer number in the second prefetch notice buffer 194D are also shifted to the other buffer number.

  Next, the operation (action) of the pachinko gaming machine 1 in this embodiment will be described.

First, the operation of the gaming control microcomputer 100 when power supply to the gaming machine 1 is started will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 27 is a flowchart showing main processing executed by the game control microcomputer 100.
In FIG. 27, when power is supplied to the gaming machine 1 and power supply is started, the input level of the reset terminal to which the reset signal is input becomes high level, and the gaming control microcomputer 100 (specifically, The CPU 103) starts a main process after step S001 after executing a security check process that is a process for confirming whether the contents of the program are valid. In the main process, the CPU 103 first performs necessary initial settings.

  In the initial setting process, the CPU 103 first sets the interrupt prohibition (step S001). Next, the interrupt mode is set to interrupt mode 2 (step S002), and a stack pointer designation address is set to the stack pointer (step S003). Then, the RAM 102 is set in an accessible state (step S005). In interrupt mode 2, the address synthesized from the value of the specific register (I register) (1 byte) built in the CPU 103 and the interrupt vector (1 byte: least significant bit 0) output from the built-in device is This mode indicates an interrupt address.

  Next, the CPU 103 determines whether or not an output signal (clear signal) of the clear switch input via the input port of the I / O 105 is in an on state (step S006). The clear switch is mounted on a power supply board, for example. When the CPU 103 determines that the clear switch is in the on state (step S007; YES), the CPU 103 executes a normal initialization process (steps S010 to S014).

  On the other hand, when the CPU 103 determines that the clear switch is not in the on state (step S007; NO), the CPU 103 determines whether the power supply stop process has been performed (step S008). The process at the time of power supply stop means the state of the gaming machine 1 in order to restore the gaming state of the gaming machine 1 and the internal state of the gaming control microcomputer 100 when the power supply to the gaming machine 1 is stopped. Data protection processing for temporarily backing up the data. Data backup is performed, for example, by storing data to be protected in a storage area (backup RAM area) of the RAM 102 to which power is supplied from a backup power source. Data backup may be performed by saving data in the backup RAM area when it is detected that power supply to the gaming machine 1 is stopped. Whether or not the power supply stop process has been performed can be determined, for example, based on whether or not there is backup data in the backup RAM area. Whether there is backup data in the backup RAM area can be determined by, for example, the presence or absence of a backup flag that is set when data is backed up. Further, the determination can be made based on whether or not parity data is added to the backup RAM area. When it is determined that the power supply stop process is not being performed (step S008; NO), the CPU 103 executes an initialization process starting from step S010.

  On the other hand, if it is determined that the power supply stop process has been performed (step S008; YES), the CPU 103 performs a parity check on the backup data stored in the backup RAM area, and whether the check result is OK. Is determined (step S009). In the process of step S009, the checksum calculated from the data stored in the RAM 102 when the power supply is stopped is compared with the checksum calculated and stored from the data backed up in the power supply stop process. The check result is judged based on the agreement between the two. If the power supply stop process is correctly performed, the checksum stored in the backup RAM area matches the checksum calculated from the data stored in the backup RAM area after the power supply is started. On the other hand, if the power supply stop process is not performed correctly, the two checksums do not match. The fact that the parity check result is not normal means that the data in the backup RAM area is different from the data when the power supply is stopped. In such a case, the gaming state of the gaming machine 1 cannot be returned to the state when the power supply is stopped. When the parity check result is not OK (step S009; NO), the CPU 103 executes normal initialization processing that is executed when the power is turned on, which is not recovery by the power supply stop processing (step S010 to step S014).

  On the other hand, when the parity check result is OK (step S009; YES), the CPU 103 performs a game state restoration process (the processes of steps S41 to S44) for returning the gaming state of the gaming machine 1 to the state when the power supply is stopped. Do. In step S41, the CPU 103 sets the start address of the backup setting table stored in the ROM 101 as a pointer (step S41), and sequentially sets the contents of the backup setting table in the work area (area in the RAM 102) (step S41). Step S42). The work area is backed up by a backup power source. In the backup setting table, initialization data for an area that may be initialized in the work area is set. By the processing in steps S41 and S42, the stored data remains as it is in the part of the work area that is not initialized. The part that is not initialized includes, for example, data indicating a gaming state at the time of stopping power supply (special symbol process flag, probability variation flag, time reduction flag, etc.), an area where the output state of the output port is saved (output port buffer), This is a portion where data indicating the number of unpaid prize balls is set.

  After executing the process of step S42, the CPU 103 sets the head address of the backup command transmission table stored in the ROM 101 as a pointer (step S43), and sequentially stores the contents of the backup command transmission table in the work area (in the RAM 102). The command stored in the backup command transmission table can be transmitted. After executing the process of step S43, the CPU 103 transmits a power failure recovery designation command (9200H) as an initialization designation command at the time of power supply restoration (step S44). The CPU 103 may transmit the data backed up in the backup RAM area together with a power failure recovery designation command. Examples of commands to be transmitted together with the power failure recovery designation command include the variable display result command (8CXXH), the symbol confirmation command (8F00), the game state designation command (95XX), the hit start designation command (A0XX), which are described in FIG. These are a notification of opening a prize opening (A1XX), a notification after opening a big prize opening (A2XX), a command for specifying the number of time reductions (B3XX), a command for specifying the number of times of variation (B4XX), and the like. By transmitting these commands together with the power failure recovery designation command, it is possible to recover the state of the gaming machine when the power supply is stopped. Receiving the power failure recovery designation command, the effect control CPU 120 executes a predetermined power failure recovery process. The power failure recovery process may include an initial operation of the rendering device. After executing the process of step S44, the CPU 103 executes the process of step S015.

  On the other hand, when it is determined that the clear switch is in the ON state (step S007; YES), when it is determined that the power supply stop process is not performed in the process of step S008 (step S008; NO), or step S009. When it is determined that the parity check result is not OK in the process (step S009; NO), the CPU 103 executes an initialization process starting from step S010. In the initialization process, the CPU 103 first performs a RAM clear process (step S010). The data stored in the RAM 102 is initialized by the RAM clear process. The data to be initialized is, for example, count value data of a counter for generating a random number for determining per symbol. Data initialization sets the data value to 0, but a predetermined initial value may be set as the data, for example. Also, initialization is performed on the entire storage area of the RAM 102. However, only a predetermined storage area of the RAM 102 may be initialized. As an area that is not initialized, for example, an area in which data of a count value of a counter for generating a random number for determination per normal symbol may be stored.

  After executing the process of step S010, the CPU 103 sets the start address of the initialization setting table stored in the ROM 101 as a pointer (step S011), and sequentially sets the contents of the initialization setting table to the initial values of the work area. (Step S012). By the processing in steps S011 and S012, for example, initial values are set for a plurality of types of flags that can be updated in accordance with the progress of the game in the gaming machine 1 set in the game control flag setting unit 152. The In addition, initial values are set for various timers set in the game control timer setting unit 153 and used for controlling the progress of the game in the gaming machine 1. In addition, an initial value is set for a counter for counting a count value that is set for the game control counter setting unit 154 and is used for controlling the progress of the game in the gaming machine 1. Furthermore, initial values are set for various buffers that are set in the game control buffer setting unit 155 and temporarily store data used for controlling the progress of the game in the gaming machine 1.

  After executing the processing of step S012, the CPU 103 sets the address of the initialization command transmission table in the pointer (step S013), and sequentially sets the contents of the initialization command transmission table in the work area (area in the RAM 102). The command stored in the initialization command transmission table can be transmitted. After executing the process of step S013, the CPU 103 initializes a sub board (a board on which a microcomputer other than the main board 11 is mounted) such as the effect control board 12 (a microcomputer for game control). 100 notifies the sub-board that the initialization process has been executed, and the sub-board transmits a command for designating the execution of the initialization process to the sub-board (step S014). The CPU 103 may designate a target for executing the initialization process in the EXT data of the initialization designation command. For example, CPU 103 may specify an effect control pattern for selecting an initial operation of the effect device in the EXT data. Further, the CPU 103 may directly designate the initial operation of the effect device such as the main screen 5 or the special screen device 205 in the EXT data. When receiving the initialization designation command, the presentation control CPU 120 executes the initial operation of the presentation device based on the initialization designation command.

  After executing the process of step S014 or after executing the process of step S44, the CPU 103 executes a random number circuit setting process for initial setting of the random number circuit 104 (step S015). For example, the CPU 103 performs processing according to a random number circuit setting program to perform setting for causing the random number circuit 104 to update a random value within a predetermined range of random numbers.

  Furthermore, in step S015, the CPU 103 sets a game control timer register so that a timer interrupt is periodically generated every predetermined time (for example, 2 ms). That is, a value corresponding to, for example, 2 ms is set in a predetermined register (time constant register) as an initial value. In this embodiment, it is assumed that a timer interrupt is periodically taken every 2 ms. The game control microcomputer 100 includes a CTC (counter / timer circuit). As the game control timer, a CTC built in the game control microcomputer 100 can be used.

  When the execution of the initialization process (steps S010 to S016) is completed, the CPU 103 repeatedly executes the initial value random number update process (step S018) and the display random number update process (step S019) in the main process. When the initial value random number update process and the display random number update process are executed, an interrupt prohibition process is executed (step S017), and an interrupt process by the game control timer is prohibited. When the display random number update process and the initial value random number update process are finished, an interrupt permission process is executed (step S020), and the interrupt disabled state is released. In the present embodiment, the display random number for which update processing is executed in step S019 is a random number for determining a stop symbol of a special symbol when it is not a big hit, or whether to reach when it is not a big hit It is a random number to do. In the display random number update process, the count value of the counter for generating the display random number is updated. The initial value random number for which update processing is executed in step S018 is a count of a counter (ordinary symbol determination random number generation counter) for generating a random number for determining whether or not to win for a normal symbol. This is a random number for determining the initial value. In the initial value random number update process, the count value of the counter for generating the initial value random number is updated. Above, description of the main process using FIG. 27 is complete | finished.

  Next, game control timer interrupt processing will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 28 is a flowchart illustrating an example of a game control timer interrupt process. When the CPU 103 receives the interrupt request signal from the CTC and receives the interrupt request, the CPU 103 executes a game control timer interrupt process shown in the flowchart of FIG. When the game control timer interrupt process shown in FIG. 28 is started, the CPU 103 first executes a predetermined switch process, thereby the gate switch 21, the first start port switch 22A, the second start port through the switch circuit 110. The state of detection signals input from various switches such as the switch 22B and the count switch 23 is determined (step S11). Subsequently, by executing predetermined main-side error processing, abnormality diagnosis of the pachinko gaming machine 1 is performed, and if necessary, a warning can be generated according to the diagnosis result (step S12). After that, by executing a predetermined information output process, for example, data such as jackpot information, start information, probability variation information supplied to a hall management computer installed outside the pachinko gaming machine 1 is output (steps). S13).

  Following the information output process, a game random number update process for updating at least a part of the game random numbers such as random number values MR1 to MR5 used on the main board 11 side by software is executed (step S14). Thereafter, the CPU 103 executes special symbol process processing (step S15). In the special symbol process, the value of the special symbol process flag provided in the game control flag setting unit 152 is updated according to the progress of the game in the pachinko gaming machine 1, and the first special symbol display device 4A or the second special symbol is processed. Various processes are selected and executed in order to perform control of display operation in the display device 4B and setting of opening / closing operation of the special winning opening in the special variable winning ball device 7 in a predetermined procedure.

  Following the special symbol process, the normal symbol process is executed (step S16). The CPU 103 controls the display operation (for example, turning on / off the segment LED) on the normal symbol display 20 by executing the normal symbol process, thereby moving the normal symbol variable display and the normal variable winning ball apparatus 6B. Enables setting of the tilting movement of the blade.

  After executing the normal symbol process, the CPU 103 transmits a control command from the main board 11 to a sub-side control board such as the effect control board 12 by executing the command control process (step S17). As an example, in the command control process, in response to the setting in the command transmission table specified by the value of the transmission command buffer provided in the game control buffer setting unit 155, among the output ports included in the I / O 105, effect control After setting the control data in the output port for transmitting the effect control command to the board 12, the predetermined control data is set in the output port of the effect control INT signal and the effect control INT signal is turned on for a predetermined time. It is possible to enable transmission of the effect control command based on the setting in the command transmission table, for example, by turning it off. After executing the command control process, after setting the interrupt enabled state, the game control timer interrupt process is terminated. This is the end of the description of the game control timer interrupt process using FIG.

  FIG. 29 is a flowchart showing an example of the special symbol process executed in step S15 of the game control timer interrupt process shown in FIG. In this special symbol process, the CPU 103 first executes a start winning determination process (step S101). FIG. 30 is a flowchart showing an example of the start winning determination process executed in step S101 of the special symbol process process (step S15) shown in FIG. FIG. 31 is a flowchart illustrating an example of a start winning process executed in steps S208 and S211 of the start winning determination process (step S101) shown in FIG. FIG. 32A is a flowchart showing an example of a winning random number determination process executed in step S220 of the start winning process (step S208, step S211) shown in FIG.

  In the start winning determination process (step S101) shown in FIG. 30, the CPU 103 first uses a detection signal from the first start opening switch 22A provided corresponding to the first start winning opening formed by the normal winning ball apparatus 6A. Based on this, it is determined whether or not the first start port switch 22A is in the ON state (step S201). At this time, if the first start port switch 22A is in an ON state (step S201; YES), the first special figure reservation memory number (the first special figure game hold number) is a predetermined upper limit value (for example, the upper limit memory number). As “4”) (step S202). For example, the CPU 103 only needs to be able to identify the first special figure reserved memory number by reading the first reserved memory number count value that is the stored value of the first reserved memory number counter provided in the game control counter setting unit 154. When the number of first special figure hold storage is not the upper limit value in step S202 (step S202; NO), for example, the stored value of the start port buffer provided in the game control buffer setting unit 155 is set to “1” ( Step S207).

  When the first start-up switch 22A is in the OFF state in step S201 (step S201; NO), or when the first special figure reservation storage number reaches the upper limit value in step S202 (step S202; YES). After executing the processing of step S209, the second start port switch is based on the detection signal from the second start port switch 22B provided corresponding to the second start winning port formed by the normally variable winning ball apparatus 6B. It is determined whether or not 22B is in an ON state (step S203). At this time, if the second start port switch 22B is in the ON state (step S203; YES), the second special figure reservation memory number (second special figure game hold number) is a predetermined upper limit value (for example, the upper limit memory number). As “4”) (step S204). The CPU 103 only needs to be able to specify the second special figure reserved memory number by reading the second reserved memory number count value, which is the stored value of the second reserved memory number counter provided in the game control counter setting unit 154, for example. When the second special figure holding memory number is not the upper limit value in step S204 (step S204; NO), for example, the stored value of the start port buffer provided in the game control buffer setting unit 155 is set to “2” ( Step S210).

  After executing the process of step S207, the start winning time process (FIG. 31) is executed (step S208), the stored value of the start port buffer is “0 (initialized)” (step S209), and the process of step S203 is performed. Proceed to After executing the process of step S210, the start winning process (FIG. 31) is executed (step S211), the stored value of the start port buffer is “0 (initialized)” (step S212), and the start winning determination process is performed. Exit. Thereby, even if it is a case where the start winning of a game ball is detected at the same time in the first start port switch 22A and the second start port switch 22B, the processing based on each detection can be completed.

  The CPU 103 performs an update so as to add 1 to the special figure holding storage number corresponding to the start port buffer value which is the stored value of the start port buffer as the start winning time process (steps S208 and S211) shown in FIG. S215). For example, when the starting port buffer value is “1”, the first reserved memory number count value is incremented by 1, while when the starting port buffer value is “2”, the second reserved memory number count value is incremented by one. Thus, the first reserved memory number count value is updated so as to increase by 1 when the game ball passes (enters) the first start winning opening and the first start condition is satisfied. Further, the second reserved memory number count value is updated so as to increase by 1 when the game ball passes (enters) the second start winning opening and the second start condition is satisfied. Following the process of step S215, the total number of reserved storage is updated to be incremented by 1 (step S216). For example, the total reserved memory number count value, which is the stored value of the total reserved memory number counter provided in the game control counter setting unit 154, may be updated to add one.

  After executing the process of step S216, the CPU 103 determines the random value MR1 for determining the special figure display result, the jackpot type determination from the numerical data updated by the random counter of the random number circuit 104 or the game control counter setting unit 154. The numerical data indicating the random number value MR2 and the random number value MR3 for determining the variation category are extracted (step S217). The numerical data indicating each random value extracted in this way is stored by being set as hold information at the head of the empty entry in the special figure hold storage unit 151 corresponding to the start port buffer value (step S218). For example, when the start port buffer value is “1”, numerical data indicating the random number values MR1 to MR3 is set in the first special figure reservation storage unit 151A, while when the start port buffer value is “2”, Numerical data indicating the random number values MR1 to MR3 is set in the second special figure storage unit 151B.

  Subsequent to the processing of step S218, transmission setting of a start opening prize designation command corresponding to the start opening buffer value is performed (step S219). For example, when the starting port buffer value is “1”, the storage address of the first starting port winning designation command table in the ROM 101 is stored in the buffer area designated by the transmission command pointer in the transmission command buffer. 12 is set to transmit a first start opening winning designation command. On the other hand, when the starting port buffer value is “2”, the storage address of the second starting port winning designation command table in the ROM 101 is stored in the buffer area of the transmission command buffer. Setting for transmitting the second start opening winning designation command is performed. The start opening winning designation command set in this way is executed by, for example, executing the command control process (step S17) of the game control timer interruption process shown in FIG. 28 after the special symbol process process is completed. To the effect control board 12.

  Following the process of step S219, a winning random number determination process is executed (step S220). Thereafter, for example, by storing the storage address of the reserved storage number notification command table in the ROM 101 in the buffer area designated by the transmission command pointer in the transmission command buffer, the reserved storage number notification command is transmitted to the effect control board 12. For this purpose (step S221). The reserved memory number notification command set in this way is executed by executing the command control process (step S17) of the game control timer interrupt process shown in FIG. 28 after the special symbol process process is completed, for example. To the effect control board 12.

  As the winning random number determination process (step S220) shown in FIG. 32, the CPU 103 confirms the state of the probability variation flag provided in the game control flag setting unit 152, for example, so that the current in the pachinko gaming machine 1 A gaming state is specified (step S401). The CPU 103 identifies the probability variation state when the probability variation flag is on, for example, by confirming the state of the probability variation flag provided in the game control flag setting unit 152. That is, the CPU 103 determines whether the gaming state is in the high probability state, for example, when the probability variation flag is in the on state, depending on whether the probability variation flag provided in the game control flag setting unit 152 is in the on state or the off state. If the probability variation flag is in the off state, the low probability state is identified. In other words, the CPU 103 specifies which state the current gaming state is based on the state of the probability change flag provided in the gaming control flag setting unit 152.

  Following the processing in step S401, table data corresponding to the current gaming state is set from the table data constituting the display result determination table 130A (step S402). When using different display result determination tables (first special figure display result determination table, second special figure display result determination table) for the first special figure and the second special figure, the starting port buffer value is “1”. In some cases, the first special figure display result determination table is used, and when the start port buffer value is “2”, the second special figure display result determination table may be used. Thereafter, it is determined whether or not the numerical data indicating the random number value MR1 for determining the special figure display result extracted in step S217 of the start winning process shown in FIG. 31 is within a predetermined jackpot determination range (step S403). In the big hit determination range, individual decision values assigned to the special figure display result of “big hit” in the special figure display result decision table data set by the processing of step S402 are set. It suffices to determine whether or not there is a decision value that matches the random value MR1 by comparing the decision value with each other. Alternatively, a numerical value indicating the minimum value (lower limit value) and the maximum value (upper limit value) of the determination value included in the jackpot determination range is set, and the CPU 103 determines the random number MR1 and the minimum value or maximum value of the jackpot determination range. It is only necessary to determine whether or not the random value MR1 is within the range of the jackpot determination range by comparison. At this time, when it is determined that the random value MR1 is within the range of the jackpot determination range, it is determined that the variable display result based on the pending data including the random value MR1 is determined to be “big hit” (big hit start determination) can do.

  When it is determined in step S403 that it is within the jackpot determination range (step S403; YES), the jackpot type is determined based on the random number MR2 for determining the jackpot type (step S409). At this time, the CPU 103 determines in accordance with the fluctuation special figure (“first special figure” corresponding to “1” or “second special figure” corresponding to “2”) specified in correspondence with the start port buffer value. The big hit type determination table data is selected from the table data constituting the big hit type determination table 131. Then, by referring to the selected jackpot type determination table data, it is determined which of the plurality of jackpot types is determined. Settings for transmitting the symbol designation command corresponding to the determination result of the process in step S409 to the effect control board 12 are performed (step S410).

When it is determined in step S403 that it is not within the big hit determination range (step S403; NO), or after any of the processing of step S410 is executed, the variation category is determined (step S412). That is, the variation category is determined as one of a plurality of types shown in FIG.
In the process of step S412, the CPU 103 determines a plurality of variable category determination tables stored in the ROM 101 (a plurality of types of variable category determinations that are different from each other, such as the types of variable categories that can be determined in the variable category determination table and their determination ratios). One of the variation category determination tables to be set as the use table is selected from among the tables.

  Specifically, the CPU 103 uses a special figure display result (for example, the determination result of step S403) or the stored memory number (for example, the stored value of the first reserved memory number counter provided in the game control counter setting unit 154). One of the variation category determination tables to be set as a use table is selected based on a certain first stored memory count value or the like. Subsequently, the CPU 103 converts the variable category determination table set as the use table and numerical data indicating the random number MR3 for determining the variable category extracted from the random counter of the random number circuit 104 or the game control counter setting unit 154, for example. Based on the plurality of types of variation categories, one of the variation categories is determined.

  FIG. 33 is a diagram illustrating a selection example of the variation category determination table. FIG. 34 is a diagram illustrating a configuration example of a variable category determination table. The configuration example of this variation category determination table is four types of variation category tables that are referred to in order to determine one of a plurality of variation categories. FIG. 34A is a configuration example of a variation category determination table (denoted as “C-TBL1” in the figure) using a certain variation category determination table of the above four types. FIG. 34B is a configuration example of a variation category determination table based on another variation category determination table (denoted as “C-TBL2” in the figure). FIG. 34C is a configuration example of a variation category determination table based on still another variation category determination table (denoted as “C-TBL3” in the figure). FIG. 34D is a configuration example of a variation category determination table by another variation category determination table (denoted as “C-TBL4” in the figure). For simplification of explanation, the variation category determination table in which the determination ratio is set as shown in FIG. 34A may be simply referred to as the variation category determination table in FIG. The same applies to FIGS. 34B to 34D and other determination tables such as a variation pattern determination table. FIG. 33 shows a selection example in which any setting is selected from the four types (setting “C-TBL1” to setting “C-TBL4”) of FIGS. 34 (A) to 34 (D). This is a selection example in which any one of the variation category determination tables is selected from the four types of variation category determination tables.

  The variation category determination table “C-TBL1” in FIG. 34A (the variation category determination table “C-TBL2” in FIG. 34B, the variation category determination table “C-TBL3” in FIG. 34C, FIG. In the variation category determination table “C-TBL4” in (D), numerical values (determination values) to be compared with the random value MR3 for determining the variation category are assigned to a plurality of types of variation categories.

  In the setting example of the variation category determination table “C-TBL1” in FIG. 34A, among 100 determination values (values in the range of “0” to “99”) of the random value MR3, 0 is the variation category. 70 (values in the range from “0” to “69”) are assigned to the variable category “PA2” and 27 (values in the range from “70” to “96”) are assigned to the “PA1”. Assigned to “PA3”, two (values in the range of “97” to “98”) are assigned to the variation category “PA4”, and one (value “99”) is assigned to the variation category “PA5”. Yes. That is, in the setting example of the variation category determination table “C-TBL1” in FIG. 34A, the variation category “PA1” is 0% (0 ÷ 100), the variation category “PA2” is 70% (70 ÷ 100), The variation category “PA3” is determined at a rate of 27% (27 ÷ 100), the variation category “PA4” is 2% (2 ÷ 100), and the variation category “PA5” is determined at a rate of 1% (1 ÷ 100).

  In the setting example of the variation category determination table “C-TBL2” in FIG. 34B, four (“0”) out of 100 determination values (values in the range of “0” to “99”) of the random value MR3. ”To“ 3 ”) is assigned to the variation category“ PA1 ”, 85 (values in the range of“ 4 ”to“ 88 ”) are assigned to the variation category“ PA2 ”, and 8 (“ 89 ” ”To“ 96 ”) is assigned to the fluctuation category“ PA3 ”, two (values in the range of“ 97 ”to“ 98 ”) are assigned to the fluctuation category“ PA4 ”, and one (value“ 99 ”) is assigned to the variable category“ PA5 ”. That is, in the setting example of the variation category determination table “C-TBL2” in FIG. 34B, the variation category “PA1” is 4% (4 ÷ 100), the variation category “PA2” is 85% (85 ÷ 100), The variation category “PA3” is determined at a rate of 8% (8 ÷ 100), the variation category “PA4” is 2% (2 ÷ 100), and the variation category “PA5” is determined at a rate of 1% (1 ÷ 100).

  In the setting example of the variation category determination table “C-TBL3” in FIG. 34C, 64 (“0”) out of 100 determination values (values in the range of “0” to “99”) of the random value MR3. ”To“ 63 ”) is assigned to the variation category“ PA1 ”, 25 (values in the range of“ 64 ”to“ 88 ”) are assigned to the variation category“ PA2 ”, and 8 (“ 89 ” ”To“ 96 ”) is assigned to the fluctuation category“ PA3 ”, two (values in the range of“ 97 ”to“ 98 ”) are assigned to the fluctuation category“ PA4 ”, and one (value“ 99 ”) is assigned to the variable category“ PA5 ”. That is, in the setting example of the variation category determination table “C-TBL3” in FIG. 34C, the variation category “PA1” is 64% (64 ÷ 100), the variation category “PA2” is 25% (25 ÷ 100), The variation category “PA3” is determined at a rate of 8% (8 ÷ 100), the variation category “PA4” is 2% (2 ÷ 100), and the variation category “PA5” is determined at a rate of 1% (1 ÷ 100).

  In the setting example of the variation category determination table “C-TBL4” in FIG. 34D, 20 (“0”) out of 100 determination values (values in the range of “0” to “99”) of the random value MR3. ”To“ 19 ”) is assigned to the fluctuation category“ PB3 ”, and 40 (values in the range of“ 20 ”to“ 59 ”) are assigned to the fluctuation category“ PB4 ”and 40 (“ 60 ” ”To“ 99 ”) is assigned to the fluctuation category“ PB5 ”. That is, in the setting example of the variation category determination table “C-TBL4” in FIG. 34D, the variation category “PB3” is 20% (20 ÷ 100), the variation category “PB4” is 40% (40 ÷ 100), The variation category “PB5” is determined at a rate of 40% (40 ÷ 100).

  In the setting examples of FIGS. 34A to 34C, when the special figure display result is “losing”, when the number of reserved memories is large, compared to when the number of reserved memories is small, shortening / non-reach ( Loss) The determination rate of the variation category (variation category “PA1”) is increased. Specifically, the determination rate “64%” of the variation category “PA1” in the variation category determination table “C-TBL3” selected when the special figure display result is “losing” and the number of stored storages is “4”. > Determination ratio “4%” of the variation category “PA1” in the variation category determination table “C-TBL2” selected when the special figure display result is “losing” and the reserved storage number is “3” or “2” > The determination ratio “0%” of the variation category “PA1” in the variation category determination table “C-TBL1” selected when the special figure display result is “losing” and the number of stored storages is “1”.

  Further, in the setting examples of FIGS. 34A to 34C, when the special figure display result is “losing”, the super-reach (losing) fluctuation category ( The determination ratio of the variation category “PA4” or the variation category “PA5”) is made constant. Specifically, in any of the variation category determination table “C-TBL1”, the variation category determination table “C-TBL2”, and the variation category determination table “C-TBL3”, the determination ratio “ 1% ”, and the decision rate“ 2% ”for the variable category“ PA4 ”.

  In the setting examples of FIGS. 34A to 34C, any one of the variation category determination table “C-TBL1”, the variation category determination table “C-TBL2”, and the variation category determination table “C-TBL3” is used. Even so, there is a determined value of the random value MR3 corresponding to the same (common) variation category (the same variation category is determined). That is, if the determined value of the random value MR3 is a certain value, it is any of the variation category determination table “C-TBL1”, the variation category determination table “C-TBL2”, and the variation category determination table “C-TBL3”. Also, the same variation category is determined. For example, when the determined value of the random number MR3 is “99”, any of the variation category determination table “C-TBL1”, the variation category determination table “C-TBL2”, and the variation category determination table “C-TBL3” Also, the variation category “PA5” is determined. When the determined value of the random value MR3 is a value in the range of “97” to “98”, the variation category “PA4” is determined in any of the above-described variation category determination tables.

  Further, when the determined value of the random value MR3 is a value in the range of “89” to “96”, the variation category “PA3” is determined in any of the above-described variation category determination tables. When the determined value of the random value MR3 is a value in the range of “64” to “69”, the variation category “PA2” is determined in any of the above-described variation category determination tables. As a result, if the determined value of the random number MR3 is a certain value (a value in each of the above-described ranges), the reach, the super reach, the super reach α and the super reach β are determined in advance. It can be easily determined. Accordingly, it is possible to notify them before the variable display corresponding to the start prize, and it is possible to improve the interest in the game. 34A to 34C, when the determined value of the random number MR3 is a value in the range of “0” to “69”, the variation category determining table “C-TBL1”, In either the variation category determination table “C-TBL2” or the variation category determination table “C-TBL3”, the variation category “PA1” or “PA2” is determined. Thereby, it can be easily determined in advance whether at least the reach is not achieved.

  Based on the distribution of these determination values, the big hit expectation degree is higher when the super reach α and the super reach β are executed than when the normal reach is executed. Further, the big hit expectation degree is higher when super reach β is executed than when super reach α is executed. Furthermore, the super reach β includes a super reach β having no pseudo-ream, a super reach β having one pseudo-ream, and a super reach β having two pseudo-reams (specific super reach β). Among these super reach βs, when a specific super reach β is executed, the expectation of jackpot is higher than when other super reach β is executed.

  Thereafter, after setting for transmitting any of the variation category commands shown in FIG. 32B to the effect control board 12 in accordance with the determination result (determination result) by the process of step S412 (step S412). S413), the winning random number determination process is terminated.

  After executing the start winning determination process in step S101 in FIG. 29, the CPU 103 selects one of the processes in steps S110 to S117 according to the value of the special figure process flag provided in the game control flag setting unit 152. And run.

  The special symbol normal process in step S110 is executed when the value of the special symbol process flag is “0”. In this special symbol normal processing, whether or not the variable display result of the special symbol or the decorative symbol is set to “big hit” is determined (predetermined) before the variable display result is derived and displayed. In the special symbol normal process, the value of the special symbol process flag is updated to “1” when the variable display result of the special symbol or the decorative symbol is determined in advance. The special symbol normal process will be described later.

  The variation pattern setting process in step S111 is executed when the value of the special figure process flag is “1”. In this variation pattern setting process, a variation pattern is determined as one of a plurality of types shown in FIG. 21, a first variation start command (or a second variation start command), a variation pattern designation command, a variable display result notification command. The transmission setting process for transmitting etc. is included. When the variation pattern setting process is executed and the variable symbol special display is started, the value of the special symbol process flag is updated to “2”. The setting of the variation pattern will be described later. In the variation pattern setting process in step S111, the variation pattern may be determined as follows. That is, the variation category is determined using the random number MR3 for determining the variation category stored in step S218 of the start winning process, similarly to step S412 of the winning random number determination process. Subsequently, based on the variation category as the determination result, one of the variation pattern determination tables to be set as the use table is selected from the plurality of variation pattern determination tables stored in the ROM 101. Subsequently, the CPU 103 selects one of a plurality of types of variation patterns based on the variation pattern determination table set as the use table and the numerical data indicating the newly extracted random number MR5 for variation pattern determination. The variation pattern may be determined. In the start winning process, the random value MR5 for determining the variation pattern is extracted and stored in addition to the random value MR3 for determining the variation category, and stored in the variation pattern setting process in step S111. The variation pattern may be determined using the random value MR5 for determining the variation pattern stored in the time process.

  The special symbol variation process in step S112 is executed when the value of the special symbol process flag is “2”. This special symbol variation process includes a process for setting the special symbol to be varied in the first special symbol display device 4A and the second special symbol display device 4B, and an elapsed time after the special symbol starts to vary. It includes processing to measure For example, every time the special symbol variation process of step S112 is executed, the special diagram variation timer value, which is the stored value in the special diagram variation timer provided in the game control timer setting unit 153, is subtracted or incremented by one. The first special symbol game (special game using the first special symbol) by the first special symbol display device 4A or the second special symbol game (special game using the second special symbol) by the second special symbol display device 4B The elapsed time is measured by a common timer regardless of whether the game is a graphic game). Further, it is also determined whether or not the measured elapsed time has reached a special figure fluctuation time corresponding to the fluctuation pattern. In this way, the special symbol variation process of step S112 only needs to be a process for controlling the variation of the special symbol in the first special symbol game or the second special symbol game by a common processing routine. When the elapsed time since the start of the special symbol variation reaches the special symbol variation time, the value of the special symbol process flag is updated to “3”.

  The special symbol stop process in step S113 is executed when the value of the special symbol process flag is “3”. In the special symbol stop process, the first special symbol display device 4A or the second special symbol display device 4B stops the variation of the special symbol, and the definite special symbol resulting in the variable symbol variable display result is stopped and displayed (derived). A process for performing the setting is included. In addition, when the gaming state is other than the low probability low base state (normal mode), that is, in the case of one or both of the probability variation state (high probability state) and the short time state (high base state), , Processing for adding the counter value of the variation counter by the game control counter setting unit 154, processing for resetting, special figure in the probability variation state (high accuracy state), and special diagram in the short time state (high base state) Processing to determine whether or not the number of times the game has been executed has reached a predetermined number of times, and the probability variation control and time shortening control for controlling to one or both of the probability variation state (high accuracy state) and the time-short state (high base state) are terminated and low accuracy is achieved. The game state transition process at the time of change such as a process for setting one or both of the state and the low base state is also included.

  Then, it is determined whether or not the jackpot flag provided in the game control flag setting unit 152 is in an on state. If the jackpot flag is in an on state, the value of the special figure process flag is “4”. Updated to When the big hit flag is off, the value of the special figure process flag is updated to “0”.

  The big hit release pre-processing in step S114 is executed when the value of the special figure process flag is “4”. This big hit release pre-processing includes a process for starting the execution of the round in the big hit gaming state and setting the big winning opening to the open state based on the fact that the variable display result becomes “big hit”, etc. include. At this time, for example, the upper limit of the period during which the big winning opening is opened may be set in accordance with whether the big hit type is “16R probability change big hit” or “8R probability change big hit”. As an example, corresponding to the jackpot type “16R probability variation jackpot”, the upper limit of the period during which the winning prize opening is opened is set to “29 seconds”, and the opening of the winning prize opening which is the upper limit number of times to execute the round is set. By setting the number of times to “16 times”, the normal open big hit state may be set. On the other hand, corresponding to the jackpot type “8R probability variation jackpot”, the upper limit of the period during which the big winning opening is opened is set to “29 seconds”, and the number of opening of the big winning opening that becomes the upper limit number of times to execute the round is set. Is set to “8 times” so that the normal open big hit state may be set. At this time, the value of the special figure process flag is updated to “5”.

  The big hit release processing in step S115 is executed when the value of the special figure process flag is "5". The big hit opening process includes a process for measuring an elapsed time after the big winning opening is opened, a number of game balls detected by the measured elapsed time and the count switch 23, and the like. The process etc. which determine whether it became the timing which returns to a closed state from an open state are included. Then, when returning the special winning opening to the closed state, after performing processing for stopping the supply of the solenoid driving signal to the special winning opening door solenoid 82, the value of the special figure process flag is updated to “6”. .

  The big hit release post-processing in step S116 is executed when the value of the special figure process flag is “6”. In this post-hit opening process, the process of determining whether or not the number of rounds in which the winning opening is in the open state has reached the maximum number of opening of the big winning opening, or the maximum number of opening of the big winning opening has been reached. In some cases, processing for setting to transmit a jackpot end designation command is included. When the number of round executions has not reached the maximum value of the number of times of winning the special winning opening, the value of the special figure process flag is updated to “5”. The value of the process flag is updated to “7”.

  The big hit end process in step S117 is executed when the value of the special figure process flag is “7”. In the jackpot end process, a waiting time corresponding to a period in which an ending effect as an effect operation for notifying the end of the jackpot gaming state is executed by an effect device such as the main screen 5, the speaker 8, the lamp 9, or the special screen device 205. A process of waiting until time elapses, a game state transition process after a big hit for setting to start the probability variation control and the short time control corresponding to the end of the big hit gaming state, and the like are included. When such setting is performed, the value of the special figure process flag is updated to “0”.

  FIG. 35 is a flowchart showing an example of the special symbol normal process executed in step S110 of the special symbol process (step S15) shown in FIG. In the special symbol normal process shown in FIG. 35, the CPU 103 first determines whether or not the second special figure holding storage number is “0” (step S231). That is, the CPU 103 determines whether or not the second special figure game is put on hold. For example, in the process of step S231, the second reserved storage number count value stored in the game control counter setting unit 154 may be read and it may be determined whether or not the read value is “0”.

  When the second special figure reservation storage number is other than “0” in step S231 (step S231; NO), the second special figure reservation storage unit 151B stores the correspondence corresponding to the reservation number “1”. As data, the random number value MR1 for determining the special figure display result and the random value MR2 for determining the jackpot type are read out (step S232). The numerical data read at this time may be temporarily stored, for example, in a random number buffer for variation.

  Subsequent to the processing of step S232, for example, by subtracting and updating the second reserved memory number count value by 1, etc., the second special figure reserved memory number is updated by 1 and the second special figure reserved memory is also updated. The hold data indicating the random number values MR1 to MR3 stored in the entries lower than the hold number “1” (for example, entries corresponding to the hold numbers “2” to “4”) are shifted upward by one entry in the unit 151B. (Step S233). Further, in the process of step S233, the game control counter setting unit 154 may update the total pending storage number count value stored in the total pending storage number counter by one. At this time, the fluctuation special figure designation buffer value which is the stored value of the fluctuation special figure designation buffer is updated to “2” (step S234).

  When the second special figure reserved memory number is “0” in step S231 (step S231; YES), it is determined whether or not the first special figure reserved memory number is “0” (step S235). That is, the CPU 103 determines whether or not the first special figure game is put on hold. For example, in the process of step S235, the game control counter setting unit 154 reads the first reserved memory number count value stored in the first reserved memory number counter, and determines whether or not the read value is “0”. That's fine.

  As described above, since the process of step S235 is executed when it is determined in step S231 that the second special figure holding storage number is “0”, the first special figure game and the second special figure are executed. When the game is put on hold, the second special game is executed with priority over the first special game. It should be noted that the second special figure game is not limited to being executed in preference to the first special figure game, and the game ball enters (passes through) the start winning opening (the first starting winning opening, the second starting winning opening). ) And the special game (first special game, second special game) may be executed in the order in which the start prizes (first start prize, second start prize) are generated. In this case, it is only necessary to provide a table for storing data that can specify the order in which the start winnings are generated, and to determine which of the first special game and the second special game is to be executed from the stored data.

  When the number of first special figure hold storage number is other than “0” in step S235 (step S235; NO), the hold stored in correspondence with the hold number “1” in the first special figure hold storage unit 151A. As the data, numerical data indicating the random number value MR1 for determining the special figure display result and the random value MR2 for determining the jackpot type are read out (step S236). The numerical data read at this time may be temporarily stored, for example, in a random number buffer for variation.

  Subsequent to the process of step S236, for example, by updating the first reserved memory number count value by subtracting 1 and updating the first special figure reserved memory number, the first special figure reserved memory is updated. The hold data indicating the random number values MR1 to MR3 stored in the entry lower than the hold number “1” (for example, the entries corresponding to the hold numbers “2” to “4”) in the unit 151A is shifted upward by one entry. (Step S237). Further, in the process of step S237, the game control counter setting unit 154 may update the total pending storage number count value stored in the total pending storage number counter by one. At this time, the variable special figure designation buffer value is updated to “1” (step S238).

  After executing one of the processes of steps S234 and S238, as a usage table for determining whether the special figure display result, which is the variable symbol display result, is “big hit” or “losing”. The data of the display result determination table is set (step S239) in the same manner as the process of step S402 of the winning random number determination process (step S220) shown in FIG. When different display result determination tables (first special figure display result determination table, second special figure display result determination table) are used for the first special figure and the second special figure, in the process of step S402, the start port buffer is used. The value (“1” or “2”) is referred to, but in the process of step S239, the variable special figure designation buffer value (“1” or “2”) may be referred to.

  Subsequently, the numerical data indicating the random number value MR1 for determining the special figure display result stored in the random number buffer for fluctuation is compared with the decided values assigned to the special figure display results of “big hit” and “losing”. Then, it is determined whether the special figure display result is “big hit” or “lost” (step S240).

  After determining the special figure display result in step S240, it is determined whether or not the special figure display result is “big hit” (step S241). And when it determines with it being a "hit" (step S241; YES), the big hit flag provided in the game control flag setting part 152 is set to an ON state (step S242). At this time, the big hit type determination table 131 is selected and set as a use table for determining the big hit type as one of a plurality of types (step S243). By referring to the jackpot type determination table 131 set in this way, numerical data indicating the jackpot type determination random value MR2 stored in the random number buffer for variation is changed to “16R probability variable jackpot” and “8R probability variable jackpot”. Depending on which of the determined values assigned to the jackpot type is matched, it is determined which of the plurality of jackpot types is to be made (step S244).

  Corresponding to the jackpot type determined in this way, for example, by setting a jackpot type buffer value that is a stored value of the jackpot type buffer provided in the game control buffer setting unit 155 (step S245), the determined jackpot type Remember. As an example, if the big hit type is “16R probability variation big hit”, the big hit type buffer value may be “1”, and if “8R certain variation big hit”, it may be “2”.

  If it is determined in step S241 that it is not a “hit” (step S241; NO) or after performing any of the processes in step S245, the result of a prior decision as to whether or not to control the jackpot gaming state, A confirmed special symbol is set corresponding to the determination result of the jackpot type when the jackpot game state is set (step S248).

  After the confirmed special symbol is set in step S248, the value of the special symbol process flag is updated to “1” corresponding to the variation pattern setting process (step S249), and then the special symbol normal process is terminated. . In step S235, if the number of reserved figures stored in the special figure game using the first special figure is “0” (step S235; YES), a predetermined demonstration display setting is performed (step S250), and then the special symbol is set. Normal processing ends. In this demonstration display setting, for example, an effect control command (customer waiting demonstration designation command) for designating demonstration display (demonstration screen display) by displaying a predetermined effect image on the main screen 5 is sent from the main board 11 to the effect control board. 12 determines whether or not the transmission has been completed. At this time, if the transmission has been completed, the demonstration display setting is ended as it is. On the other hand, if it has not been transmitted, the setting for transmitting the customer waiting demonstration designation command is performed, and then the demonstration display setting is terminated.

  In the variation pattern setting process of step S111 following the special symbol normal process of step S110, the CPU 103 determines the variation pattern using the random number value MR3 for determining the variation category and the random value MR5 for determining the variation pattern.

  In the variation pattern setting process (step S111), the variation category is determined in the same manner as the winning random number determination process (step S220). However, when the winning random number determination process (step S220) is executed and the variation pattern setting is performed. In the specific examples of the variation category determination tables “C-TBL1” to “C-TBL3” shown in FIG. 34, even if the number of reserved memories differs greatly from the time of execution of the process (step S111), it is extracted at the time of winning a prize. If the random number MR3 is “99”, for example, the variation category “PA5” is determined in both the winning random number determination process and the variation pattern setting process, regardless of the number of reserved memories. Also, if the random number MR3 extracted at the time of winning is in the range of “97” to “98”, for example, the variation category “PA4” regardless of the number of reserved memories, both in the winning random number determination processing and the variation pattern setting processing. Is determined.

  FIG. 36 is a diagram illustrating a setting example of the determination ratio of the variation pattern. It is assumed that the ROM 101 stores eight types of variation pattern determination tables corresponding to the variation categories. FIG. 36A is an example of setting the variation pattern determination ratio by the variation pattern determination table selected when the variation category is “PA1 (abbreviation / non-reach loss)” among the above eight types. FIG. 36B is a setting example of the variation pattern determination ratio based on the variation pattern determination table selected when the variation category is “PA2 (non-reach (loss))” among the above eight types. FIG. 36C is an example of setting a variation pattern determination ratio based on a variation pattern determination table selected when the variation category is “PA3 (normal reach (loss))” among the above eight types. The same applies to FIGS. 36D to 36H.

  FIG. 37 is a flowchart showing an example of the special symbol stop process executed in step S113 of the special symbol process (step S15) shown in FIG. In the special symbol stop process shown in FIG. 37, the CPU 103 first determines whether or not the big hit flag is in an on state (step S291). If the big hit flag is in the on state (step S291; YES), the CPU 103 sets a big hit start production waiting time (step S292). For example, in the process of step S 292, a timer initial value determined in advance corresponding to the big hit start production waiting time may be set in the game control process timer provided in the game control timer setting unit 153.

  Subsequent to the processing in step S292, the CPU 103 performs setting for transmitting a hit start designation command from the main board 11 to the effect control board 12 (step S293). For example, in the process of step S293, the setting data indicating the storage address in the ROM 101 of the hit start specifying command table prepared in advance for transmitting the hit start specifying command is stored in the buffer specified by the send command pointer in the send command buffer. It only has to be stored in the area. Thereafter, the CPU 103 clears the big hit flag and turns it off (step S294). Then, the CPU 103 updates the value of the special symbol process flag to “4”, which is a value corresponding to the big hit release pre-processing (step S295), and then ends the special symbol stop process.

  When the big hit flag is in the off state in step S291 (step S291; NO), the CPU 103 performs a gaming state transition process during variation (step S296). Subsequently, the CPU 103 updates the value of the special symbol process flag to “0” that is a value corresponding to the special symbol normal process (step S297), and then ends the special symbol stop process.

  FIG. 38 is a flowchart showing an example of the changing gaming state transition process executed in step S296 of the special symbol stop process (step S113) shown in FIG. In the changing gaming state transition process shown in FIG. 38, the CPU 103 determines whether or not the current gaming state is the low probability low base state (step S451). CPU 103 determines that the current gaming state is the low probability low base state when both of the probability change flag and the short time flag provided in game control flag setting unit 152 are in the off state. If it is determined in step S451 that the current gaming state is the low probability low base state (step S451; YES), the CPU 103 ends the changing gaming state transition process as it is. On the other hand, when it is determined in step S451 that the low-probability / low-base state is not established (step S451; YES), the value of the variation counter is incremented by 1 (step S452). The variation counter is the number of executions of the special figure game after being controlled to the low probability low base state, and is the number of times compared with the ST number (probability variation number) and the short time number. The ST count (number of times of probability change) is the number of times of execution of the special figure game for executing the probability change control. The number of time reductions is the number of executions of the special figure game for executing the time reduction control. The number of STs (the number of times of probability variation) and the number of time reductions are set in the big hit end process (FIGS. 29 and 39).

  Subsequent to the processing in step S452, the CPU 103 reads the number of STs (the number of probability changes) (step S453) and reads the number of time reductions (step S454). Subsequent to the processing in step S454, the CPU 103 determines whether or not the current gaming state is a high probability state (probability change state) (step S455). When the probability variation flag provided in the game control flag setting unit 152 is in the on state, the CPU 103 determines that the current game state is in the high probability state. If it is determined in step S455 that the current gaming state is a highly probable state (step S455; YES), the CPU 103 indicates that the value of the variation counter is a value indicated by the ST count (probability variation count) read in step S453. It is determined whether or not the value is greater than (for example, 70 times) (step S456). When it is determined that the value of the variation number counter is larger than the value indicated by the ST number (the number of times of probability variation) (step S456; YES), the CPU 103 clears the probability variation flag provided in the game control flag setting unit 152. For example, the gaming state is set to a low probability state by turning it off (step S457), and the probability variation control is terminated.

  After executing the process of step S457, or when it is determined that the current gaming state is not the high probability state (step S455; NO), the value of the variation counter is larger than the value indicated by the ST count (probability variation count). If it is determined that it is not (step S456; NO), the CPU 103 determines whether or not the current gaming state is a high base state (time-short state) (step S458). When the time reduction flag provided in the game control flag setting unit 152 is in the on state, the CPU 103 determines that the current game state is the high base state (time reduction state). When it is determined in step S458 that the current gaming state is the high base state (short time state) (step S458; YES), the CPU 103 determines that the value of the variation counter is a value indicated by the short time number read in step S454. It is determined whether the value is greater than (for example, 70 times) (step S459). When it is determined that the value of the fluctuation number counter is larger than the value indicated by the number of time reductions (step S459; YES), the CPU 103 clears the time reduction flag provided in the game control flag setting unit 152 and enters the off state. For example, the gaming state is set to a low base state (step S460), and the time-shortening control is terminated.

  After the processing of step S460, or when it is determined that the current gaming state is not the high base state (short time state) (step S458; NO), the value of the variation counter is indicated by the short time number and is not greater than the value. (Step S459; NO), the CPU 103 determines whether or not the gaming state has become a low probability low base state (step S461). When both the probability variation flag and the time reduction flag provided in the game control flag setting unit 152 are in the off state, the CPU 103 determines that the gaming state has become the low probability low base state.

  If it is determined in step S461 that the low-probability / low-base state has been reached (step S461; YES), the CPU 103 clears the set value of the ST count (probability change count) to “0” (step S462), and sets the time-saving count. The value is cleared to “0” (step S463), the value of the variation counter is cleared to “0” (step S464), and the variation gaming state transition process is terminated. On the other hand, when it is determined in step S461 that the low probability low base state has not been reached (step S461; NO), the variation gaming state transition process is terminated without executing steps S462, S463, and S464.

  FIG. 39 is a flowchart showing an example of the big hit end process executed in step S117 of the special symbol process (step S15) shown in FIG. In the jackpot end process shown in FIG. 39, first, the CPU 103 determines whether or not the big hit end presentation waiting time has elapsed (step S311). As an example, in the big hit release post-processing (step S116) shown in FIG. 29, when the value of the special figure process flag is updated to “7”, a timer initial value determined in advance corresponding to the big hit end presentation waiting time is set. A value is set in the game control process timer. In this case, in the process of step S311, the CPU 103 updates, for example, by subtracting 1 from the game control process timer value. Whether or not the big hit end production waiting time has passed may be determined according to whether or not.

  If the big hit end presentation waiting time has not elapsed in step S311 (step S311; NO), the CPU 103 ends the big hit end processing as it is. On the other hand, when the big hit end presentation waiting time has elapsed in step S311 (step S311; YES), the CPU 103 reads the big hit type buffer value stored in the game control buffer setting unit 155 (step S312). Subsequently, the CPU 103 sets the probability change flag provided in the game control flag setting unit 152 to an on state, for example, and sets it to a high probability state (probability change state) (step S314). Subsequently, the CPU 103 sets a short time flag provided in the game control flag setting unit 152 to an on state, for example, and sets it to a high base state (step S315). That is, at the end of the big hit gaming state, the gaming state is set to a highly accurate and high base state by the processing of step S314 and step S315.

  Following the processing of step S315, the CPU 103 sets the set value of the ST count (probability change count) to 70 times (step S316) and sets the time reduction count to 70 times (step S317). Subsequently, the CPU 103 clears the value of the fluctuation number counter to “0” (step S318), and ends the big hit ending process.

  In the present embodiment, the setting value of the ST number (the number of times of probability variation) and the setting value of the time reduction number of 70 are set to the same value (both are 70 times). The number of times may be different from the set value of 70 times. In this embodiment, the set value of the ST count (probability change count) in the case of 8R probability variation big hit and the set value of the ST count (probability change count) in the case of 16R probability change big hit are the same value (both are 70 times). However, the setting value of the ST count (probability variation count) in the case of 8R probability variation big hit may be different from the set value of the ST count (probability variation count) in the case of 16R probability variation big hit. In this embodiment, the setting value of the short time in the case of 8R probability variation big hit and the setting value of the short time in the case of 16R probability variation big hit are the same value (both are 70 times). The setting value for the number of time reductions may be different from the setting value for the number of time reductions in the case of 16R probability variation big hit. When the jackpot type buffer value stored in the game control buffer setting unit 155 is “1”, the CPU 103 determines that it is a 16R probability variable big hit, and when the jackpot type buffer value is “2”. May be determined to be an 8R probability variation big hit.

  As described above, in the main board 11, in the start winning determination process in step S101, transmission setting for transmitting the start opening winning designation command corresponding to the start opening buffer value is performed to the effect control board 12 ( In step S219), transmission setting for transmitting the symbol designation command according to the special symbol display result determined in step S403 or the like is performed (step S410), and the variation category command corresponding to the variation category determined in step S412 Is set for transmitting (step S413), and transmission setting for transmitting the pending storage number notification command is performed (step S221). After these processes are executed, the command control process (step S17) of the game control timer interrupt process shown in FIG. When the game ball passes (enters) and the first start condition or the second start condition is satisfied, a start opening prize designation command (first start opening prize designation command or second start opening prize designation command), symbol designation command, Four commands, ie, a variable category command and a pending storage count notification command (a first pending storage count notification command or a second pending storage count notification command) are collectively transmitted as one set within one timer interrupt.

  In the main board 11, in the special symbol normal processing in step S110, a fixed special symbol that becomes a variable symbol display result of the special symbol using the random number value MR1 for determining the special symbol display result, the random value MR2 for determining the big hit type, or the like. In the variation pattern setting process in step S111, the variation pattern of the decorative design is determined using the random number value MR3 for determining the variation category, the random value MR5 for determining the variation pattern, and the like.

  Further, in the variation pattern setting process of step S111, a variable display result notification command for designating the confirmed special symbol determined as described above, a variation pattern designation command for designating the variation pattern of the decorative symbol determined as described above, and the like. Transmission settings for transmission to the effect control board 12 are performed. After these processes are executed, the variable control result notification command and the command control process (step S17) of the game control timer interrupt process shown in FIG. A variation pattern designation command or the like is transmitted in a batch within one timer interrupt. Note that the commands are not limited to those that are transmitted all at once in one timer interrupt, and commands may be sequentially transmitted one by one by the command control process in step S17 for each timer interrupt.

  That is, at the timing when the special symbol or decorative symbol variable display is started, the special symbol normal processing (step S110) is performed, and the special symbol display result (variable display result of the special symbol) is set to “big hit” to control the big hit gaming state. In the variation pattern setting process (step S111), a specific variable display mode (variation pattern) of the decorative symbols is determined, and the contents determined by each effect control command are determined. It is transmitted to the effect control board 12. Prior to this, at the timing when the game ball is detected at the start winning opening (the first starting winning opening, the second starting winning opening), the winning random number value determination process (step S220) determines “big hit”. Determination of whether or not the game is controlled to the big hit gaming state, determination of a general variable display mode (fluctuation category) of the decorative design, etc. are performed, and the contents determined by each presentation control command are transmitted to the presentation control board 12 Is done.

  In addition, when the big hit (8R probability variation big hit, 16R probability variation big hit), in the big hit end processing of step S117, the ST number (number of probability variation) and the number of time reductions are both 70 times. Set to state. In addition, the variation counter is counted up in each variation when the gaming state is the high-probability base state (step S452), and the gaming state is in the low-probability state when the variation counter exceeds the ST number (probability variation number). (Step S457), and the gaming state is set to a low base when the variation counter exceeds the number of time reductions (step S460).

  Next, the operation in the effect control board 12 will be described.

  In the effect control board 12, when the supply of the power supply voltage is received from the power supply board or the like, the effect control CPU 120 is activated and executes the effect control main process as shown in the flowchart of FIG. When the effect control main process shown in FIG. 40 is started, the effect control CPU 120 first executes a predetermined initialization process (step S71). At the initialization station, the production control CPU 120 confirms the reception of the initialization designation command from the main board 11 described with reference to FIG. 27, and initializes the presentation device based on the initialization designation command. As an initial operation of the effect device, for example, on the main screen 5, an initial screen display for notifying that the control of the gaming machine has been initialized, that is, initialization notification is performed.

  After executing the process of step S71, the CPU 120 for effect control clears the RAM 122, sets various initial values, sets a register of a CTC (counter / timer circuit) mounted on the effect control board 12, and the like. Thereafter, it is determined whether or not the timer interrupt flag is on (step S72). The timer interrupt flag is set to the ON state every time a predetermined time (for example, 2 milliseconds) elapses based on, for example, the CTC register setting. At this time, if the timer interrupt flag is in the off state (step S72; NO), the process of step S72 is repeatedly executed and waited.

  On the side of the effect control board 12, an interrupt for receiving an effect control command or the like from the main board 11 is generated separately from the timer interrupt that occurs every time a predetermined time elapses. This interruption is generated when, for example, an effect control INT signal from the main board 11 is turned on. When an interruption due to the turn-on of the effect control INT signal occurs, the effect control CPU 120 automatically sets the interrupt prohibition, but if a CPU that does not automatically enter the interrupt disable state is used, the interrupt is interrupted. It is desirable to issue a prohibition instruction (DI instruction). The effect control CPU 120 executes, for example, a predetermined command reception interrupt process in response to an interrupt when the effect control INT signal is turned on. In this command reception interrupt process, control that becomes an effect control command or the like from a predetermined input port that receives a control signal transmitted from the main board 11 via the relay board 15 among the input ports included in the I / O 125. Capture the signal.

  The effect control command captured at this time is stored in an effect control command reception buffer provided in the effect control buffer setting unit 194, for example. As an example, when the production control command has a 2-byte configuration, the first byte (MODE) and the second byte (EXT) are sequentially received and stored in the production control command reception buffer. Thereafter, the effect control CPU 120 ends the command reception interrupt processing after setting the interrupt permission.

  If the timer interrupt flag is on in step S72 (step S72; YES), the timer interrupt flag is cleared and turned off (step S73), and command analysis processing is executed (step S74). In the command analysis process executed in step S74, for example, after reading various effect control commands transmitted from the game control microcomputer 100 of the main board 11 and stored in the effect control command reception buffer, the reading is performed. Settings and control corresponding to the issued effect control command are performed.

  After executing the command analysis process in step S74, an effect control process is executed (step S75). In the effect control process in step S75, various effect devices such as an effect image display operation in the display area of the main screen 5, an audio output operation from the speaker 8, a light emission operation in the lamp 9, and a drive operation of the special screen device 205, for example. The contents of the control of the effect operation using the are determined, determined, set according to the effect control command transmitted from the main board 11 and the like.

  Following the effect control process of step S75, an effect random number update process is executed (step S76), and the effect random numbers counted by the random counter of the effect control counter setting unit 193 are used as various random values used for effect control. The numerical data indicating is updated by software. Thereafter, the process returns to step S72.

  FIG. 41 is a flowchart showing an example of the command analysis process executed in step S74 of the effect control main process shown in FIG. In the command analysis processing shown in FIG. 41, the effect control CPU 120 first receives a command received from the main board 11 transmitted via the relay board 15 by confirming the stored contents of the effect control command reception buffer. It is determined whether or not there is (step S501). At this time, if there is no received command (step S501; NO), the command analysis process is terminated.

  If there is a reception command in step S501 (step S501; YES), for example, by checking the MODE data of the reception command, it is determined whether or not the reception command is the first start opening prize designation command. (Step S502). Then, when it is the first start opening winning designation command (step S502; YES), a first reserved storage number notification waiting time is set (step S503). For example, in the process of step S503, a timer initial value determined in advance corresponding to the reception waiting time of the first pending storage number notification command is set in the command reception control timer provided in the effect control timer setting unit 192. That's fine.

  If the received command is not the first start opening winning designation command in step S502 (step S502; NO), it is determined whether or not the received command is the second starting opening winning designation command (step S504). If the command is the second start opening winning designation command (step S504; YES), a second reserved storage number notification waiting time is set (step S505). For example, in the process of step S505, a timer initial value determined in advance corresponding to the reception waiting time of the second pending storage number notification command may be set in the command reception control timer.

  If it is determined in step S504 that the received command is not the second start opening winning designation command (step S504; NO), it is determined whether or not the received command is a symbol designation command (step S506). If the received command is not a symbol designation command in step S506 (step S506; NO), it is determined whether the received command is a variable category command (step S507). If the received command is not a variable category command in step S507 (step S507; NO), it is determined whether or not the received command is a first pending storage number notification command (step S508). When the command is the first pending storage count notification command (step S508; YES), the first pending storage count notification waiting time is cleared by, for example, initializing the timing operation by the command reception control timer (step S509). .

  If the received command is not the first reserved memory number notification command in step S508 (step S508; NO), it is determined whether or not the received command is the second reserved memory number notification command (step S510). When the command is the second pending storage count notification command (step S510; YES), the second pending storage count notification waiting time is cleared by, for example, initializing the timing operation by the command reception control timer (step S511). .

  If the received command is a symbol designation command in step S506 (step S506; YES), if the received command is a variable category command in step S507 (step S507; YES), or steps S503, S505, S509, S511. After executing any of the above processes, if the first pending storage number notification waiting time is set in the process of step S503 for the received command received immediately before the received command, the received command is After storing at the head of the empty area in the reception command buffer 194A at the time of 1 start winning (Step S512), the process returns to Step S501.

  Further, when the received command is a symbol designation command at step S506 (step S506; YES), when the received command is a variable category command at step S507 (step S507; YES), or steps S503, S505, S509. After executing any one of the processes of S511, if the second pending storage number notification waiting time is set in the process of step S503 for the received command received immediately before the received command, the received command Is stored at the head of the empty area in the second start winning reception command buffer 194B (step S512), and the process returns to step S501.

  When the first reserved memory number notification command is received together with the first variation start command, the reserved memory number notification command may not be stored in the first start winning prize reception command buffer 194A. That is, it is only necessary that the effect control commands received in response to the occurrence of the start winning can be sequentially stored from the beginning of the empty area in the first start winning received command buffer 194A.

  Further, when the second reserved memory number notification command is received together with the second variation start command, the reserved memory number notification command may not be stored in the second start winning reception command buffer 194B. That is, it is only necessary that the effect control command received in response to the occurrence of the start winning can be sequentially stored from the beginning of the empty area in the second start winning received command buffer 194B.

  When it is determined in step S510 that the received command is not the second reserved memory number notification command (step S510; NO), the effect control CPU 120 determines whether or not the received command is a variation pattern designation command. (Step S513). When it is determined that the command is a variation pattern designation command (step S513; YES), the effect control CPU 120 stores the variation pattern designation command in a variation pattern designation command storage area formed in the RAM (step S514). . After executing the process of step S514, the effect control CPU 120 returns to step S501 and executes the process.

  When it is determined in step S513 that the received command is not a variation pattern designation command (step S513; NO), the effect control CPU 120 determines whether or not the received command is an initialization designation command (step S515). . If it is determined that the command is an initialization designation command (step S515; YES), the production control CPU 120 stores the initialization designation command in an initialization designation command storage area formed in the RAM (step S516). After executing the process of step S516, the CPU 120 for effect control returns to step S501 and executes the process.

  If it is determined in step S515 that the received command is not an initialization designation command (step S515; NO), the effect control CPU 120 performs settings according to the other received commands (step S517). For example, when the received command is a gaming state designation command, the effect control CPU 120 may identify the current gaming state by analyzing the gaming state designation command. When the received command is a hit end designation command, the effect control CPU 120 may analyze the hit end designation command and specify whether or not the time is short. When the received command is a power failure recovery designation command, the effect control CPU 120 may store the power failure recovery designation command in a power failure restoration designation command storage area formed in the RAM. After executing the process of step S517, the effect control CPU 120 returns to step S501 and executes the process.

  Start opening winning designation command (first starting opening winning designation command or second starting opening winning designation command), symbol designation command, variation category command, reserved memory number notification command (first reserved memory number notification command, second reserved memory number) An effect control command received from the main board 11 when a start winning is generated as in the case of a notification command) is also referred to as a start winning command. The first reserved memory number notification command, the second reserved memory number notification command, the first start opening prize designation command, and the second start opening prize designation command are also referred to as reserved storage information. The symbol designation command and the variation category command are also referred to as determination result information.

  When receiving commands are sequentially stored from the top of the empty area in the first start winning received command buffer 194A, it is determined whether the received command is a symbol designation command, a variable category command, or a first reserved memory count notification command. The received commands may be stored without distinction, or may be stored at the head of the free area in the corresponding storage area.

  In addition, when storing received commands sequentially from the beginning of the empty area in the second start winning received command buffer 194B, it is determined whether the received command is a symbol designation command, a variable category command, or a second reserved memory number notification command. The received commands may be stored without distinction, or may be stored at the head of the free area in the corresponding storage area. This is the end of the description of the command analysis processing using FIG.

  FIG. 42 is a flowchart showing an example of the effect control process executed in step S75 of the effect control main process shown in FIG. In the effect control process shown in FIG. 42, the effect control CPU 120 first executes a winning effect determining process (step S150). In the winning effect determining process, the effect control CPU 120 first checks the stored contents in the start winning reception command buffer (the first starting winning reception command buffer 194A or the second starting winning reception command buffer 194B). Processing for determining whether or not a start opening prize designation command has been received as a received command, and processing for determining a display mode (also referred to as a display mode at the time of addition) of a hold display when additional display is performed in the hold display area 5H Etc. are executed.

  After performing the winning effect determination process in step S150, the effect control CPU 120 executes a special screen device initial operation process (step S151). The special screen device initial operation processing in step S151 will be further described later. After executing the special screen device initial operation process in step S151, for example, depending on the value of the effect process flag provided in the effect control flag setting unit 191 or the like, one of the following processes in steps S170 to 177 is performed. Select and execute.

  The variable display start waiting process in step S170 is a process executed when the value of the effect process flag is “0” which is an initial value. This variable display start waiting process is based on whether the first variation start command (or second variation start command), variation pattern designation command, variable display result notification command, etc. transmitted from the main board 11 are received. This includes a process for determining whether or not to start variable display of decorative symbols on the screen 5, and a process for displaying a process for executing a demonstration effect (customer waiting demonstration display). When it is determined that the decorative symbol variable display is started, the value of the effect process flag is updated to “1”. The variable display start waiting process in step S170 will be further described later.

  The variable display start setting process in step S171 is a process executed when the value of the effect process flag is “1”. This variable display start setting process is performed in response to the start of variable display of special symbols in the special symbol game by the first special symbol display device 4A or the second special symbol display device 4B. In order to perform variable display and other various presentation operations, a process for determining a fixed decorative pattern according to a variation pattern of a special symbol or the type of display result, or active display by shifting the first hold display or the second hold display The area AHA includes a process for displaying a special image representing information corresponding to the active display corresponding to the first hold display or the second hold display, a process for determining various effects (for example, a main notice effect), and the like. . Thereafter, the value of the effect process flag is updated to “2”.

  The variable display effect process in step S172 is a process executed when the value of the effect process flag is “2”. In this variable display effect process, the effect control CPU 120 corresponds to the timer value in the effect control process timer provided in the effect control timer setting unit 192, based on the effect control pattern determined in the variable display start setting process. Various control data are read out, and various effect control (for example, decorative display variable display control during decorative display variable display) is performed. Specifically, the effect control CPU 120 outputs a video signal (effect image) to the main screen 5 based on the read control data (process data) and displays it on the screen. 13 to output the effect sound from the speaker 8, control to output the illumination signal to the lamp control board 14 to turn on / off / blink the lamp 9, and drive control of the special screen device 205. Execute.

  After performing such effect control, for example, it corresponds to the fact that the end code indicating the end of variable display of decorative symbols is read from the effect control pattern, or that the symbol confirmation command transmitted from the main board 11 is received. Then, the finalized decorative symbol (final stop symbol) that is the variable display result of the decorative symbol is displayed in a completely stopped manner. If the final decorative design is displayed in a complete stop in response to the end code being read from the production control pattern, the variable display time corresponding to the variation pattern specified by the variation pattern designation command has elapsed. Even if the production control command from the main board 11 is not used, it is possible to determine and display the variable display result by autonomously deriving and displaying the confirmed decorative pattern on the production control board 12 side. When the definitive decorative symbol is completely stopped and displayed, the value of the effect process flag is updated to “3”. The variable display effect process in step S172 will be further described later.

  The special figure waiting process in step S173 is a process executed when the value of the effect process flag is “3”. This waiting process per special figure includes a process of counting the number of STs (the number of times of probability change) and the number of time reductions, a process of updating the value of the production number counter, and a process of changing the gaming state according to the value of the production number counter. Can include. In this special symbol waiting process, the effect control CPU 120 sets the fanfare effect and updates the value of the effect process flag to “4” when the stop symbol is a big hit symbol, and the stop symbol is not a big hit symbol. In this case, the value of the production process flag is updated to “0” which is an initial value.

  The big hit start process of step S174 is a process executed when the value of the effect process flag is “4”. This jackpot start process is executed before the special variable winning ball apparatus 7 is opened, and a fanfare effect is performed, or an effect (for example, when the special variable winning ball apparatus 7 is opened) (for example, This includes processing for setting an effect corresponding to a normal song, an effect corresponding to a special song, and the like. Thereafter, the value of the effect process flag is updated to “5”.

  The in-round process in step S175 is a process executed when the value of the effect process flag is “5”. This in-round processing is executed when the special variable winning ball device 7 is in an open state, and an effect when the special variable winning ball device 7 is in an open state (for example, an effect corresponding to a normal song or a special song) For example, an effect corresponding to a normal song, an effect corresponding to a special song, or the like) is set. It includes processing to do. Thereafter, the value of the effect process flag is updated to “6”.

  The round post-process in step S176 is a process executed when the value of the effect process flag is “6”. This round post-processing is executed when the special variable winning ball apparatus 7 is in the open state. When a special winning opening releasing notification command is received from the main board 11, an effect to be executed when the special variable winning ball device 7 is in an open state (for example, an effect corresponding to a normal song or a special song) The effect process flag value is updated to “5”. When a hit end designation command is received from the main board 11, the ending effect is set and the value of the effect process flag is updated to “7”.

  The process after the big hit in step S177 is a process executed when the value of the effect process flag is “7”. This post-hit processing is executed before the special variable winning ball device 7 is closed, and the processing for executing the ending effect, the processing for setting the gaming state, the ST number (the number of times of probability change), and the number of time reductions are set. Processing to be performed. Thereafter, the value of the effect process flag is updated to “0”.

  Next, the special screen device initial operation process of step S151 in the effect control process process (step S75) of FIG. 42 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 43 is a flowchart showing an example of the special screen device initial operation process.

  In the special screen device initial operation process of FIG. 43, the effect control CPU 120 stores the initialization designation command or the power failure restoration designation command in the initialization designation command storage area or the power failure restoration command storage area formed in the RAM 122. It is determined whether or not (step S1511). The initialization designation command or the power failure recovery designation command is stored in the initialization designation command storage area or the power failure restoration command storage area in step S516 or step S517 described with reference to FIG. When it is determined that the initialization designation command or the power failure recovery designation command is not stored (step S1511; NO), the effect control CPU 120 ends the special screen device initial operation process of step S151.

  On the other hand, when it is determined that the initialization designation command or the power failure recovery designation command is stored (step S1511; YES), the effect control CPU 120 performs processing for executing the initial operation A (step S1512). The initial operation A is an initial operation for confirming that the special screen device 205 is movable over the entire movable range. Thereafter, the effect control CPU 120 ends the special screen device initial operation process of step S151.

  The initial operation (initial operation) of the special screen device 205 described in the present embodiment includes a long initial operation and a short initial operation. Among these, the initial operation A is an initial operation corresponding to the long initial operation. An initial operation B described later is an initial operation corresponding to a short initial operation.

  The long initial operation is an initial operation for checking whether or not a problem occurs in the special screen device 205 in a normal effect operation (normal operation confirmation). On the other hand, the short initial operation refers to an initial operation in which the special screen device 205 is operated by omitting a part of the normal performance operation. For this reason, in the long initial operation, the special screen 205A is operated, but in the short initial operation, the special screen 205A is operated with a simpler operation than the long initial operation. Note that the short initial operation is an operation process for returning to the origin (origin detection). For this reason, the short initial operation has less movement than the long initial operation. By executing the short initial operation, it is possible to check the operation of the special screen device 205 in a shorter time than when the long initial operation is performed. This is the end of the description of the special screen device initial operation process using FIG.

  Next, the initial operation A execution process (long initial operation) in step S1512 in the special screen device initial operation process (step S151) in FIG. 43 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 44 is a flowchart illustrating an example of the initial operation A execution process. As shown in FIG. 44, in the initial operation A execution process, the effect control CPU 120 first determines whether or not the initial operation A execution preparation has been completed (step S1521). The effect control CPU 120 determines that the special screen 205A is in the retracted state and the descent time timer and the ascending start timer are not set in the determination of the preparation for executing the initial operation A. The storage state is determined based on origin position signals transmitted from the left origin sensor 205YL and right origin sensor 205YR. When it is determined that the initial operation A has not been executed (step S1521; NO), the effect control CPU 120 prepares for the initial operation A (step S1522). In preparation for execution of the initial operation A, the special screen 205A is placed in the storage state, and the fall time timer and the rise start timer are cleared.

  In performing the storing operation for bringing the special screen 205A into the storing state, the effect control CPU 120 operates the lifting motor 205M to lower the left slider 205SL and the right slider 205SR, and lowers the lifting frame 205F. The effect control CPU 120 repeats the storing operation until it is determined in step S1521 that the preparation for executing the initial operation A has been completed. The effect control CPU 120 sets the lower left stopper solenoid 205DL and the lower right stopper solenoid 205DR when the special screen 205A is stored. By setting the lower left stopper solenoid 205DL and the lower right stopper solenoid 205DR, the shift of the special screen 205A in the housed state is suppressed.

  If the CPU 120 for effect control determines in step S1521 that the preparation for executing the initial operation A has been completed (step S1521; YES), it determines whether the descent time timer is being set (step S1523). The fall time timer is a time for projecting a demonstration effect image on the special screen 205A when the special screen 205A appears. When it is determined that the fall time timer is not set (step S1523; NO), the effect control CPU 120 determines whether or not the rise start timer is being set (step S1524). The rising start timer is a time for projecting a demonstration effect image on the main screen 5 when the special screen 205A is in the housed state.

  When it is determined that the rising start timer is not being set (step S1524; NO), the effect control CPU 120 sets the rising start timer (= tu) (step S1525), and proceeds to step S1526. If the effect control CPU 120 determines that the ascending start timer is being set (step S1524; YES), it proceeds to step S1526 without setting the ascending start timer (= tu).

  Subsequently, the effect control CPU 120 projects a demo image on the main screen 5 (step S1526). Next, the effect control CPU 120 determines whether or not the ascending start timer has counted up (tu = 0) (step S1527). As a result, when the effect control CPU 120 determines that the ascending start timer has not counted up (tU ≠ 0) (step S1527; NO), the demonstration effect executed on the main screen 5 has not yet ended. Become. Therefore, the effect control CPU 120 ends the initial operation A execution process as it is.

  When it is determined that the ascending start timer has counted up (tu = 0) (step S1527; YES), the effect control CPU 120 releases the lower left stopper solenoid 205DL and the lower right stopper solenoid 205DR, and operates the lifting motor 205M. (Step S1528), the left slider 205SL and the right slider 205SR are raised. Further, the effect control CPU 120 also raises the elevating frame 205F by raising the left slider 205SL and the right slider 205SR (step S1528).

  The special screen 205A appears on the front side of the main screen 5 as the elevating frame 205F rises and is gradually set. At this time, the effect control CPU 120 causes the projector 32 to project a predetermined image (step S1529). The predetermined image is a single color, for example, a white image having no creature (person) such as a character or pattern. Further, the effect control CPU 120 causes the projector 32 to project a predetermined image, and changes the focus of the projected image from the main screen 5 to the special screen 205A (step S1530), and adjusts the focus according to the special screen 205A. . The effect control CPU 120 operates the projector moving device 32A to retract the projector 32 to the second normal position in order to change the focus of the projected image from the main screen 5 to the special screen 205A.

  Subsequently, the effect control CPU 120 determines whether or not the special screen 205A has reached the uppermost stage based on the origin position signals transmitted from the upper left end sensor 205ZL and the upper right end sensor 205ZR (step S1531). As a result, when the CPU 120 for effect control determines that the special screen 205A has not reached the uppermost stage (step S1531; NO), the initial operation A execution process is terminated as it is. Therefore, the left slider 205SL and the right slider 205SR continue to rise until the special screen 205A reaches the uppermost stage.

  When the effect control CPU 120 determines that the special screen 205A has reached the top (step S1531; YES), the special screen 205A appears as a whole and enters the set state. At this time, the effect control CPU 120 stops the elevating motor 205M (step S1532) and finishes raising the left slider 205SL and the right slider 205SR. At the same time, the lifting of the lifting frame 205F is also terminated. Subsequently, the upper left stopper solenoid 205UL and the upper right stopper solenoid 205UR are set to restrict the downward movement of the left slider 205SL and the right slider 205SR. Then, the effect control CPU 120 clears the rising start timer (step S1533).

  Subsequently, the effect control CPU 120 sets a descent time timer (= td) (step S1534). Then, the effect control CPU 120 causes the projector 32 to project the demonstration effect image onto the special screen 205A (step S1535). At this time, the focus of the image projected from the projector 32 corresponds to the special screen 205A that appears as a whole and is in the set state, so that the focused image is projected onto the special screen 205A.

  Further, the effect control CPU 120 proceeds to step S1535 also when it is determined in step S1523 that the fall time timer is being set (step S1523; YES). Subsequently, the effect control CPU 120 determines whether or not the fall time timer has been counted up (td = 0) (step S1536). As a result, when it is determined that the falling time timer has not been counted up (td ≠ 0) (step S1536; NO), the demonstration effect executed on the special screen 205A has not yet ended. In this case, the initial operation A execution process is terminated as it is, and the demonstration effect on the special screen 205A is continued.

  When it is determined that the descent time timer has counted up (td = 0) (step S1536; YES), the effect control CPU 120 releases the upper left stopper solenoid 205UL and the upper right stopper solenoid 205UR, and activates the lifting motor 205M. (Step S1537), the left slider 205SL and the right slider 205SR are lowered. Further, the effect control CPU 120 lowers the lifting frame 205F by the lowering of the left slider 205SL and the right slider 205SR (step S1537).

  The special screen 205A is gradually stored on the front side of the main screen 5 as the elevating frame 205F is lowered. At this time, the effect control CPU 120 causes the projector 32 to project a predetermined image (step S1538). The predetermined image may be an image projected in step S1529, or may be an image different from this image. The effect control CPU 120 causes the projector 32 to project a predetermined image, and changes the focus of the projected image from the special screen 205A to the main screen 5 (step S1539), and adjusts the focus according to the main screen 5 To do. The effect control CPU 120 operates the projector moving device 32A to advance the projector 32 to the first normal position in order to change the focus of the projected image from the special screen 205A to the main screen 5.

  Subsequently, the effect control CPU 120 determines whether or not the special screen 205A is stored based on the origin position signals transmitted from the left origin sensor 205YL and the right origin sensor 205YR (step S1540). As a result, when it is determined that the special screen 205A is not stored (step S1540; NO), the effect control CPU 120 ends the initial operation A execution process as it is. Therefore, the lowering of the left slider 205SL and the right slider 205SR is continued until the special screen 205A is stored.

  If the effect control CPU 120 determines that the special screen 205A is stored (step S1540; YES), it stops the elevating motor 205M (step S1541) and causes the left slider 205SL and the right slider 205SR to descend. Terminate. At the same time, the lowering of the lifting frame 205F is also ended (step S1541). At this time, the upper left stopper solenoid 205UL and the upper right stopper solenoid 205UR are set to restrict the upward movement of the left slider 205SL and the right slider 205SR. Subsequently, the falling time timer is cleared (step S1542). Thus, the initial operation A execution process ends.

  Next, the variable display start waiting process executed in step S170 of the effect control process (step S75) shown in FIG. 42 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 45 is a flowchart illustrating an example of a variable display start waiting process. In the variable display start waiting process shown in FIG. 45, the effect control CPU 120 first determines whether or not a first variation start command (or second variation start command) has been received (step S1000).

  When it is determined in step S1000 that the first variation start command (or the second variation start command) has not been received (step S1000; NO), the effect control CPU 120 determines whether or not the demonstration effect flag is on. Determination is made (step S1002). The demonstration effect flag is a flag indicating whether or not a customer waiting demonstration display is being performed. When the demonstration performance flag is on (for example, the value “1”), this indicates that the customer waiting demonstration display is being performed, and when the demonstration performance flag is off (for example, the value “0”). Indicates that the customer waiting demonstration is not displayed. The value of the demonstration effect flag may be stored in the effect control flag setting unit 191, for example.

  When it is determined in step S1002 that the demonstration effect flag is not on (step S1002; NO), the effect control CPU 120 determines whether or not a customer waiting demonstration designation command is received (step S1004). If it is determined in step S1004 that no customer waiting demonstration designation command has been received (step S1004; NO), the variable display start waiting process is terminated. On the other hand, if it is determined in step S1004 that a customer waiting demonstration designation command has been received (step S1004; YES), the demonstration performance flag is set to ON (step S1006), and the demonstration production (customer waiting demonstration display) is performed. Process data (effect control pattern) is selected (step S1008), and an effect control process timer is started (step S1010). Thereby, based on the reception of the customer waiting demonstration designation command, the demonstration production (customer waiting demonstration display) is started. Thereafter, the variable display start waiting process is terminated. In the present embodiment, the case where it is determined whether or not the customer waiting demonstration designation command is received in the variable display start waiting process in step S170 as a condition for starting the demonstration presentation has been described. The conditions are not limited to this. For example, the demonstration effect may be started when a predetermined time has elapsed since the variable display was stopped. Further, the demonstration effect may be started by detecting that the player is not in a gaming state by a sensor or the like.

  If it is determined in step S1002 that the demonstration effect flag is on (step S1002; YES), that is, if the demonstration effect has already been performed, the effect control CPU 120 performs a predetermined operation (for example, stick controller 31A). Or a predetermined operation using the push button 31B or the like) is determined (step S1012). When it is determined in step S1012 that there is no predetermined operation (step S1012; NO), the production control CPU 120 executes an initial operation execution process during the demonstration (step S1014). Details of the initial operation execution process during the demonstration in step S1014 will be described later with reference to FIG. After executing the initial operation execution process during demonstration in step S1014, the effect control CPU 120 ends the variable display start waiting process in step S170. That is, when a predetermined operation using the stick controller 31A or the like is not performed during the demonstration production, the demonstration production is continued.

  On the other hand, when it is determined in step S1012 that there is a predetermined operation (step S1012; YES), the effect control CPU 120 executes menu processing (step S1013). The menu process in step S1013 displays a menu on the main screen 5 to allow the player to perform an operation according to the menu contents. After executing the process of step S1013, the effect control CPU 120 ends the variable display start waiting process of step S170.

  When it is determined in step S1000 that the first variation start command (or second variation start command) has been received (step S1000; YES), the effect control CPU 120 determines whether or not the demonstration effect flag is on. Determination is made (step S1022). If it is determined in step S1022 that the demonstration effect flag is on (step S1022; YES), that is, if the demonstration effect has already been performed, the demonstration effect flag is reset to the off state (step S1024). Thereafter, the value of the effect process flag is updated to “1”, which is a value corresponding to the variable display start setting process (step S1026).

  After executing the process of step S1026, the CPU 120 for effect control turns off the initial operation executed flag (step S1027). The initial operation executed flag is a flag that is turned on when the initial operation is executed in the process of step S1014. When the variable display start waiting process of step S170 is ended, When the demonstration effect is executed, the initial operation of the special screen device 205 or the like can be executed again. After executing the process of step S1027, the effect control CPU 120 ends the variable display start waiting process of step S170.

  On the other hand, if it is determined in step S1022 that the demonstration effect flag is not on (step S1022; NO), the process of step S1024 is omitted (it skips), and the value of the effect process flag corresponds to the variable display start setting process. After the updated value is updated to “1” (step S1026), the variable display start waiting process is terminated. Above, description of the variable display start waiting process of step S170 using FIG. 45 is complete | finished.

  Next, the details of the initial operation execution process during demonstration in step S1014 in the variable display start waiting process (step S170) in FIG. 45 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 46 is a flowchart illustrating an example of the initial operation execution process during the demonstration. The special screen device initial operation process of step S151 described with reference to FIG. 43 is executed when an initialization designation command or a power failure recovery designation command is received from the main board 11, whereas the step illustrated in FIG. The initial operation execution process during the demonstration of S1014 is executed while the gaming machine 1 is in the demonstration. That is, in the present embodiment, the case where the initial operation is performed at the timing when the power is turned on and other timings is illustrated. Therefore, it is possible to check the malfunction of the special screen device 205 or the like other than when the power is turned on, and to return to the origin position even when the special screen device 205 or the like is not at the origin position.

  In the initial operation execution process during demonstration in step S1014 shown in FIG. 46, the effect control CPU 120 determines whether or not the initial operation execution flag is on (step S10141). During the demonstration production, the initial operation is performed only once. The initial operation executed flag is a flag indicating that the initial operation has been performed in the initial operation execution process during the demonstration in step S1014 when the gaming machine 1 starts the demonstration effect. Therefore, when it is determined that the initial operation executed flag is on (step S10141; YES), the effect control CPU 120 ends the initial operation execution process during demonstration in step S1014. As described above, the initial operation executed flag is turned off in the process of step S1027 in the variable display start waiting process (step S170) of FIG.

  On the other hand, when it is determined that the initial operation executed flag is not on (step S10141; NO), the effect control CPU 120 sets the initial operation executed flag on (step S10142). The initial operation execution completion flag may be recorded in, for example, the presentation control data holding area 190 described with reference to FIG. After executing the process of step S10142, the effect control CPU 120 performs a process for executing the initial operation B (step S10146). In the initial operation B, the special screen 205A is moved from the housed state to the set state without projecting an image on the special screen 205A, and immediately moved to the housed state without maintaining the set state. After executing the process of step S10146, the CPU 120 for effect control ends the initial operation execution process during the demonstration of step S1014.

  Next, the variable display effect processing executed in step S172 of the effect control process (step S75) shown in FIG. 42 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 47 is a flowchart illustrating an example of the variable display effect process. In the effect processing during variable display shown in FIG. 47, the effect control CPU 120 first determines whether or not the variable display time corresponding to the variation pattern has passed based on, for example, the effect control process timer value (step S541). ). As an example, in the process of step S541, the variable display time elapses when the production control process timer value is updated and an end code is read from the production control pattern corresponding to the updated production control process timer value. What is necessary is just to determine with having carried out.

  If the variable display time has not elapsed in step S541 (step S541; NO), it is determined whether or not it is the special screen appearance effect period for executing the special screen appearance effect (step S542). The special screen appearance effect period is set when the command corresponding to the change pattern “PA5-4” or “PB5-4” is transmitted from the main board 11 as the change pattern designation command, and the super reach β effect is executed. Is done. When it is determined in step S542 that it is the special screen appearance effect period (step S542; YES), special screen appearance effect processing is performed (step S543).

  FIG. 48 is a flowchart illustrating an example of the special screen appearance effect process. In the special screen appearance effect process shown in FIG. 48, the effect control CPU 120 first determines whether or not the provisional reach-losing effect has been executed (step S5431). The temporary reach loss effect is an effect that temporarily stops the reach lose combination as a decorative pattern in all the decorative symbol display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R in the process of the reach effect. In the reach effect, after the temporary reach loss effect is executed, the reach effect is continued by changing again or part of the decorative symbols in the decorative symbol display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R.

  When it is determined in step S5431 that the temporary reach loss effect has not been executed (step S5431; NO), the effect control CPU 120 executes the temporary reach loss effect (step S5432) and ends the special screen appearance effect process. When it is determined that the temporary reach lose effect has been executed (step S5431; YES), the effect control CPU 120 starts an effect of projecting an image on the special screen 205A following the temporary reach lose effect. Therefore, the effect control CPU 120 operates the lifting motor 205M to raise the left slider 205SL, the right slider 205SR, and further the lifting frame 205F (step S5433). As the special screen 205A rises, the special screen 205A appears on the front side of the main screen 5 and is gradually set.

  Then, it is determined whether or not the special screen 205A is raised (step S5434). Even if the control for operating the lifting motor 205M is performed, for some reason, for example, a malfunction occurs in the gear mechanism 205H that connects the lifting motor 205M and the left slider 205SL or the right slider 205SR, or the lifting and lowering of the left slider 205SL or the right slider 205SR. It is conceivable that the frame 205F may come off. Here, the effect control CPU 120 serves as a determination unit that determines whether or not to continue the special screen appearance effect. Thus, when the special screen 205A does not operate normally, the special screen reach effect described later is not executed.

  When it is determined that the special screen 205A has not risen (step S5434; NO), the effect control CPU 120 executes a special screen non-appearance effect projected on the main screen 5 (step S5435). In the special screen non-appearance effect, the image projected on the special screen 205A is projected on the main screen 5 without executing the reach effect of displaying the image on the special screen 205A. After executing the special screen non-appearance effect, the special screen appearance effect process ends.

  If it is determined that the special screen 205A is raised (step S5434; YES), the effect control CPU 120 projects a predetermined image (step S5436). The predetermined image may be an image projected in step S1529, or may be an image different from this image. Further, the effect control CPU 120 causes the projector 32 to project a predetermined image, and changes the focus of the projected image from the main screen 5 to the special screen 205A (step S5437), and adjusts the focus according to the special screen 205A. . The effect control CPU 120 operates the projector moving device 32A to retract the projector 32 to the second normal position in order to change the focus of the projected image from the main screen 5 to the special screen 205A.

  Subsequently, the effect control CPU 120 determines whether or not the special screen 205A has reached the uppermost level (step S5438). As a result, when the CPU 120 for effect control determines that the special screen 205A has not reached the top level (step S5438; NO), the special screen appearance effect process is terminated as it is, and the special screen 205A is at the top level. The operation of the elevating motor 205M, in other words, the elevating frame 205F continues to rise until it reaches.

  When the effect control CPU 120 determines that the special screen 205A has reached the top (step S5438; YES), the lift motor 205M is stopped (step S5439) and the lift frame 205F is stopped. At this time, the special screen 205A is set. Subsequently, the effect control CPU 120 determines whether or not the special screen reach effect has been executed (step S5440). The special screen reach effect is an effect in which the reach effect following the temporary reach loss effect is displayed and executed on the special screen 205A in the set state.

  When it is determined that the special screen reach effect has not been executed (step S5440; NO), the effect control CPU 120 displays the special screen reach effect on the special screen 205A and executes the special screen reach effect (step S5441). When executing the special screen reach effect, the image projected from the projector 32 is focused on the special screen 205A. Then, the special screen appearance effect process ends. When the effect control CPU 120 determines that the special screen reach effect has been executed (step S5440; YES), the elevating motor 205M is operated to lower the elevating frame F (step S5442).

  The special screen 205A is gradually stored on the front side of the main screen 5 as the elevating frame 205F is lowered. At this time, the effect control CPU 120 causes the projector 32 to project a predetermined image (step S5443). The predetermined image may be an image projected in step S5436, or may be an image different from this image. The effect control CPU 120 causes the projector 32 to project a predetermined image, changes the focus of the projected image from the special screen 205A to the main screen 5 (step S5444), and adjusts the focus according to the main screen 5. The effect control CPU 120 operates the projector moving device 32A to advance the projector 32 to the first normal position in order to change the focus of the projected image from the special screen 205A to the main screen 5.

  Subsequently, the effect control CPU 120 determines whether or not the special screen 205A is stored based on the origin position signals transmitted from the left origin sensor 205YL and the right origin sensor 205YR (step S5445). As a result, when the effect control CPU 120 determines that the special screen 205A is not stored (step S5445; NO), the special screen appearance effect process is terminated. Therefore, the lowering of the left slider 205SL and the right slider 205SR is continued until the special screen 205A is stored.

  If the effect control CPU 120 determines that the special screen 205A is stored (step S5445; YES), it stops the elevating motor 205M to end the lowering of the left slider 205SL and the right slider 205SR, and elevates The lowering of the frame 205F is also terminated. Further, the lower left stopper solenoid 205DL and the lower right stopper solenoid 205DR are set to restrict the upward movement of the left slider 205SL and the right slider 205SR. Then, it is determined whether or not the winning result display effect has been executed (step S5446). The winning result display effect is an effect that is displayed on the main screen 5 after the special screen 205A is in the stored state, and is an effect in which a big hit combination or a lost combination is displayed in the decorative symbol display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R. .

  When it is determined that the winning result display effect has not been executed (step S5446; NO), the effect control CPU 120 executes the winning result display effect by displaying it on the main screen 5 (step S5447), and the special screen appearance effect. The process ends. If it is determined that the winning result display effect has been executed (step S5446; YES), the special screen appearance effect process is terminated.

  As described above, the effect control CPU 120 functions as a determination unit in step S5434. In step S5434, if it is determined that the special screen 205A is raised, a special screen reach effect is executed (step S5441). If it is determined that the special screen 205A is not raised, the special screen is displayed. A non-appearance effect is executed (step S5435).

  Returning to the variable display effect shown in FIG. 47, the effect control CPU 120 determines that it is not the special screen appearance effect period after step S543 or in step S542 (step S542; NO), for example, corresponding to the variation pattern. Based on the setting in the special-figure variation effect control pattern, etc., other effect operation control including the decorative symbol variable display operation is performed (step S548), and the variable display effect processing ends.

  In addition, when the variable display time has elapsed in step S541 (step S541; YES), the effect control CPU 120 determines whether or not a symbol determination command transmitted from the main board 11 has been received (step S549). ). At this time, if the symbol confirmation command is not received (step S549; NO), the variable display effect processing is terminated and stands by. If the predetermined time has passed without receiving the symbol confirmation command after the variable display time has elapsed, predetermined error processing is executed in response to the failure to receive the symbol confirmation command normally. You may make it do.

  If a symbol confirmation command is received in step S549 (step S549; YES), for example, in a variable display of decorative symbols such as transmitting a predetermined display control command to the VDP or the like of the display control unit 123, for example. Control for deriving and displaying the final stop symbol as a display result is performed (step S550). Further, a predetermined time is set as a waiting time for specifying the hit start designation command (step S551). Then, the value of the effect process flag is updated to “3” which is a value corresponding to the waiting process per special figure (step S552), and the effect process during variable display is ended.

  Next, the flow of the special screen appearance effect will be described with reference to FIGS. The special screen 205A does not appear until the special screen appearance effect is executed, as shown by the solid line in FIG. An image is displayed. Various effects are executed by this image. Further, the image projected from the projector 32 is focused according to the main screen 5. For this reason, a focused image is displayed on the main screen 5. If the special screen 205A appears on the front side of the main screen 5 as it is, an image out of focus is displayed on the special screen 205A.

  Now, a special screen appearance effect will be described. In the special screen appearance effect, after the temporary reach loss effect is executed, the special screen 205A appears and the special screen reach effect is executed. FIG. 49 is an explanatory diagram showing a specific example of the special screen appearance effect, and FIG. 50 is a diagram showing a specific example following FIG.

  When the special screen appearance effect is executed, first, as shown in FIG. 49A, the temporary reach loss effect is executed as the reach effect on the main screen 5. In the temporary reach lose effect, an effect in which the sub characters (hereinafter also referred to as “sub characters SC1 and SC2”) displayed in the sub character images SC1 and SC2 shown in FIG. The At this time, in the center of the main screen 5, a main character (hereinafter also referred to as “main character MC”) displayed in the main character image MC shown in FIG. When shifting to the gaming state, the main character MC is displayed.

  Further, two decorative symbols are displayed as reach variation symbols in the upper left and right positions of the main screen 5, and the decorative symbols are variably displayed at a position between them. These decorative symbols are displayed with their display positions varied from the decorative symbol display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R in the course of the reach production. The decorative symbols displayed on the left and right are the common “7” symbols. In the special screen appearance effect, as a decorative symbol displayed at the center, a decorative symbol other than the “7” symbol displayed on the left and right, for example, “8” is temporarily stopped and then displayed again, and the special screen reach effect is displayed. Migrate to In this way, reach production is continued.

  When the temporary reach lose effect is completed, as shown in FIG. 49B, the lifting frame 205F provided above the special screen 205A is raised on the front side of the main screen 5, and the special screen 205A is on the front side of the main screen 5. Appear gradually. While the elevating frame 205F is raised and the special screen 205A is set, the effect control CPU 120 changes the focus of the image projected from the projector 32 from the focus corresponding to the main screen 5 to the focus corresponding to the special screen 205A. change.

  Here, while the special screen 205A is set, a part of the image projected from the projector 32 is displayed on the main screen 5, and the other part is displayed on the special screen 205A. Further, the distance from the projector 32 to the main screen 5 is different from the distance from the special screen 205A. For this reason, when the focus of the image projected from the projector 32 is a focus corresponding to the main screen 5, the image projected on the special screen 205A is an image that is not in focus. When the image projected from the projector 32 is focused according to the special screen 205A, the image projected on the main screen 5 is an out-of-focus image.

  Therefore, the image projected from the projector 32 when the special screen 205A is set is displayed to the player regardless of whether the focus is according to the main screen 5 or the focus according to the special screen 205A. On the other hand, the image may give a sense of incongruity. Furthermore, when the effect control CPU 120 changes the focus of the image projected from the projector 32 from the focus corresponding to the main screen 5 to the focus corresponding to the special screen 205A, the projector 32 and the screen on which the image is displayed. Since the distance from the main screen 5 and the special screen 205A changes, the image projected from the projector 32 is an image that may give a greater sense of discomfort to the player, for example, a blurred image.

  In this regard, when the special screen 205A is set, the effect control CPU 120 projects a predetermined image with no white pattern as an image projected from the projector 32, as shown in FIG. Since the predetermined image does not include an image that allows the player to recognize a predetermined shape such as a person, a character, or a design, even if there is no focus, the player feels less uncomfortable. Further, even if the focus is changed while the predetermined image is displayed, the uncomfortable feeling given to the player can be reduced. In this way, when the special screen 205A is set and the screen on which the image is displayed is switched from the main screen 5 to the special screen 205A, the focus of the image projected from the projector 32 is the focus corresponding to the main screen 5. When the focus is changed according to the special screen 205A, a sense of discomfort given to the player can be reduced.

  Thus, as shown in FIG. 50A, when the elevating frame 205F is raised and the special screen 205A appears and enters the set state, a predetermined image is continuously projected from the projector 32. After the special screen 205A is set, a special screen reach effect is executed. In the special screen reach effect, as shown in FIG. 50B, the main character MC and the lost characters MH1 to MH3 are displayed on the special screen 205A. One character is selected from the main character MC and the lost characters MH1 to MH3. When shifting to the big hit gaming state, the main character MC is selected, and when the normal state is maintained, any of the lost characters MH1 to MH3 is selected. In the symbol display areas 205L and 205R above the special screen 205A, “7” symbols are displayed on the left and right. The right and left “7” symbols are displayed to make it easier for the player to understand that the player is in the reach state.

  When the special screen reach effect is executed and, for example, the main character MC is selected, as shown in FIG. 51 (A), the special screen 205A has a big hit combination of “7”, “7” and “7” together with the main character MC. Is stopped. When any of the loss characters MH1 to MH3 shown in FIG. 50B is selected, the loss combination (reach loss combination) is stopped and displayed instead of the big hit combination of “7”, “7”, and “7”. . Thus, the special screen reach production ends.

  When the special screen reach effect ends, the special screen 205A descends. At this time, the projector 32 projects a predetermined image in the same manner as when the special screen 205A is raised. When the special screen 205A is lowered and the screen on which the image is displayed is switched from the special screen 205A to the main screen 5, the focus of the image projected from the projector 32 is changed from the focus corresponding to the special screen 205A to the main screen 5. When changing to a different focus, it is possible to reduce the uncomfortable feeling given to the player.

  After the lowering of the special screen 205A is completed and the special screen 205A is stored, as shown in FIG. 51 (B), the big hit combination is displayed in the decorative symbol display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R of the main screen 5. . In addition, in the decorative symbol display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R shown in FIG. 51 (A), when the lost combination (reach and lost combination) is stopped and displayed, the special screen 205A is lowered and stored, and then the main screen is displayed. In the decorative pattern display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R, the lost combination (reach lost combination) is displayed. In this way, the special screen appearance effect ends.

  In this way, the pachinko gaming machine 1 described above reduces the uncomfortable feeling when adjusting the focus according to each screen when changing the screen that focuses the image projected from the projector 32 from the main screen 5 to the special screen 205A. A predetermined image for projecting is projected from the projector 32. For this reason, even if the screen on which the image is projected from the projector 32 is changed and the distance between the projector 32 and the screen is changed, the uncomfortable feeling given to the player can be reduced.

  Further, the special screen 205 </ b> A can appear ahead of the main screen 5 as viewed from the irradiation side of the light emitted from the projector 32. Thus, since the special screen 205A appears in front of the main screen 5, the player can be surprised.

  The special screen appearance effect in which the special screen 205A appears is executed in the specific super reach β effect when the specific super reach β variation pattern is determined. When the specific super reach β production is executed, the big hit expectation is increased. In this way, the special screen appearance effect is executed in the specific super reach β effect with a high degree of expectation of the big hit, so that the interest of the game can be improved.

  In addition, it is a condition that the special screen 205A operates normally when executing the special screen appearance effect. Therefore, in the special screen appearance effect, when the special screen 205A rises, the special screen reach effect is executed, and when the special screen 205A does not rise, the special screen non-appearance effect is executed. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the image projected on the main screen 5 from being defective by performing the focusing even though the special screen 205A is not operating normally.

  Further, in the pachinko gaming machine 1 described above, normal operation confirmation processing (processing for executing a long initial operation) for confirming the normal operation of the special screen 205A when the power is turned on can be executed. At this time, during the execution of the normal operation confirmation process, an image with a focus according to the special screen 205A is projected based on the normal operation of the special screen 205A. For this reason, it can be confirmed that the focus adjustment control is operating normally.

  Further, in the above embodiment, in the special screen appearance effect, the lifting frame 205F provided in the special screen device 205 performs only one reciprocating up-and-down movement, and the special screen 205A is set once. 205F may move up and down two or more times. Also. In the special screen appearance effect, when the lifting frame 205F is disposed at the highest position and the special screen 205A is in the set state, and when the lifting frame 205F is disposed at the lowest position and the special screen 205A is in the storage state, The elevating frame 205F stops or changes the vertical movement direction. On the other hand, even when the raising / lowering frame 205F is between the highest position and the lowest position, the stop raising / lowering frame can be stopped or the vertical movement direction can be changed. In this case, the special screen 205A can appear at a position in front of the main screen 5 even in a state other than the set state or the stored state. The special screen 205A has a planar image display area, but a three-dimensional image display area like the main screen 5 may be formed. Further, the three-dimensional image display area may move relative to the image display area on the plane within the special screen.

  In the above embodiment, the special screen 205A appears from below as the elevating frame 205F rises, but may appear from other directions. For example, the special screen may appear from above by lowering the descending frame, or the special screen may appear from the left and right sides. Further, a special screen fragment may appear from a plurality of directions including these or other directions, and may be combined in front of the main screen so that the special screen is swollen. Alternatively, the special screen may appear when the main screen 5 is retracted in any of the upper, lower, left and right directions. At this time, the main screen may be divided into a plurality of parts so that the special screen appears in different directions or in the same direction.

  In the pachinko gaming machine 1 described above, a predetermined image is displayed while the elevating frame 205F is raised, and a predetermined image is also displayed when the elevating frame 205F is lowered. For this reason, even if the distance to the projection target screen is changed during projection, it is possible to reduce the uncomfortable feeling given to the player. Note that the predetermined image may be displayed when the lifting frame 205F is rising or falling. Further, the predetermined image may or may not be displayed according to a predetermined condition even when the elevating frame 205F is being raised or lowered.

  Further, in the pachinko gaming machine 1 described above, the color correction filter 28F is provided in the reflection mirror 28, and image display caused by the projection state from the projector 32 onto the image display area 5X formed on the main screen 5 (or the special screen 205A). The deviation of the color tone of the projected image in the region 5X is adjusted. For this reason, the image projected from the projector 32 can be suitably expressed in the image display area 5X.

  In addition, the contrast of the lower part of the image displayed in the image display area 5X is high (dark). The distance below the image display area 5X is longer than the distance from the projector 32 than above the image display area 5X. For this reason, the image displayed in the image display area 5X has a greater impression of being blurred than the image displayed above the image display area 5X. Therefore, the lower contrast of the image displayed in the image display area 5X is high (dark), so that the blur of the image displayed in the image display area 5X is softened. As a result, image representation can be suitably performed. Note that when adjusting the color tone of the image projected from the projector 32, the contrast may be adjusted or another adjustment method may be used.

  A color correction filter 28F is arranged between the projector 32 and the image display area 5X. For this reason, image representation can be suitably performed. In the pachinko gaming machine 1 described above, the color correction filter 28F is provided on the surface of the reflection mirror 28. If the image (light) emitted from the projector 32 passes, the color correction filter 28F is reflected. You may provide in positions other than the surface of the mirror 28. FIG. For example, it may be provided outside the lens in the projector 32 or may be provided on the surface of the main screen 5. Alternatively, it may be provided on the surface of the special screen 205A. In other words, the color correction filter 28F may be disposed between the projector 32 and the reflection mirror 28, or may be disposed between the reflection mirror 28 and the screen (the main screen 5 and the special screen 205A). Good.

  By providing the color correction filter 28F on the surface of the main screen 5 or the surface of the special screen 205A, the contrast of the image displayed on either the main screen 5 or the special screen 205A can be easily enhanced. The color correction filter 28F can correct the color tone, but may be one that can adjust other elements of the three attributes of color, such as hue. Further, instead of the color correction filter 28F, characteristics other than the three color attributes in the image projected from the projector 32 may be adjusted, or may be adjusted by appropriately combining the three color attributes.

  In addition, when adjusting the color tone bias, the color tone contrast of the image projected from the projector 32 may be adjusted instead of providing the color correction filter 28F. The contrast of the color tone of the image itself may be adjusted by the projector 32. If the adjustment cannot be made by the adjustment function of the projector 32, the adjustment by the adjustment function of the projector 32 is possible. For example, the color tone may be adjusted by video control such as adjusting the original image data of the image projected from the projector 32 in order to obtain a high level of tracking.

Second Embodiment
Next, a pachinko gaming machine according to the second embodiment will be described. FIG. 52 is a front view of a pachinko gaming machine according to the second embodiment. In addition, in the description of the pachinko gaming machine 1A according to the present embodiment, and in the description of still other embodiments and modifications, the same reference numerals are given to the components common to the pachinko gaming machine 1 described above, and the detailed description thereof May be omitted.
As shown in FIG. 52, the pachinko gaming machine 1A according to the present embodiment is located on the side of the main screen 5 and at a substantially central position on the right side height direction of the game area in the game board 2. Is provided. The sub image display device 70 is configured by a liquid crystal display device, for example. Unlike the main screen 5, the sub-image display device 70 has an image display area for displaying an image that is entirely flat.

  Note that the installation location of the sub image display device 70 is not limited to the approximate center position in the right-side height direction of the game area on the game board 2, and may be another position. For example, the sub image display device 70 may be installed at an arbitrary position in the pachinko gaming machine 1 such as outside the gaming area or at the front upper part, the front lower part, and the front side of the gaming machine frame 3. Further, although the sub image display device 70 is fixedly attached, it may be movable back and forth, up, down, left and right by a driving mechanism (not shown). Further, it may be arranged at a position overlapping the surface of the main screen 5. The sub image display device may be another image display device, for example, a display device including a projector and a screen.

  In the pachinko gaming machine 1A according to the present embodiment, a part of the specific information image is displayed on the sub-image display device 70. Specifically, a hold display, a hold number display, and a current display image are displayed. However, other specific information images on the sub-image display device 70, for example, a volume adjustment display image for guiding decoration design and volume adjustment, a light amount adjustment display image for guiding light amount adjustment, and a small display in which a decoration design is displayed in a small size The image may be displayed.

  In the pachinko gaming machine 1A according to the present embodiment having the above-described configuration, the non-projection regions 5NL and 5NR (see FIG. 3) are irradiated from the sub LED 33, as in the pachinko gaming machine 1 according to the first embodiment. Irradiation light is reflected. In this way, by irradiating the non-projection areas 5NL and 5NR with the irradiation light of the sub LED 33, although there is an area where the projector 32 cannot project an image, it is possible to suitably perform an effect.

  Further, the pachinko gaming machine 1A according to the present embodiment includes a sub image display device 70 in which a flat display area is formed. For this reason, it is possible to increase the area of the flat display area in which the player can easily recognize the image information. Therefore, many specific information images can be displayed in a state that the player can easily recognize. In addition, since the sub-image display device 70 is movable, it is possible to display a specific image such as a specific information image or a complete display request image in an easy-to-see manner and to perform various effects.

<Third Embodiment>
Next, a third embodiment of the present invention will be described. FIG. 53 is a front view of a pachinko gaming machine according to the third embodiment. As shown in FIG. 53, in the pachinko gaming machine 1B according to this embodiment, the sub-LEDs 33 are arranged on the back side of the non-projection areas 5NL and 5NR (see FIG. 3) on the main screen 5, and the non-projection on the main screen 5 is performed. The regions 5NL and 5NR are made of a light transmissive material.

  In the pachinko gaming machine 1B according to the present embodiment having the above-described configuration, the sub LED 33 is provided on the back side of the non-projection areas 5NL and 5NR, and the light of the sub LED 33 transmitted through the non-projection areas 5NL and 5NR is projected. Yes. As described above, by projecting the light of the sub LED 33 in the non-projection areas 5NL and 5NR, it is possible to suitably perform the performance although there is an area where the projector 32 cannot project an image.

  In the above example, the non-projection regions 5NL and 5NR are made of a light transmissive material. However, in order to form the main screen 5 integrally including the image display region 5X and the non-projection regions 5NL and 5NR, The image display area 5X on the main screen 5 is also made of a light transmissive material. In this case, a material having high light reflectivity may be disposed on the back side of the image display region 5X. By disposing a highly light-reflective material on the back side of the image display region 5X, the image display region 5X itself is light-transmitting, but the light-reflective material disposed on the back side of the image display region 5X Since the projection light LP projected from the projector 32 is reflected, the image projected from the projector 32 can be suitably displayed.

  Further, when the sub-LEDs 33 on the back side of the non-projection areas 5NL and 5NR are arranged and the light is projected, the non-projection areas 5NL and 5NR are less conspicuous than the image display area 5X, but the main screen 5 as a whole is trapezoidal. Instead, it may be devised to give the player the impression of a rectangle. Specifically, a shielding material may be disposed so as to surround the side of the sub LED 33, and leakage of light irradiated from the sub LED 33 from the non-projection areas 5NL and 5NR to the image display area 5X may be suppressed. . By suppressing leakage of light emitted from the sub-LED 33 from the non-projection areas 5NL and 5NR to the image display area 5X, the non-projection areas 5NL and 5NR are brightened and the non-projection areas 5NL and 5NR become the image display area 5X. The video from the projector 32 projected on the main screen 5 is clearly displayed while giving the player the impression that the main screen 5 is rectangular rather than trapezoidal so that it is less noticeable. be able to. However, when the light emitted from the sub LED 33 is concentrated and the non-projection areas 5NL and 5NR become too bright, the amount of light emitted from the sub LED 33 may be reduced. Further, instead of arranging the shielding material so as to surround the side of the sub-LED 33, the sub-LED 33 is accommodated in a case having an opening surface on one side, and the opening surface is covered with the non-projection regions 5NL and 5NR. May be. In this case as well, the non-projection areas 5NL and 5NR are brightened so that the non-projection areas 5NL and 5NR are less conspicuous than the image display area 5X. The image from the projector 32 projected on the main screen 5 can be clearly displayed while giving an impression to the player.

  Alternatively, the light in the non-projection areas 5NL and 5NR may be made inconspicuous. Specifically, the thickness of the non-projection areas 5NL and 5NR in the main screen 5 may be thicker than the thickness of the image display area 5X. Or you may make it the light quantity which sub LED33 emits become small. In particular, when the amount of projection light projected from the projector 32 is small, the amount of light emitted by the sub LED 33 may be small.

<Fourth embodiment>
Next, a pachinko gaming machine according to the fourth embodiment will be described. 54 is a front view of a pachinko gaming machine according to the fourth embodiment, FIG. 55 is a side sectional view of FIG. 54, and FIG. 56 is a perspective view of a door frame. As shown in FIGS. 54 and 55, in the pachinko gaming machine 1C according to the present embodiment, an upward projecting portion 40A protruding forward is formed above the gaming machine frame 3. Further, a door frame 50 shown in FIG. 56 different from the door frame 3B shown in FIG. 1 is attached to the game frame 3A. Further, in the pachinko gaming machine 1C of the present embodiment, a right strike guide path 4E is formed on the upper surface 4D of the center frame 4C to guide the game ball when hit right.

  In the present embodiment, the logo accessory 26 and the reflection mirror 28 shown in FIG. 1 are not provided. Further, the projector 32 is not disposed on the back side of the game board 2 and is attached to the front end position of the upwardly projecting portion 40A as shown in FIG. An opening 40C through which the projection light LP projected from the projector 32 can pass is formed on the lower surface of the upward projecting portion 40A.

  The upward projecting portion 40A is formed integrally with the game frame 3A and projects forward from the door frame 50. Furthermore, the rotating shaft member 40B provided in the game frame 3A reaches the upward projecting portion 40A. The door frame 50 is formed separately from the upwardly projecting portion 40A, and is rotatable around the rotation shaft member 40B with respect to the game frame 3A and the upwardly projecting portion 40A.

  As shown in FIG. 56, the door frame 50 includes a frame body 51 having a vertically long rectangular shape. The frame 51 is arranged so that the longitudinal direction is along the vertical direction. A top plate 52 is attached to the upper side of the frame 51. At the center position of the top plate 52, a top plate opening 52A through which the projection light LP projected from the projector 32 can pass is formed.

  An inclined frame 53 is attached to the front end side of the top plate 52 and the lower end side of the frame body 51. The frame 51 and the inclined frame 53 are integrated at the lower end side. An inner transparent plate 54 is attached to the frame 51, and an outer transparent plate 55 is attached to the inclined frame 53. The inner transparent plate 54 and the outer transparent plate 55 are both transparent, and the player located in front of the pachinko gaming machine 1C can visually recognize the game board 2 through the inner transparent plate 54 and the outer transparent plate 55. . These inner transparent plate 54 and outer transparent plate 55 are provided in place of the glass plates in the first embodiment.

  A central opening 54 </ b> A is formed in the upper half position of the inner transparent plate 54. The central opening 54A has a rectangular shape whose upper portion is slightly larger than the surface shape of the main screen 5, and the projection light LP projected from the projector 32 can pass therethrough. The shape of the central opening 54A is not limited to this shape, and may be another shape such as a circle or an ellipse.

  The inner transparent plate 54 is disposed along the surface of the game board 2, and the distance from the surface of the game board 2 is longer than the diameter of the game ball and shorter than twice the diameter of the game ball. By setting the distance between the inner transparent plate 54 and the game board 2 within this range, the inner transparent plate 54 prevents the game ball from jumping out of the game area. Further, the position corresponding to the central opening 54A of the inner transparent plate 54 in the game board 2 is a structure in which the main screen 5 is arranged and entry of game balls is suppressed. This structure prevents the game ball from jumping out from the central opening 54A in the inner transparent plate 54.

  The outer transparent plate 55 is attached so as to cover the entire front surface of the inner transparent plate 54. For this reason, the projector 32 is placed between the inner transparent plate 54 and the outer transparent plate 55. By providing the outer transparent plate 55, it is possible to prevent the player from touching the inner transparent plate 54, the game board 2, or the projector 32 provided on the upward projecting portion 40A. In addition, a situation in which an image is blocked by a player or the like interposing a foreign object such as a hand between the projector 32 and the main screen 5 is suppressed.

  The inner transparent plate 54 is made of, for example, acrylic, and the outer transparent plate 55 is made of, for example, glass. Since the inner transparent plate 54 is made of acrylic, processing is easy, and the central opening 54A can be easily formed. Moreover, durability can be made high because the outer side transparent plate 55 is glass. However, the inner transparent plate 54 may be made of glass, and the outer transparent plate 55 may be made of acrylic. Further, the inner transparent plate 54 and the outer transparent plate 55 may be formed of other materials having transparency.

  Further, as shown in FIGS. 54 and 55, a game ball discharge hole 54B is formed at a central portion of the inner transparent plate 54 at a lower position. The game ball discharge hole 54 </ b> B communicates with the game machine frame 3 on the back side, and the game ball that has entered between the inner transparent plate 54 and the outer transparent plate 55 can be discharged toward the game machine frame 3. is there. The frame 51 to which the inner transparent plate 54 is attached and the inclined frame 53 to which the outer transparent plate 55 is attached are removable. For this reason, the inner transparent plate 54 and the outer transparent plate 55 can be separated by removing the frame 51 and the inclined frame 53. The game ball discharge hole 54B is disposed on the back side of the upper dish unit. With this upper plate unit, the game ball discharge hole 54B is hidden so that the game ball discharge hole 54B cannot be seen from the front outside of the pachinko gaming machine 1C. The game ball discharge hole may be disposed above the upper plate unit and may be formed at a height position where the player can visually recognize the game ball discharge hole. In this case, the game ball discharged from the game ball discharge hole 54B may be discharged to the gaming machine frame 3 or may be discharged to the game area. Further, instead of the game ball discharge hole 54B, it may be discharged to, for example, an upper plate or lower plate (not shown) on the front side of the door frame 50. In addition, in a gaming machine that is not provided with an upper plate unit, the game ball discharge hole is a decorative plate for hiding the back side, an upper plate or a lower plate, or a handle that is operated by a player when launching a game ball. You may form in the position concealed by the accessory etc. and the plate in which these accessories are provided.

  As shown in FIG. 55, the projector 32 is disposed at a position where the optical path of the image projected from the projector 32 passes below the right-handed guiding path 4E.

  In the pachinko gaming machine 1C according to the present embodiment having the above-described configuration, similarly to the pachinko gaming machine 1 according to the first embodiment, the non-projection areas 5NL and 5NR (see FIG. 3) are irradiated from the sub LED 33. Irradiation light is reflected. In this way, by irradiating the non-projection areas 5NL and 5NR with the irradiation light of the sub LED 33, although there is an area where the projector 32 cannot project an image, it is possible to suitably perform an effect.

  When the right-handed guiding path 4E is formed, the optical path of the image projected from the projector 32 and the right-handed guiding path 4E are overlapped. In this regard, since the projector 32 is arranged at a position where the optical path of the image projected from the projector 32 passes below the right-handed guiding path 4E, the image projected from the projector 32 is right-handed guiding path 4E. It can be made not to overlap.

  In the pachinko gaming machine 1 </ b> C according to the present embodiment, the projector 32 is arranged in such a direction that the projected projection light LP directly reaches the main screen 5. For this reason, it is not necessary to provide a reflection mirror for reflecting the projection light LP projected from the projector 32, which can contribute to a reduction in the number of components. Further, in the pachinko gaming machine 1C, the projector 32 is provided in the upward projecting portion 40A protruding forward, above the gaming frame 3A. For this reason, the distance between the projector 32 and the main screen 5 can be ensured, and the image projected on the main screen 5 can be made sufficiently large.

  In disposing the projector 32, in the present embodiment, the upper overhanging portion 40A protruding forward is provided above the gaming machine frame 3. On the other hand, a projecting portion protruding forward may be formed on the side or lower side of the game frame 3A, and the projector 32 may be disposed on the projecting portion.

  Further, the projector 32 is provided in an upward projecting portion 40A provided in the gaming machine frame 3, and the main screen 5 is provided in the gaming machine frame 3 to which the gaming machine frame 3 is fixed. For this reason, for example, even if the door frame 50 is opened or the pachinko gaming machine 1C is transported, the relative positional relationship between the projector 32 and the main screen 5 can be kept unchanged. Therefore, the image projected from the projector 32 can be accurately projected on the main screen 5. In the present embodiment, the projector 32 is provided in the upward projecting portion 40A attached to the gaming machine frame 3. For example, the upper projecting portion is provided in the door frame 50, and the projector is provided in the upper projecting portion. 32 may be provided.

  In addition, the upper projecting portion 40A, the top plate 52, and the inner transparent plate 54 have an opening 40C, a top plate opening 52A, and a central opening 54A through which the projection light LP projected from the projector 32 can pass. Are formed respectively. For this reason, the image projected from the projector 32 can be reliably displayed on the main screen 5. The opening 40C, the top plate opening 52A, and the central opening 54A are all formed as spaces, but a transparent plate or the like may be provided in these openings. By providing a transparent plate, it is possible to prevent foreign matters from entering through the opening and dropping off of members. Moreover, you may provide a lens in these opening parts. By providing a lens in the opening, the size of the image projected from the projector 32 can be adjusted.

  In the above-described embodiment, the projector 32 is disposed behind the main screen 5, and the image projected from the projector 32 is reflected by the reflection mirror 28 and projected onto the main screen 5. On the other hand, the projector 32 may be disposed in front of the main screen 5 so that the image projected by the projector 32 is directly projected on the main screen 5. In this case, for example, the projector 32 may be arranged at an appropriate position such as the inside of the logo accessory 26.

<Fifth Embodiment>
Next, a gaming machine according to the fifth embodiment of the present invention will be described. FIG. 57 is a front view of a pachinko gaming machine according to the fifth embodiment, and FIG. 58 is a side sectional view thereof. As shown in FIGS. 57 and 58, in the pachinko gaming machine 1D according to the present embodiment, the projector 32 is provided inside the gaming machine frame 3 instead of the upward projecting portion 40A. In addition, a logo accessory 26 is fixed to the tip of the upwardly projecting portion 40A, and a reflection mirror 28 is provided inside the logo accessory 26.

  As shown in FIG. 58, the logo accessory 26 includes a decorative material 26A and an accessory casing 26B. The decorative material 26A is made of a light transmissive material, and the accessory casing 26B is made of a light non-transmissive material. In addition, as shown in FIG. 57, the decoration material 26A has characters “FEVER” as viewed from the front. The accessory casing 26B has a box shape with the front side opened, and a decorative material 26A is fitted into the opened portion. An opening through which the projection light LP projected from the projector 32 passes is formed at a substantially central position on the back surface of the accessory housing 26B. An opening through which the projection light (image) LP reflected by the reflection mirror 28 passes is formed. In addition, the reflection mirror 28 is fixed inside the logo accessory 26 inside the accessory case 26B. The inner side of the accessory housing 26B and the back side of the reflection mirror 28 are white, and the reflectance is high. In addition, since the reflection mirror 28 faces the back of the pachinko gaming machine 1D, the back surface of the reflection mirror 28 faces the front of the pachinko gaming machine 1D.

  The projector 32 is disposed above the main screen 5 and in a direction at which the projected projection light LP reaches the reflection mirror 28 at the position of the upper end portion of the gaming machine frame 3. Further, the reflection mirror 28 is disposed in a direction in which the projection light projected by the projector 32 is directed toward the main screen 5. The projector 32 is provided in the gaming frame 3A, and the reflection mirror 28 is provided in the logo accessory 26 fixed to the upward projecting portion 40A in the gaming machine frame 3. Therefore, even if the pachinko gaming machine 1D is moved or the door frame 50 is opened and closed, the relative positional relationship between the projector 32 and the reflecting mirror 28, and further, the relative relationship between the projector 32 and the main screen 5 is increased. The positional relationship is maintained unchanged. Therefore, even if the pachinko gaming machine 1D is moved or the door frame 50 is opened and closed, an image can be projected from the projector 32 at an appropriate position on the main screen 5. Further, since the reflection mirror 28 is provided on the back side of the logo accessory 26, the reflection mirror 28 can be provided without impairing the design.

  In the pachinko gaming machine 1D according to the present embodiment having the above-described configuration, similarly to the pachinko gaming machine 1 according to the first embodiment, the non-projection regions 5NL and 5NR (see FIG. 3) are irradiated from the sub LED 33. Irradiation light is reflected. In this way, by irradiating the non-projection areas 5NL and 5NR with the irradiation light of the sub LED 33, although there is an area where the projector 32 cannot project an image, it is possible to suitably perform an effect.

  Further, in the pachinko gaming machine 1D according to the present embodiment, similarly to the pachinko gaming machine 1C according to the fourth embodiment, when the door frame 50 is in the open state, the projection of the image from the projector 32 is stopped. When the door frame 50 is in an open state, there is a concern that the projection light projected from the projector 32 is reflected on some member of the pachinko gaming machine 1D, for example, the inner transparent plate 54 and projected onto the player. In this regard, in the pachinko gaming machine 1D according to the present embodiment, when the door frame 50 is in the open state, the projection of light from the projector 32 to the player is suppressed by stopping the projection of the image from the projector 32. Can do.

  In the present embodiment, the logo accessory 26 having the reflection mirror 28 provided on the inside and the reflection mirror 28 are attached to the distal end portion of the upward projecting portion 40A, but may be attached to other positions. For example, the logo accessory 26 may be provided immediately above the main screen 5 in the center frame 4C. In this case, the height position of the projector 32 may be substantially the same as the height position of the logo accessory 26. By making the height position of the projector 32 substantially the same as the height position of the logo accessory 26, the projection light of the projector 32 can be easily projected onto the main screen 5. However, the height position of the projector 32 may be a position other than the position substantially the same as the height position of the logo accessory 26.

  Further, the reflection mirror 28 may be provided on the door frame 50. When the reflection mirror 28 is provided on the door frame 50, the reflection mirror 28 may be provided directly on the inner transparent plate 54 or the outer transparent plate 55 in the door frame 50, or a mirror housing that accommodates the reflection mirror 28 is provided. The body may be attached to the door frame 50. Alternatively, an upper projecting portion may be formed in the door frame 50, and the reflection mirror 28 may be accommodated in the upper projecting portion. In this case, when the door frame 50 is opened, the reflection mirror 28 moves and deviates from the projection position of the projection light from the projector 32. Therefore, the projection light from the projector 32 directly hits the player, and an image is displayed on the player. There is a risk of problems such as projection. In this regard, when the door frame 50 is in the open state, by stopping the projection of the video from the projector 32, it is possible to suppress problems such as projection of an image for a player who plays with the game machine.

<Sixth Embodiment>
Next, a gaming machine according to the sixth embodiment of the present invention will be described. 59 is a front view of a pachinko gaming machine according to the sixth embodiment, FIG. 60 is a sectional side view thereof, FIG. 61 is a plan view of the screen, and FIGS. 62A and 62B are screens of the screen. It is a perspective view which shows a drive state. As shown in FIG. 59, in the pachinko gaming machine 1E according to the present embodiment, a left first sub LED 33AL and a left second sub LED 33BL are provided at the left position in the lower front inside the game frame 3A. Similarly, a right first sub LED 33AR and a right second sub LED 33BR are provided at the right position in the lower front side inside the game frame 3A. As shown in FIG. 60, a screen drive mechanism 34 for moving the main screen 5 is provided at a substantially central position in the inner height direction of the game frame 3A. The main screen 5 is attached to the screen drive mechanism 34, and the main screen 5 can be moved in the front-rear direction by operating the screen drive mechanism 34.

  The main screen 5 includes a curtain member 56. The curtain member 56 has a long sheet shape, and a part of the center of the curtain member 56 is an image display area 5X onto which the projection light from the projector 32 is projected. The image display area 5X has a horizontally long rectangular shape, and performs variable display of decorative symbols (also referred to as effect symbols) and various effect displays. In addition, a flat display area is formed as a display area in the image display area 5X.

  At both ends of the curtain member 56, a left winding roller 57L and a right winding roller 57R around which the position of the extra length portion that extends the image display area 5X in the curtain member 56 is provided. Further, a left driven roller 58L and a right driven roller 58R are provided at both ends of the image display area 5X of the curtain member 56, respectively.

  As shown in FIG. 59, the main screen 5 is attached to the screen drive mechanism 34 and can be advanced and retracted by the screen drive mechanism 34. As shown in FIG. 60, the screen drive mechanism 34 includes a plate-like support plate 34A. The image display area in the main screen 5 is formed on the surface of the support plate 34A. A rod 34B is connected to the back side of the support plate 34A, and a rack 34C is provided at the rear end of the rod 34B.

  Further, a left pinion gear 34DL and a right pinion gear 34DR are provided at the left and right positions of the rear end portion of the rod 34B. The pinion gears 34DL and 34DR are structured to mesh with rack teeth in the rack 34C. The pinion gears 34DL and 34DR can be rotated around a vertical axis by a stepping motor (not shown). As the pinion gears 34DL and 34DR rotate, the rack 34C meshing with the pinion gears 34DL and 34DR advances and retreats, and the rod 34B, the support plate 34A, and further the main screen 5 advance and retreat as the rack 34C advances and retreats.

  The main screen 5 can be in the forward state shown in FIG. 62 (A) and in the reverse state shown in FIG. 62 (B). As shown in FIG. 62 (A), when the main screen 5 is in the forward movement state, the image display area is arranged at the foremost position (hereinafter referred to as the “most forward movement position”), and when the main screen 5 is in the backward movement state. The image display area is arranged at the rearmost position (hereinafter referred to as “last retracted position”).

  As shown in FIG. 62 (A), from the state in which the image display area of the main screen 5 is disposed at the most advanced position, the stepping motor is operated to rotate the left pinion gear 34DL in a plan view and rotate the right pinion gear 34DR to a plane. Rotate it counterclockwise visually. When the pinion gears 34DL and 34DR rotate, the rack 34C that meshes with the pinion gears 34DL and 34DR moves backward, and the rod 34B and the support plate 34A move backward. As the support plate 34A is retracted, the image display area attached to the support plate 34A is also retracted, and as shown in FIG. 62 (B), the projection area of the main screen 5 is in the last retracted position.

  While the image display area of the main screen 5 is moved backward, no driving force is applied to the take-up rollers 57L and 57R and the driven rollers 57L and 57R are kept in a driven state. At this time, when the image display area is retracted, the extra length of the curtain member 56 wound around the take-up rollers 57L and 57R is unwound so that the image display area can be retracted without the curtain member 56 being cut. ing. The take-up rollers 57L and 57R may be rotated in the direction of unwinding the curtain member 56 without being driven. When the take-up rollers 57L and 57R are rotated in the direction in which the curtain member 56 is unwound, the speed is preferably lower than the rotation speed of the stepping motor that rotates the pinion gears 34DL and 34DR. By making the rotation speed of the winding rollers 57L and 57R slower than the rotation speed of the pinion gears 34DL and 34DR, the tension state of the curtain member 56 can be suitably maintained. The winding rollers 57L and 57R may be provided only on either the left or right side.

  Further, as shown in FIG. 62 (B), from the state where the image display area of the main screen 5 is disposed at the last retracted position, the stepping motor is operated to turn the left pinion gear 34DL in a counterclockwise direction, and the right pinion gear. Rotate 34DR clockwise in plan view. When the pinion gears 34DL and 34DR rotate, the rack 34C that meshes with the pinion gears 34DL and 34DR moves forward, and the rod 34B and the support plate 34A move forward. As the support plate 34A advances, the image display area attached to the support plate 34A also advances, and the projection area of the main screen 5 is in the most advanced position as shown in FIG.

  While the image display area of the main screen 5 is advanced, a driving force is applied to the winding rollers 57L and 57R. The driving force applied to the winding rollers 57L and 57R is such that the rotational speed of the winding roller 57L is the same as or slightly faster than the rotational speed of the pinion gears 34DL and 34DR. By applying a driving force of this magnitude to the take-up rollers 57L and 57R, the curtain member 56 can be advanced in a tensioned state.

  Further, the projector 32 and the reflection mirror 28 that reflects the image projected by the projector 32 are arranged above the main screen 5, and the image projected from the projector 32 is reflected by the reflection mirror 28 and is displayed in front of the main screen 5. Projected onto the main screen 5 from above. Thus, in the projector 32, the optical axis of the projection light LP and the display surface of the main screen 5 (surface on which the projection region X is formed) are not orthogonal to each other, and the main screen 5 is tilted with respect to the display surface of the main screen 5. An image is projected on the screen 5. Since the projector 32 projects an image from an oblique projection direction, the image displayed on the main screen 5 has a trapezoidal shape. The main screen 5 has a rectangular shape, and the main screen 5 does not coincide with the image area projected from the projector 32, and the main screen 5 is wider than the image displayed on the main screen 5.

  For this reason, as shown in FIG. 59, in the image display area 5X on the main screen 5, the area formed in the lower part is a wide part 5XW having a wide width, and the area formed in the upper part is The narrow part 5XN is narrower than the wide part 5XW. Since the image display area 5X has a trapezoidal shape, and the main screen 5 has a rectangular shape, the left and right positions of the narrow portion 5XN are non-projection areas 5NL and 5NR where the image projected from the projector 32 does not reach. Become. The phenomenon in which these non-projection regions 5NL and 5NR are generated occurs in common when the main screen 5 is at the most advanced position and when it is at the most retracted position.

  The non-projection regions 5NL and 5NR correspond to regions outside the narrow portion 5XN, and are regions having a difference in width between the wide portion 5XW and the narrow portion 5XN in the image display region 5X. In other words, the difference between the width of the wide portion 5XW and the width of the narrowest portion of the narrow portion 5XN is the maximum width of the non-projection regions 5NL and 5NR.

  The first sub LEDs 33AL and 33AR provided at the lower front side inside the game frame 3A emit the irradiation light LL to the non-projection areas 5NL and 5NR of the main screen 5 at the most advanced position to emit the non-projection areas 5NL and 5NR. As a result, the entire area of the main screen 5 is eliminated from the range where no image (light) is displayed. The second sub LEDs 33BL and 33BR irradiate irradiation light (not shown) to the non-projection areas 5NL and 5NR of the main screen 5 at the last retracted position.

  The effect control board 12 shown in FIG. 7 includes an actuator driving unit (not shown). The actuator drive unit performs drive control of the winding rollers 57L and 57R and further the stepping motor in the screen drive mechanism 34 based on commands and control data from the effect control PCU 120.

  Next, an example of an effect produced by displaying an image on the main screen 5 from the projector 32 in the pachinko gaming machine 1E and operational effects in the pachinko gaming machine 1E will be described.

  The size when the image projected from the projector 32 is displayed on the main screen 5 varies depending on the size of the image projected by the projector 32 and also varies depending on the distance between the projector 32 and the main screen 5. . The screen drive mechanism 34 adjusts and changes the distance between the projector 32 and the main screen 5 by moving the main screen 5 forward or backward.

  For example, in a special game, a super reach effect composed of a first stage and a second stage may be executed. Such a super reach effect is an effect with a relatively high expectation level for big hits as an effect executed in a special figure game. The relatively high jackpot expectation level means that, among all reach performances executed in the special figure game, the jackpot expectation level is relatively high, for example, the top 50% ranking in descending order of the jackpot expectation level, or the top rank It is an effect that falls into a fairly high rank, such as a rank of 30%. The super reach β production (specific super reach β production) is included in this super reach production.

  An effect executed in the first stage in the super reach effect (hereinafter referred to as “first stage effect”) is executed in a state in which the main screen 5 is arranged at the most forward position. Further, the effect executed in the second stage (hereinafter referred to as “second stage effect”) is executed in a state in which the main screen 5 is arranged at the last retracted position.

  More specific contents of the super reach effect will be described. In the first stage, the main screen 5 is arranged at the most advanced position, and the effect that the main character MC confronts an enemy character not shown is executed as the main effect. As a result of the confrontation between the main character MC and the enemy character, when the main character MC wins, a definite decorative symbol that is a big hit combination is derived and displayed in the decorative symbol display area on the main screen 5 to be a big hit. Thus, the super reach production does not proceed to the second stage but ends at the first stage.

  Further, when the main character MC is defeated, the projection of the image from the projector 32 and the irradiation of the irradiation light from the first sub LED 33A are interrupted, and the screen is once blacked out (darkened), and shifts to the end pattern or the restoration pattern. . In the end pattern, the main effect continues, the decorative symbols other than the confirmed decorative symbol are derived and displayed in the decorative symbol display area on the main screen 5, and the special game is ended. Also in this case, the super reach production does not proceed to the second stage but ends at the first stage.

  In the revival pattern, the super reach production shifts from the first stage to the second stage. In the second stage, the main effect shifts to the sub effect, and the revival effect is executed as the sub effect. When the screen before executing the revival effect is blacked out, the screen drive mechanism 34 is operated to move the main screen 5 to the last retracted position. When the movement of the main screen 5 is completed, the projection of the image from the projector 32 is resumed, the second sub LED 33B is turned on instead of the first sub LED 33A, and the irradiation light is emitted from the second sub LED 33B. Perform stage production. In the production in the second stage, the main screen 5 moves backward, and the production by the main character MC displayed on the main screen 5 is executed. Therefore, the entertainment can be improved. The main character MC displayed in the second stage is displayed larger than the main character displayed in the first stage. In the second stage, the main character MC is displayed in a large size, thereby increasing the expectation for the big hit.

  Further, in the revival effect, an effect is performed in which the sub characters SC1 and SC2 who have come to help the main character MC fight the enemy character together with the main character MC. When the main character MC and the sub-characters SC1 and SC2 win the enemy character, a definite decorative symbol that is a big hit combination is derived and displayed in the decorative symbol display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R, and a big hit is obtained. Further, when the main character MC and the sub characters SC1 and SC2 are defeated by the enemy character, the decorative symbols other than the confirmed decorative symbols are derived and displayed in the decorative symbol display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R, which is out of place. Thus, the super reach production ends. After the super reach production is finished, the screen is projected with an image from the projector 32 and irradiated with irradiation light from the first sub-LED 33A and the second sub-LED 33B, as in the transition from the first stage to the second stage. Interrupt and temporarily black out the screen. Then, the main screen 5 is moved forward by the screen drive mechanism 34 to place the main screen 5 at the most advanced position, and a fixed decorative design or the like is displayed on the main screen 5.

  The distance between the main screen 5 and the projector 32 differs between when the main screen 5 is disposed at the most forward position and when it is disposed at the most retracted position. Specifically, when the main screen 5 is disposed at the most advanced position, the distance between the main screen 5 and the projector 32 is shorter than when the main screen 5 is disposed at the most retracted position.

  In the above-described super reach production, the main character MC is displayed on the main screen 5 with the main screen 5 positioned at the most advanced position in the first stage, and the main screen 5 is positioned at the last retracted position in the second stage. In this state, the main character MC is displayed on the main screen 5. Therefore, the main character MC can be displayed largely on the main screen 5 simply by moving the main screen 5 backward while maintaining the size of the image of the main character MC projected by the projector 32. Therefore, even if the main screen 5 is moved, a suitable image can be displayed on the main screen 5. On the other hand, by moving the main screen 5 forward, the main character MC can be displayed on the main screen 5 small while maintaining the size of the image of the main character MC projected by the projector 32.

  Further, for example, in the effect executed in the special game, the first effect mode and the second effect mode are set. Most special figure games are executed in the first effect mode. However, when the special transition game is repeatedly executed, if the predetermined transition condition is satisfied, the first effect mode may be shifted to the second effect mode. is there. After shifting to the second effect mode, the effect in the special drawing game in the second effect mode is executed a predetermined number of times (for example, four times), and then the first effect mode is returned or the game is shifted to the big hit gaming state. During the first effect mode, the effect is executed with the main screen 5 positioned at the most advanced position, and during the second effect mode, the effect is executed with the main screen 5 positioned at the last retracted position. . In this way, the position of the main screen 5 may be executed at the most advanced position and the most retracted position, respectively, so that it is possible to diversify the effects that are executed and contribute to the improvement of interest. .

  In either case, during the first effect mode and the second effect mode, for example, an effect in which the main character MC is displayed on the main screen 5 is executed. When executing these effects, the size of the main character MC displayed on the main screen 5 is maintained, for example, during the first effect mode and during the second effect mode.

  It is executed when the main screen 5 is arranged at the most advanced position during the first effect mode, and is executed when the main screen 5 is arranged at the last retracted position during the second effect mode. For this reason, if the size of the image projected from the projector 32 is the same in the first effect mode and in the second effect mode, the size of the main character MC changes, giving the player a sense of incongruity. There are concerns.

  Here, in the pachinko gaming machine 1E according to the present embodiment, by reducing the image projected by the projector 32, the main character MC displayed on the main screen 5 during the first effect mode and the second effect mode is displayed. The size is maintained. For this reason, the uncomfortable feeling given to the player can be reduced, and a suitable image can be displayed on the main screen 5 even if the main screen 5 is moved.

  In the image display area 5 </ b> X, an effect of image display by a video projected from the projector 32 is executed. Here, in the flat display area 5A of the main screen 5, as shown in FIG. 58, non-projection areas 5NL and 5NR in which an image projected from the projector 32 does not reach are generated due to the nature of the projector 32 and the like.

  Irradiated light emitted from the sub-LEDs 33A and 33B is shown on the non-projection areas 5NL and 5NR. As described above, by irradiating the non-projection areas 5NL and 5NR with the irradiation light of the sub LEDs 33A and 33B, it is possible to suitably perform the performance although there is an area where the projector 32 cannot project an image. The non-projection areas 5NL and 5NR may be supplemented with the irradiation light of the sub-LEDs 33A and 33B in addition to the aspect in which the irradiation light from the sub-LEDs 33A and 33B is simply irradiated. .

  The image projected from the projector 32 onto the main screen 5 has a trapezoidal shape. In the present embodiment, since the main screen 5 is rectangular, it is conceivable to perform so-called trapezoidal correction that matches the length of the long side of the trapezoid of the image projected on the main screen 5 with the length of the short side. However, due to restrictions such as the distance relationship between the main screen 5 and the projector 32 for performing keystone correction, the image cannot be corrected to a rectangle even by the keystone correction, and the image of the projector 32 cannot be displayed at the upper left and right positions of the trapezoid. Non-projection areas 5NL and 5NR are generated. In this embodiment, the main screen 5 has a rectangular shape by irradiating the non-projection areas 5NL and 5NR with the irradiation light of the sub LEDs 33A and 33B so that the entire rectangular main screen 5 is irradiated with light. Can be recognized by the player. In addition, since an image can be displayed in all areas of the main screen 5 having a horizontally long rectangular shape, even if there is an area that cannot be projected by the projector, it is possible to execute the effect suitably. Therefore, a decrease in interest can be suppressed.

  Further, in the present embodiment, although the main screen 5 moves, the curtain member 56 on which an image projected from the projector 32 is displayed is kept flat. For this reason, even if the main screen 5 is moved, it is possible to prevent a situation in which an image displayed on the main screen 5 is distorted.

  In the present embodiment, the sub LEDs 33A and 33B are arranged on the lower front side inside the game frame 3A. Is arranged. The arrangement positions of the sub LEDs 33A and 33B may be other positions, for example, the upper front surface of the main screen 5, or the right front surface or the left front surface.

  Further, in place of the sub LEDs 33A and 33B, other display devices such as other sub projectors, liquid crystal display devices, CRT displays, and EL displays may be used. In this case, another display device may be provided on the support plate 34A of the screen drive mechanism 34. By providing another display device on the support plate 34 </ b> A, the other display device can be moved following the movement of the main screen 5.

  In addition, an image projected from the projector 32 is prevented from being displayed on the extra length portion of the curtain member 56 of the main screen 5 where the image display area 5X is extended. An image projected from the screen may be displayed. In particular, when the main screen 5 is disposed at the last retracted position, an extra length portion (hereinafter referred to as “projection region adjacent portion”) adjacent to the image display region 5X is disposed along the front-rear direction. You may display the image projected from the projector 32 in this projection area | region adjacent part. By displaying an image in the projection area adjacent portion, the range of diversification of production can be widened, which can contribute to improvement of interest.

  Further, the separation distance between the left winding roller 57L and the right winding roller 57R may be longer than the width in the left-right direction of the support plate 34A that drives the main screen 5. When the main screen 5 is disposed at the last retracted position because the left winding roller 57L and the right winding roller 57R have a longer separation distance than the lateral width of the support plate 34A, it is adjacent to the projection region. The portion may be a surface having an inclination in the left-right direction, and an image may be projected from the projector 32 on the projection region adjacent portion. Since the projection region adjacent portion on which the image is projected has a plane inclined in the left-right direction, the image displayed on the projection region adjacent portion can be easily seen.

  Further, when the distance between the projector 32 and the main screen 5 is adjusted and changed, the main screen 5 is moved forward or backward by the screen driving mechanism 34, but other modes may be used. For example, the distance between the projector 32 and the main screen 5 may be changed by moving the projector 32 forward in the direction of the reflection mirror 28 or moving it backward in the direction away from the reflection mirror 28. Alternatively, the reflection mirror 28 may be moved to change the distance between the reflection mirror 28 and the projector 32 or the distance between the reflection mirror 28 and the projector 32. In short, the distance between the projector 32 and the main screen 5 may be changed by moving at least one of the projector 32, the reflection mirror 28, and the main screen 5.

  Further, the positions where the main screen 5 moves and the projection light is projected from the projector 32 are two positions, the most advanced position or the most retracted position, but may be other positions or include other positions. You may go out. For example, intermediate display positions are set at several positions between the most forward position and the most backward position of the main screen 5, and the main screen 5 is stopped at these positions and projection light is projected from the projector 32. It is good also as a position. The most forward position or the most backward position may not be included in the position where the projection light is projected from the projector 32.

  While the main screen 5 is moved, the image displayed on the main screen 5 is blacked out. However, the main screen 5 may be moved while the image is displayed on the main screen 5. By moving the main screen 5 while displaying the image on the main screen 5, it is possible to express a change in which the image continuously increases or a state in which the size does not change while the image moves. It can contribute to improvement.

  The direction in which the curtain member 56 is moved by the screen drive mechanism 34 may be a direction along the optical axis of the projection light projected from the projector 32. In the present embodiment, the rod 34B of the screen drive mechanism 34 may be moved in a direction facing obliquely downward so as to move the main screen 5 in FIG. In this case, it is preferable that the winding rollers 57L and 57R and the driven rollers 58L and 58R are also inclined. The direction in which the curtain member 56 is moved is the direction along the optical axis of the projection light projected from the projector 32, so that an image can be suitably projected onto the curtain member 56 without adjusting the mounting angle of the reflection mirror 28. can do.

  Further, the irradiation of the irradiation light by the sub LEDs 33A and 33B is suppressed for a while after the power is turned on (turned on) until the projection light from the projector 32 can be projected, for example. May be. Before the projector 32 can project when the power is turned on, the projector 32 needs to be warmed up. During the warming up operation, appropriate projection control from the projector 32 may not be possible. is there. When the irradiation light is emitted from the sub LEDs 33A and 33B in a state where the projection light from the projector 32 cannot be projected, only the non-projection areas 5NL and 5NR in the main screen 5 are in a bright state, which may cause a sense of incongruity. is there. In this regard, only the non-projection areas 5NL and 5NR of the main screen 5 are in a bright state by suppressing the irradiation of the irradiation light from the sub LEDs 33A and 33B during the preparation time after the power is turned on. The uncomfortable feeling caused by this can be reduced. In addition, as an aspect which suppresses irradiation of irradiation light from sub-LEDs 33A and 33B, irradiation of irradiation light may be stopped or blocked, or the amount of irradiation light may be reduced.

  Further, a lens may be provided on the optical path of the projection light projected from the projector 32 such as each opening between the projector 32 and the main screen 5. By providing a lens on the optical path of the projection light projected from the projector 32, the size of the image projected from the projector 32 can be adjusted. A fish-eye lens may be used as a lens provided on the optical path of the projection light projected from the projector 32. By using a fisheye lens, it is possible to display a large image.

  Further, when irradiating light to the non-projection areas 5NL and 5NR, the non-projection areas 5NL and 5NR are not conspicuous than the image display area 5X, but the main screen 5 is not a trapezoid but a rectangle. Such an impression may be given to the player. Specifically, the image display area 5X and the non-projection areas 5NL, 5NR are formed of different materials, and the material used in the non-projection areas 5NL, 5NR is more than the material used in the image display area 5X. The reflectance may be lowered due to blackness or rough surface. Further, when the image display area 5X and the non-projection areas 5NL and 5NR are integrally formed, the non-projection areas 5NL and 5NR are painted black, or surface treatment is performed to roughen the surface, and reflection is performed. The rate may be lowered. Further, although the timing for preparing the projection is set when the projector 32 is warming up, another timing may be used. For example, the operation may be confirmed when the projector 32 confirms the operation at start-up, or the light source of the projector 32 may be confirmed. That is, it may be any timing until the projector 32 can project a predetermined image. Further, as the projector 32, a projector having a save mode with reduced power consumption may be used although the power is on. In such a projector 32, when the projector 32 is in the save mode, the warm-up operation is required until the projection light can be projected, similarly to when the power is turned on. However, the time required for the warm-up operation from the save mode until the projection light can be projected is shorter than the time required for the warm-up operation after the power is turned on until the projection light can be projected. . Based on the time required for the warm-up operation, the timing for preparing the projection may be determined.

<Seventh embodiment>
Next, a gaming machine according to the seventh embodiment of the present invention will be described. FIG. 63 is a front view of a pachinko gaming machine according to the seventh embodiment, FIG. 64 is a side sectional view thereof, and FIG. 65 is a perspective view of the screen thereof.

  As shown in FIG. 63, in the pachinko gaming machine 1F according to the present embodiment, a sub LED 33 is provided on the inner lower side of the game frame 3A. As shown in FIG. 64, a multi-sided main screen 5M is provided at a substantially central position in the inner height direction of the game frame 3A. Further, as shown in FIGS. 64 and 65, the main screen 5 is provided on the multi-sided main screen 5M.

  The multi-sided main screen 5M includes a plurality of screen areas, and the plurality of screen areas can be switched. The multi-sided main screen 5M includes a curtain member 56 and a rotation drive mechanism 57. The curtain member 56 includes a belt-like cloth material. A part of the screen area of the curtain member 56 becomes the main screen 5.

  As shown in FIGS. 64 and 65, the rotation drive mechanism 57 includes a rear roller 57A disposed relatively rearward, an upper roller 57B disposed upper front and a lower roller 57C disposed lower front. ing. A stepping motor 57D is connected to the rear roller 57A via a gear mechanism 58, and the rear roller 57A functions as a driving roller. Further, the upper roller 57B and the lower roller 57C are pivotally supported so as to function as driven rollers. The rear roller 57A, the upper roller 57B, and the lower roller 57C are arranged at the apex positions of the regular triangle as viewed from the side.

  A curtain member 56 is wound around the rear roller 57A, the upper roller 57B, and the lower roller 57C. The screen member 56 has three screen regions. In the state shown in FIG. 64, the first screen region 56A is formed between the upper roller 57B and the lower roller 57C in the curtain member 56, and the second screen region 56B is formed between the upper roller 57B and the rear roller 57A. A third screen region 56C is formed between the rear roller 57A and the lower roller 57C. Of these three screen areas, the screen area disposed between the upper roller 57B and the lower roller 57C is the main screen 5.

  A stepping motor 57D connected to the rear roller 57A applies a rotational force to the rear roller 57A while regulating the amount of rotation of the rear roller 57A. When the rear roller 57A rotates, the curtain member 56 rotates as the rear roller 57A rotates. As the curtain member 56 rotates, the upper roller 57B and the lower roller 57C are driven to guide the rotation of the curtain member 56. The rear roller 57A rotates counterclockwise in the state shown in FIG. 1, and the curtain member 56 also rotates counterclockwise. As the curtain member 56 rotates, the main screen 5 slides and, for example, the main screen 5 between the upper roller 57B and the lower roller 57C is switched from the first screen area 56A to the second screen area 56B.

  An image projected from the projector 32 and reflected by the reflection mirror 28 is projected onto the main screen 5. In addition, a part of the center of the main screen 5 is an image display area 5X where the projection light from the projector 32 is projected. The image display area 5X has a horizontally long rectangular shape, and performs variable display of decorative symbols (also referred to as effect symbols) and various effect displays. In addition, a flat display area is formed as a display area in the image display area 5X.

  Different backgrounds are drawn in the first screen area 56A, the second screen area 56B, and the third screen area 56C. Specifically, for example, a town as a background is drawn in the first screen area 56A. In the second screen area 56B, a sea as a background is drawn. In the third screen area 56C, a mountain as a background is drawn. The first screen region 56A to the third screen region 56C have the same shape and size. However, the first screen region 56A to the third screen region 56C may have different shapes and sizes, or some of them may have the same shape and size and the other portions may have different shapes and sizes. Also good.

  For example, when the main screen 5 is switched from the first screen area 56A to the second screen area 56B, the stepping motor 57D rotates the rear roller 57A so as to move the width of the first screen area 56A, thereby moving the curtain member 56. Scroll. By scrolling the curtain member 56, the main screen 5 is switched from the first screen area 56A to the second screen area 56B. Similarly, when the main screen 5 is switched from the second screen area 56B to the third screen area 56C, the curtain member 56 is scrolled until the third screen area 56C is positioned at the position of the second screen area 56B. When the main screen 5 is switched from the third screen area 56C to the first screen area 56A, the curtain member 56 is scrolled until the first screen area 56A is positioned at the position of the third screen area 56C.

  Further, the left and right positions of the narrow portion 5XN of the main screen 5 are non-projection areas 5NL and 5NR where the image projected from the projector 32 does not reach. The phenomenon in which these non-projection areas 5NL and 5NR are generated occurs in common when the main screen 5 is any one of the first screen area 56A to the third screen area 56C.

  Further, in the pachinko gaming machine 1F, a projection process for controlling projection of an image from the projector 32 at a specific time is executed. The specific time is when the stepping motor 57D in the rotation drive mechanism 57 is driven. The projection process is executed by the CPU 120 for effect control on the effect control board 12. The effect control CPU 120 executes the projection process when it is time to execute the projection process.

  Thus, when the stepping motor 57D is driven and the main screen 5 is switched, the switch of the projector 32 is turned OFF to limit the projection of the image from the projector 32. In addition, as a restriction | limiting of the projection of an image | video from the projector 32, it is good also as another aspect which turns off the switch of the projector 32. FIG.

  For example, the light amount of the projector 32 may be reduced, or the projection direction of the projector 32 may be changed from a direction facing the reflection mirror 28 (a direction facing the main screen 5) to a different direction. Further, a shutter may be provided at the projection port of the projector 32 and the shutter may be closed so that the projection light does not leak from the projector 32. Further, a shutter is provided in the opening through which the projection light in the logo accessory 26 passes, and when the projection video projection from the projector 32 is stopped, the shutter is closed to block the projection light from the projector 32. Also good.

  Further, whether or not the main screen 5 is switched may be determined based on a state other than the driving state of the stepping motor 57D. For example, a movement sensor that determines the movement of the curtain member 56 is provided, the movement sensor determines the movement of the curtain member 56, and it is determined that the main screen 5 is switched in the curtain member 56. Also good. In addition, a switching time required from when the main screen 5 starts switching to when the switching is completed is stored in advance, and the main screen 5 determines whether the switching time has elapsed after the main screen 5 starts the switching work. It may be determined whether or not switching is performed. Alternatively, it may be determined whether or not the main screen 5 is switched based on whether or not a part or all of the rotational drive mechanism 57 such as the rollers 57A to 57C driven by the stepping motor 57D is moving. . Further, it may be determined whether or not the main screen 5 is switched based on the start timing of the effects executed on the main screen 5 during the special figure game, the interval between effects, and the like.

  Next, an example of an effect by displaying an image on the main screen 5 from the projector 32 in the pachinko gaming machine 1F and an operation effect in the pachinko gaming machine 1F will be described. The pachinko gaming machine 1F according to the present embodiment includes a multi-sided main screen 5M, and any of a plurality of screen areas 56A to 56C in the multi-sided main screen 5M is used as the main screen 5. For this reason, the monotony of the image displayed on the main screen 5 can be suppressed, and it can contribute to the improvement of interest.

  The plurality of screen areas 56A to 56C are formed in the curtain member 56, and the screen area to be the main screen 5 can be switched by driving the stepping motor 57D to slide the curtain member 56. For example, when the first screen area 56A is the main screen 5, the second screen area 56B is switched to the screen. When the second screen area 56B is the main screen 5, the third screen area 56C is switched to the screen, and when the third screen area 56C is the main screen 5, the first screen is displayed. Region 56A is switched to the screen.

  The main screen 5 is switched in the order of the first screen area 56A → the second screen area 56B → the third screen area 56C. For example, by rotating the stepping motor 57D in the reverse direction, the curtain member 56 is moved to the clockwise direction. It may be rotated around and executed in the order of the third screen area 56C → second screen area 56B → first screen area 56A. Further, for example, the screen may be switched by skipping the screen area while rotating the curtain member 56 counterclockwise. For example, when the first screen area 56A is the main screen 5, the curtain member 56 is rotated counterclockwise, the second screen area 56B is skipped, and the curtain member 56 is slid to the third screen area 56C. Thus, the third screen area 56C may be used as the main screen 5.

  Further, when switching the main screen 5, the degree of jackpot expectation may be varied according to the switching mode of the main screen 5. For example, when the main screen 5 is switched, the jackpot expectation may be higher than when the main screen 5 is not switched. Further, even when the main screen 5 is switched, the switching based on the order of the first screen area 56A → the second screen area 56B → the third screen area 56C by rotating the curtain member 56 counterclockwise is performed. The big hit is expected when the switching based on the order of the third screen area 56C → the second screen area 56B → the first screen area 56A by rotating the curtain member 56 in the clockwise direction is performed. The degree may be increased.

  Further, the curtain member 56 is rotated counterclockwise as compared with the case where the switching based on the order of the third screen area 56C → the second screen area 56B → the first screen area 56A is performed by rotating the curtain member 56 clockwise. The big hit expectation degree may be higher when switching from the first screen area 56A to the third screen area 56C by rotation is performed. Further, any one of these switching operations may be executed as a part of a so-called jackpot finalizing effect that is executed when the jackpot expectation is 100%.

  Further, in the pachinko gaming machine 1F according to the present embodiment, when the stepping motor 57D is being driven and the main screen 5 is switched on the multi-sided main screen 5M, the projection of the image from the projector 32 is stopped. Yes. If projection light is projected from the projector 32 during switching of the main screen 5, there is a possibility that the projection image from the projector 32 is projected between the screen areas of the curtain member 56. For example, when the projection image is projected from the projector 32 when the main screen 5 is switched from the first screen area 56A to the second screen area 56B, the gap between the first screen area 56A and the second screen area 56B is displayed. The projection image projected from the projector 32 is displayed, and there is a possibility that the production may be defective.

  In this regard, in the pachinko gaming machine 1F according to the present embodiment, when the stepping motor 57D is being driven and the main screen 5 is switched on the multi-sided main screen 5M, the projection of the image from the projector 32 is stopped. ing. For this reason, it is possible to suppress the projection of an image at an inappropriate position such as between the first screen area 56A and the second screen area 56B, and it is possible to suppress a problem in production.

  In the above example, each of the first screen area 56A to the third screen area 56C of the multi-sided main screen 5M is a screen composed of a flat display area in which the stereoscopic display area is not formed, but the stereoscopic display area is formed. It is also possible to use a screen. In the case of forming the stereoscopic display region, for example, the curtain member 56 may be formed of a flexible material. By forming the curtain member 56 with a flexible material, the three-dimensional portion becomes flat when passing through the rollers 57A to 57C. However, a material that returns to a three-dimensional shape after passing through the rollers 57A to 57C is used. That's fine. Alternatively, a planar material having elasticity may be used as the curtain member 56, and when it becomes the main screen 5, a three-dimensional shape may be formed by pressing a mold from the back side of the screen.

  Further, the screen member 56 is formed with the three screen areas of the first screen area 56A to the third screen area 56C, but the screen area may be two or four or more. Alternatively, the first screen area 56A and the second screen area 56B may be overlapped, and a part of the curtain member 56 may be used in the plurality of main screens 5. In the above example, the three screens of the first screen area 56A to the third screen area 56C are provided independently. However, the curtain member 56 of the multi-sided main screen 5M is moved with a short span, and these are halfway. The position may be used as a screen. In this case, for example, a part of the first screen area 56A and a part of the second screen area 56B, a part of the second screen area 56B, a part of the third screen area 56C, and a part of the third screen area 56C An image may be projected from the projector 32 on a part of the first screen area 56A.

  In addition, a three-dimensional figure, an accessory, or the like is disposed inside the curtain member 56, and a perforated screen in which a hole is formed in the center instead of one of the three screen regions 56A, 56B, 56C. May be provided. In the perforated screen, a rectangular hole is formed, the horizontal length of the hole is slightly shorter than the width of the curtain member 56, and the height of the hole in the height direction is It is slightly shorter than the width between the roller 57B and the lower roller 57C. You may make it visible visually the figure etc. which were provided inside the multi-sided screen through the hole in this screen. Alternatively, the projection light projected from the projector 32 may be projected through a hole in the perforated screen. It should be noted that the figure accessory disposed inside the multi-sided screen may be a fixed form that does not change, or may be a movable type. In addition, when it is movable, it may be deformed on the spot, for example, it may move forward and move to the front of the perforated screen or the same position as the perforated screen. Good. In addition, an image display device or the like may be provided in place of the three-dimensional figure or the accessory.

<Eighth Embodiment>
Next, a gaming machine according to the eighth embodiment of the present invention will be described. 66 is a front view of a pachinko gaming machine according to the eighth embodiment, and FIG. 67 is a side sectional view thereof. As shown in FIGS. 66 and 67, the pachinko gaming machine 1G according to the present embodiment includes a screen 71 and a screen drive mechanism 72 that are different from the seventh embodiment. The screen 71 includes an upper plane display area 71A, a stereoscopic display area 71B, and a lower plane display area 71C as display areas. The stereoscopic display area 71B includes a central stereoscopic display area 71BC, a right stereoscopic display area 71BR, and a left stereoscopic display area 71BL. The central stereoscopic display area 71BC, the right stereoscopic display area 71BR, and the left stereoscopic display area 71BL all have a figure shape. The screen 71 is formed by sticking a figure-like three-dimensional object on a flat plate, the position where the three-dimensional object is not attached becomes the flat display area 71A, and the position where the three-dimensional object is attached is the three-dimensional display area. 71B. An upper plane display area 71A and a lower plane display area 71C are formed at upper and lower positions across the stereoscopic display area 71B. The image displayed on the screen 71 is formed in both the flat display area 71A and the stereoscopic display area 71B of the screen 71, and an effect is executed by so-called projection mapping using an image from the projector 32.

  The screen 71 can be moved in the vertical direction by a screen drive mechanism 72. When the screen 71 is disposed at the lowermost position (hereinafter referred to as “lowermost position”), an image from the projector 32 is projected onto the upper plane display area 71A and the stereoscopic display area 71B. Further, when the screen 71 is arranged at the uppermost arrangement position (hereinafter referred to as “uppermost position”), the video from the projector 32 is projected onto the stereoscopic display area 71B and the lower plane display area 71C.

  In the plane display areas 71A and 71C on the screen 71 shown in FIGS. 68A and 68B, a specific image, a background image, and an image such as a character are mainly displayed. In the central stereoscopic display area 71BC, the right stereoscopic display area 71BR, and the left stereoscopic display area 71BL, characters corresponding to the respective stereoscopic display areas are mainly displayed. In the example shown in FIG. 68A, the main character image MC is displayed in the central stereoscopic display area 71BC, the first subcharacter image SC1 is displayed in the left stereoscopic display area 71BL, and the second subcharacter is displayed in the right stereoscopic display area 71BR. An image SC2 is displayed.

  Note that the main character image MC, the first sub character image SC1, and the second sub character image SC2 are displayed in the central stereoscopic display area 71BC, the left stereoscopic display area 71BL, and the right stereoscopic display area 71BR, respectively. Other images may be displayed. For example, the displayed characters may be switched so that the first sub character image SC1 or the second sub character image SC2 is displayed in the central stereoscopic display area 71BC. Further, an image other than a character, for example, a background image may be displayed in the stereoscopic display area 71B, or a character image may be displayed in the flat display areas 71A and 71C.

  By projecting an image from the projector 32 onto the stereoscopic display area 71B of the screen 71, as shown in FIG. 68A, an image that appears as a stereoscopic image in conformity with the stereoscopic shape is displayed in the stereoscopic display area 71B. . In addition, in a state in which no image is projected onto the stereoscopic display area 71B, as shown in FIG. 68B, the stereoscopic shape in the stereoscopic display area 71B is difficult to visually recognize, and the player can view the stereoscopic display area 71B. It is difficult to recognize the shape.

  By providing the stereoscopic display area 71B, the distance between the projector 32 and the screen 71 is not uniform. Specifically, when the projector 32 is disposed on the surface of the screen 71, the stereoscopic display area 71B is closer to the flat display areas 71A and 71C. For this reason, as shown in FIG. 69A, when the screen 71 is disposed at the lowermost position, the focus of the image projected from the projector 32 is a predetermined axis in the image projected from the projector 32, for example, light. A position between the position corresponding to the surface of the stereoscopic display area 71B on the axis and the position corresponding to the upper plane display area 71A, for example, an intermediate position thereof is set.

  As shown in FIG. 69 (B), when the screen 71 is disposed at the uppermost position, the focal point of the image projected from the projector 32 is the position and light corresponding to the three-dimensional surface in the image projected from the projector 32. A position between positions corresponding to the lower plane display area 71C on the axis, for example, an intermediate position thereof is set.

  When the screen 71 is disposed at the lowest position, the wide area and the narrow area in the image display area are also formed in the screen 71, and many parts of the upper plane display area 71A are narrow. The small part is included in the wide part. The 3D display area 71B is all included in the wide part. However, the upper plane display area 71 </ b> A and the stereoscopic display area 71 </ b> B may be included in other modes as to whether they are included in the wide part or the narrow part. For example, the entire upper planar display area 71A or the entire stereoscopic display area 71B may be included in the wide part or the narrow part, or a part of each may be included. Further, the left and right positions of the narrow portion are non-projection areas 71NL and 71NR where the image projected from the projector 32 does not reach. When the screen 71 is arranged at the uppermost position, as shown in FIG. 69 (B), the positions on the sides of the central stereoscopic display area 71BC and above the left and right stereoscopic display areas 71BL and 71BR are as follows. , The non-projection areas 71NL and 71NR that the image projected from the projector 32 does not reach.

  Also, the decorative symbol display areas 5L, 5C, 5R, the hold display areas 5H1, 5H2, the hold number display area 5F, and the current display area 5K are all displayed in the flat display area 71A. Therefore, the decorative symbols displayed in the decorative symbol display areas 5L, 5C, 5R, the hold display displayed in the hold display areas 5H1, 5H2, the hold number display displayed in the hold number display area 5F, and the current display area 5K. In this case, the current display is displayed in a flat planar display area 71A.

  As shown in FIG. 67, the screen drive mechanism 72 includes a plate-like support member 72A, and a rack member 72B is provided at the lower end of the support member 72A. Further, the rack member 72B is engaged with a pinion gear 72C, and the rack member 72B and the pinion gear 72C constitute a rack and pinion mechanism.

  The pinion gear 72C is connected to a stepping motor (not shown). By driving this stepping motor, the pinion gear 72C rotates. As the pinion gear 72C rotates, the rack member 72B, the support member 72A provided with the rack member 72B, and the screen 71 supported by the support member 72A move up and down. By driving the stepping motor, the screen 71 slides and the position of the screen 71 is switched between the lowermost position and the uppermost position.

  In addition, an accommodation portion that accommodates a lower portion of the screen 71 when the screen 71 is disposed at the lowest position is formed at a lower position of the game frame 3A. Further, a left first sub LED 33AL and a left second sub LED 33BL are provided at the left position in the lower front side inside the game frame 3A. Similarly, a right first sub LED 33AR and a right second sub LED 33BR are provided at the right position in the lower front side inside the game frame 3A.

  The first sub LEDs 33AL and 33AR irradiate the non-projection areas 71NL and 71NR with the irradiation light when the screen 71 is disposed at the lowest position. The second sub LEDs 33BL and 33BR irradiate the non-projection areas 71NL and 71NR with the irradiation light when the screen 71 is disposed at the uppermost position.

  In the pachinko gaming machine 1G according to the present embodiment having the above-described configuration, the screen 71 can be moved up and down by the screen drive mechanism 72 and can be disposed at either the lowermost position or the uppermost position. . When the screen 71 is disposed at the lowermost position, the stereoscopic display area 71B is disposed below the planar display area 71A. When the screen 71 is disposed at the lowermost position, the lower plane is disposed below the stereoscopic display area 71B. A display area 71C is formed. For this reason, since the different screens 71 can be formed according to the arrangement position of the screen 71, the monotonousness of the image displayed on the screen 71 can be suppressed, and it can contribute to the improvement of interest.

  Further, when the stepping motor is being driven and the screen 71 is moving up and down, the projection of the image from the projector 32 may be stopped or executed. When the screen 71 is moving up and down, the projection of the image from the projector 32 is stopped, for example, between the upper plane display area 71A and the stereoscopic display area 71B, or between the stereoscopic display area 71B and the lower plane display area 71C. Projection of an image to an inappropriate position, such as between, can be suppressed, and production problems can be suppressed. In addition, when the screen 71 is moving up and down, by projecting an image from the projector 32, it is possible to execute a specific effect while the screen 71 is switched, which contributes to improvement of interest. Can do.

  Further, when an image is projected on the stereoscopic display area 71B on the screen 71, an effect by displaying a stereoscopic image formed by combining the stereoscopic shape in the stereoscopic display area 71B and the projected image is executed. By performing such an effect by displaying a stereoscopic image, it is possible to execute an effect that is more interesting than an effect using a planar image. In particular, since the screen is three-dimensional, the three-dimensional shape can be expressed more realistically than when a so-called 3D display is performed on a flat screen, so it is more interesting than the production using a flat image. Production can be performed. Furthermore, specific information images are displayed in the flat display areas 71A and 71C. For this reason, it can suppress that a player misidentifies the information contained in a specific information image.

Hereinafter, modifications of the present invention will be described.
<Modification 1>
The image projected from the projector 32 or the sub LED 33 may include the virtual light source α in the main screen 5 as shown in FIG. In this case, the virtual light source α serves as a light source, and in the other part of the main screen 5, in the example shown in FIG. 70, the central stereoscopic display region 5BC is positioned at a position opposite to the virtual light source α across the central stereoscopic display region 5BC. Shadow β may occur. You may control so that a specific information image and a complete display request image may not be displayed in the area | region where such shadow (beta) generate | occur | produces. By preventing the specific information image from being displayed in the area where the shadow β occurs, it is possible to suppress a situation in which the information by the specific information image is not easily transmitted to the player. Further, by not displaying the complete display request image in the region where the shadow β occurs, incomplete display of the complete display request image can be suppressed.

  The generation of the virtual light source α and the shadow β can be assumed in advance based on the content of the image projected from the projector 32 and the sub LED 33 and the shape of the main screen 5. For this reason, it is possible to execute control that does not display the specific information image or the complete display request image for the image projected from the projector 32 or the sub LED 33.

<Modification 2>
As shown in FIG. 71, the screen on which the image projected from the projector 32 is displayed includes a plurality of screens including a side surface display region and a bottom surface display region as well as the front surface display region 5A and the stereoscopic display region 5B. It is good also as the screen 60 provided with this display surface. The outline of the screen 60 will be described. The screen 60 includes a back surface display area 61, a right side display area 62, a left side display area 63, and a bottom display area 64. The back surface display area 61 is provided with a flat display area 61A and a stereoscopic display area 61B similar to those in the first embodiment. As for the right side display area 62, the left side display area 63, and the bottom face display area 64, only a flat display area is formed. However, a 3D display area may be provided in part or all of the right side display area 62, the left side display area 63, and the bottom display area 64.

  In the screen 60 having such a multi-surface display area, it is preferable to display the specific information image and the complete display request image in the flat display area. In the example shown in FIG. 71, as specific information images, decorative symbol display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R, reserved display areas 5H1 and 5H2, reserved number display area 5F, current display area 5K, and small symbol display area 5S, respectively. , Hold display, hold number display, current display, and small design images are displayed. Further, when a plurality of specific information images are displayed simultaneously, the plurality of specific information images may be displayed in different display areas. For example, in the same manner as in FIG. 1, when displaying an image of decorative design, hold display, hold count display, and current display, the decorative design is displayed on the flat display area 61 </ b> A in the back face display area 61 to display hold display and hold count. In addition, the currently displayed image may be displayed in the bottom display area 64. Since the flat display area 61A and the bottom display area 64 in the back surface display area 61 are both flat, the specific information image can be displayed in an easily viewable manner.

  Further, when displaying other specific information images, for example, when displaying each image such as a small design, volume adjustment display, light amount adjustment display, right-handed display, etc. as the specific information image, a small design, volume adjustment display, Each image such as right-handed display may be displayed in the flat display area. Furthermore, the images displayed in the flat display area 61A, the right side display area 62, the left side display area 63, and the bottom display area 64 in the back surface display area 61 may be changed. For example, a decorative design image may be displayed in the flat display area 61 </ b> A in the back surface display area 61, and the reserved number and the reserved image may be displayed in the bottom display area 64. By such an aspect, the area | region which displays a specific information image easily can be enlarged. The complete display request image may also be displayed in any of the right side display area 62, the left side display area 63, and the bottom display area 64.

  In the example shown in FIGS. 71 and 72, a wide portion and a narrow portion of the projection region are formed in the back surface display region 61, and a non-projection region is formed on the side of the narrow portion. Further, in the right side display area 62 and the left side display area 63, a projection area and a non-projection area are formed. The non-projection area in the back surface display area 61 can be irradiated with irradiation light from a sub LED (not shown) provided inside the game frame, so that the non-projection area can emit light. Similarly, the non-projection areas in the right side display area 62 and the left side display area 63 can also be irradiated with irradiation light from a sub LED (not shown) provided inside the game frame, so that the non-projection areas can be emitted. . Further, the non-projection area of the back surface display area 61 may be formed of a light transmissive material, and a sub LED or the like may be disposed on the back side of the non-projection area to cause the non-projection area to emit light. Similarly, the non-projection areas of the right side display area 62 and the left side display area 63 may be formed of a light transmissive material, and a sub LED or the like may be arranged on the back side of the non-projection area to emit light in the non-projection area.

<Modification 3>
As in the second modification, common information may be displayed as different specific information images on the screen 60 provided with a plurality of display surfaces. For example, when displaying a right-handed display image as the specific information image, a right-handed display image may be displayed in the back surface display area 61, the right side display area 62, and the left side display area 63. Such display can assist the player in viewing the specific information even when the angle at which the player views the screen 60 changes.

  Moreover, when displaying specific information images on a plurality of display surfaces, different specific information images may be displayed on different display surfaces. For example, as an example of displaying common information as different specific information images, it is possible to display character information described as “right-handed” when displaying a right-handed image, or an image of an arrow pointing rightward Can also be displayed. In this case, a specific information image composed of an image of character information described as “right-handed” is displayed in the back surface display area 61, and images of arrows pointing in the right direction are displayed in the right side display area 62 and the left side display area 63. It may be displayed. Thus, by displaying certain specific information with different specific information images, it is possible to provide target specific information in a multifaceted manner and alert the player.

<Modification 4>
In the third modification, the back surface display area 61, the right side display area 62, the left side display area 63, and the bottom display area 64 in the screen 60 are provided in the screen mounting hole 2 </ b> A formed in the center of the game board 2. Yes. Here, a frame-like accessory is attached along the inner edge of the screen attachment hole 2A, and a back surface display area 61, a right side display area 62, a left side display area 63, and a bottom face display area are included in the frame-like accessory. 64 may be provided.

  By providing the back surface display area 61, the right side display area 62, the left side display area 63, and the bottom surface display area 64 in the frame-shaped accessory, the back surface display area 61 is located behind the frame. It is possible to give the player the impression embedded in the game, and to improve the interest. Further, since the frame-shaped accessory is formed, the screen 60 can be clearly separated from other backgrounds.

  In this modified example, the screen 60 is provided in the frame-shaped accessory. However, the screen is displayed in the image imitating the frame-shaped accessory and the image imitating the frame-shaped accessory in the back surface display area 61. An image imitating 60 may be displayed. By performing such a display, it is possible to give an illusion that the image visually recognized by the player is either a real object or an image-displayed object, which contributes to improvement of interest. be able to.

<Modification 5>
When displaying an image on the main screen 5, a so-called blurred image that is an out-of-focus image may be superimposed and displayed so that a part of the image is sucked. For example, as shown in FIG. 73, an image is displayed by projecting a focused image in the central stereoscopic display area 5BC, and the surrounding display areas, specifically, the right stereoscopic display area 5BR, the left stereoscopic display, and the like are displayed. An unfocused blurred image may be displayed in the display area 5BL and the flat display area 5A.

  By displaying such a blurred image, the main character image MC displayed in the central stereoscopic display area 5BC is displayed on the surrounding characters, for example, the sub-character images displayed in the left stereoscopic display area 5BL and the right stereoscopic display area 5BR, respectively. Display may be performed such that the background images displayed in SC1 and SC2 (see FIG. 1) and the flat display area 5A are sucked. By performing such display, it is possible to diversify the image expression and contribute to the improvement of interest. Further, since the display area on which the focused video is projected is the central stereoscopic display area 5BC, the specification is suitable for performing an effect centered on the main character image MC displayed in the central stereoscopic display area 5BC. can do.

  Further, after performing display such that a part of the image is sucked in as described above, the image display may be changed such that the entire image displayed on the main screen 5 or the image background changes. . By changing the image display after performing display such that a part of the image is sucked, the player can clearly recognize that the change in the image display has been performed. Scenes where image display is changed include development effects in so-called reach effects, mode change effects in effects other than the jackpot gaming state in the normal state, and scene change effects in the jackpot gaming state Can be mentioned.

<Modification 6>
When displaying an image on the main screen 5, the black portion extending in the vertical direction from the flat display area 5A to the stereoscopic display area 5B on the main screen 5 is displayed, so that the image displayed on the main screen 5 is opened from the center. Such an image may be displayed. By displaying an image such that the image displayed on the main screen 5 is opened from the center, it is possible to diversify the image display and contribute to the improvement of interest.

  Further, the black part is displayed in the central part of the main screen 5, and the image of the main character image MC displayed in the central stereoscopic display area 5BC is displayed so that the black part is expanded. You may display an image as if is open. By performing such an effect of displaying an image, it is possible to suitably perform an effect centered on the main character image MC.

  Further, the image display displayed on the main screen 5 may be changed after an image that opens the screen as described above is displayed. By changing the image display after displaying an image that opens the screen, the player can clearly recognize that the image display has been changed.

<Modification 7>
When displaying an image on the main screen 5, a crack image (crack image) may be displayed on the entire image displayed on the main screen 5, and an image that destroys the image may be displayed. By displaying an image that destroys such an image, it is possible to diversify the image display and contribute to the enhancement of interest. For example, an image in which an iron ball collides with the center portion of the main screen 5 may be displayed, and an image in which cracks occur around the image of the iron ball may be displayed.

  Also, for example, as shown in FIG. 74, a black crack image CC is randomly displayed in the flat display area 5A and the stereoscopic display area 5B on the main screen 5, and the entire image is cut out from the crack image CC. Various images may be displayed. At this time, among the character images displayed in the stereoscopic display area 5B, there are character images that are torn and character images that are not torn, and an effect using the character image that has not been torn may be executed. For example, when the sub character images SC1 and SC2 displayed in the left and right stereoscopic display areas 5BL and 5BR are torn by a crack and the main character image MC displayed in the central stereoscopic display area 5BC is not torn by a crack, An effect using the main character image MC may be executed. Further, when the main character image MC displayed in the central stereoscopic display area 5BC is torn by a crack and the sub character images SC1 and SC2 respectively displayed in the left and right stereoscopic display areas 5BL and 5BR are not torn by the crack, An effect using the sub character images SC1 and SC2 may be executed.

<Modification 8>
When displaying an image on the main screen 5, an effect as if the main screen 5 has moved (retracted) to the back may be executed by projecting a reduced image of the entire main screen 5. By displaying such an image, it is possible to execute various effects as if the main screen 5 has moved without actually moving the main screen 5, which can contribute to improvement of interest. .

  For example, if the main screen 5 is actually retracted, the image displayed on the main screen 5 becomes large, and it is difficult to give the player a sense that the main screen 5 has retracted. However, by displaying the image in a small size, it is possible to execute an effect as if the main screen 5 was retracted without actually retracting the main screen 5.

  Further, by projecting an image in which the entire main screen 5 is enlarged, an effect as if the main screen 5 has moved (moved forward) from the back may be executed. By performing such an effect, it is possible to execute various effects as if the main screen 5 has moved without actually moving the main screen 5, thereby contributing to an improvement in interest.

<Modification 9>
When displaying the video on the main screen 5, the character images MC, SC1, and SC2 are respectively associated with voices displayed on the plurality of stereoscopic display areas 5BC, 5BL, and 5BR. When an effect (emphasis) is displayed, a corresponding sound may be emitted. For example, when the main character image MC sings a song, the main character image MC may be displayed as an effect, and the sub-character images SC1 and SC2 may be displayed as a non-effect. Such effect display and sound generation can contribute to improvement of interest.

  The effect display can be performed in various ways. For example, while the non-effect display does not emit light (turns off), the effect display may be made to emit light, or display with a larger light amount than the non-effect display, or so-called spotlight display. Can go. Also, non-effect display and display with different colors can be performed.

<Modification 10>
In this modification, a movable accessory 80 shown in FIG. 75C is provided in front of the main screen 5. Moreover, in this modification, the 1st effect mode and the 2nd effect mode are set as effect mode, and it may transfer to the 2nd effect mode from the 1st effect mode, and it changed to the 2nd effect mode. Then, after the predetermined number of special figure games are over, the first effect mode is resumed. Further, the movable accessory 80 is stored in a storage area (not shown) provided in front of the main screen 5 and the storage state shown in FIG. 75A, and FIG. 75 in which the movable accessory 80 rises from the storage area. There are exposure states shown in (C). During the first presentation mode, the movable accessory 80 is mainly stored, and during the second presentation mode, the movable accessory 80 is mainly exposed.

  The transition from the first performance mode to the second performance mode is performed by operating the push button 31B during the special figure game in which the transition possible condition is satisfied. The player can shift the effect mode from the first effect mode to the second effect mode by operating the push button 31B during the special figure game in which the transferable condition is satisfied. Hereinafter, the flow of transition from the first effect mode to the second effect mode in the present modification will be described. FIG. 75 is an explanatory diagram using a front view of a screen for explaining the present modification.

  For example, when the transition enabling condition is satisfied when the special game is being executed in the first effect mode, the operation request image HA is displayed on the main screen 5 as shown in FIG. The transferable condition is satisfied when the special figure game is started and when the invalid condition is not satisfied when the special figure game is started. The operation request image HA is composed of an image imitating the push button 31B and a downward-facing arrow disposed above the image. By displaying the operation request image HA on the main screen 5, it is possible to request the player to operate the push button 31B.

The invalid condition is, for example, satisfying at least one of the following conditions.
(1) In the special figure game, an effect requesting the operation of the push button 31B is performed. (2) The variable display result in the special figure game is “big hit”. (3) The effect is provided by operating the push button 31B. A state in which a predetermined selection action other than mode selection is possible (4) A presentation mode switching operation has been performed in the previous special figure game (5) While a predetermined number of special figure games are executed The remaining number of special figure games is 0 or 1 in a state where the rate of transition to the big hit game state is high (during so-called ST) (6) Continuous production from the previous special figure game (so-called continuous (7) A special game is given before the start of the variable display subject to the advance notice. The effect that is performed based on the suspension information etc. (so-called look-ahead effect) is performed

  By setting the invalid condition, it is possible to suppress the exchange of the production modes when the timing becomes inappropriate when the production modes are exchanged. Specifically, since (1) and (3) are set as invalid conditions, misperception of the operation of the push button 31B can be suppressed. In addition, by setting (2) as the invalid condition, mode selection in the case of shifting to the big hit gaming state after the special figure game can be suppressed. By setting (4) as the invalid condition, it is possible to suppress the change of the production mode when the moving time of the movable accessory 80 cannot be secured. Explaining this point, a predetermined movement time is required until the movable accessory 80 shifts from the stored state to the exposed state. The predetermined movement time is secured in a special game in which the effect mode is switched. However, in consideration of the time required for the effect mode to be switched, sufficient time for displaying the operation request image HA may not be secured. Concerned. For this reason, the condition (4) is set.

  By setting (5) as the invalid condition, it is possible to prevent the production when the special production is performed. This point will be further described. When the remaining number of special figure games during ST is 0 or 1, the ratio of execution of a special effect that raises the expectation of a big hit is increased. Such a special effect can be prevented from being hindered by the operation of changing the effect mode. By setting (6) and (7) as invalid conditions, it is possible to prevent the effects executed across a plurality of special figure games from being hindered by the operation for switching the effect modes.

  When the player operates the push button 31B in response to an operation request based on the display of the operation request image HA during execution of the special figure game in which the transferable condition is satisfied, when the next special figure game is started, FIG. As shown in (B), the movable accessory 80 stored in the storage area rises to a position in front of the main screen 5. In the example shown in FIGS. 75A and 75B, the operation request image HA is displayed at a position where the movable accessory 80 rises. The movable accessory 80 rises to the position where the operation request image HA shown in FIG. 75 (A) was displayed. Thus, since the movable accessory 80 rises to the position where the operation request image HA is displayed, the display position of the operation request image HA can guide the player to the raised position of the movable accessory 80.

  The movable accessory 80 is a columnar body having a semicircular bottom surface, which is a so-called “kamaboko shape”. The movable accessory 80 is a columnar body having a semicircular shape when the state shown in FIG. Further, the rising position of the movable accessory 80 is a position in front of the central stereoscopic display area 5BC in the stereoscopic display area 5B. For this reason, when the movable accessory 80 rises, the central stereoscopic display region 5BC is hidden by the movable accessory 80.

  However, as shown in FIG. 75B, the 3D display area 5B does not move as the movable accessory 80 rises, but the display position of the main character image MC displayed in the 3D display area 5B increases. To do. Then, as shown in FIG. 75 (C), when the movable object 80 is completely lifted and exposed, the central stereoscopic display area 5BC is hidden by the movable object 80 and is placed on the movable object 80. An image on which the main character image MC is riding is displayed. In this way, the movable accessory 80 is exposed and an effect in the second effect mode is executed.

  When the effect in the second effect mode is executed, the movable accessory 80 is exposed and positioned in front of the main screen 5. In the second effect mode, the projector 32 projects an image on the assumption that an image is displayed on the movable accessory 80 in addition to the main screen 5. In the first effect mode, an effect of displaying an image by projecting an image on the main screen 5 is executed as in the first embodiment, and in the second effect mode, an image is displayed on the main screen 5 and the movable accessory 80. An effect of displaying an image by projecting is executed. For this reason, diversification of production can be achieved. Further, since the player can select the first effect mode and the second effect mode, it is possible to execute an effect according to the player's preference.

  In the present modification, the movable accessory 80 has a semi-cylindrical shape, but may have another shape, for example, a shape that three-dimensionally represents a predetermined character. Further, only one type of movable accessory 80 is stored and exposed, but a plurality of two or more types of movable accessories may be stored and exposed. In this case, a plurality of movable accessories may be exposed at the same time, or only one type may be exposed.

  Further, in the present modification, the display position of the main character image MC rises as the movable accessory 80 rises, but the display position of the main character image MC may not be changed. In this case, for example, an image in which the main character MC is hidden may be displayed on the movable accessory 80, or the display position of the main character image MC may be transferred from the main screen 5 to the movable accessory 80. Good. When the display position of the main character image MC shifts from the main screen 5 to the movable accessory 80, for example, an image in which the main character image MC jumps from the main screen 5 toward the movable accessory 80 may be displayed.

<Modification 11>
In the modified example 10, the operation request image HA is displayed at a position where the movable accessory 80 rises. On the other hand, the operation request image HA may be displayed at a position other than such a position. For example, the operation request image HA may be displayed in the flat display area 5A. By displaying the operation request image HA in the flat display area 5A, the operation request image HA can be easily recognized by the player.

  Alternatively, the operation request image HA may be displayed across the flat display area 5A and the stereoscopic display area 5B, or as shown in the second modification shown in FIG. 62, when the screen 60 including the left side display area 63 and the bottom side display area 64 is used, the screen 60 may be displayed on the right side display area 62, the left side display area 63, or the bottom side display area 64. The display area 61, the right side display area 62, the left side display area 63, and the bottom display area 64 may be displayed across a plurality of areas.

<Modification 12>
As an effect executed in the special drawing game in the first effect mode (the effect mode in which the movable accessory 80 is in the storage state) in the above-described modification 10, the effect (hereinafter referred to as “lifting”) Can be provided). In addition, when performing the rising effect, a blackout display that darkens the display on the main screen 5 is performed, and a display (hereinafter referred to as “light-up display”) that illuminates the movable object 80 that rises is performed. Also good. By performing the light-up display, it is possible to execute an effect that highlights the movable object 80 that rises, and it is possible to contribute to the improvement of interest. The light up of the movable accessory 80 may be executed using the projector 32.

  The light-up effect may be an effect of illuminating the movable accessory 80 with one color image, or an effect of illuminating with two colors, three colors, or a plurality of colors, for example, rainbow. The light-up effect may be an effect of projecting an image of a character or the like on the movable accessory 80 as well as simply illuminating the movable accessory 80. In particular, when a figure-shaped or other accessory is used as the movable accessory 80 instead of a kamaboko-shaped movable accessory, an image corresponding to the figure may be displayed.

<Modification 13>
In the rising effect described in the modified example 12, the movable accessory 80 may perform a rising operation, and the expectation of jackpot may differ depending on the rising height of the movable accessory 80 that has finally stopped. For example, in the rising effect, the rising height of the movable accessory 80 is set to four levels: upper (corresponding to the exposed state), middle, lower, and unchanged (corresponding to the stored state). However, what is necessary is just to make it a big hit expectation degree in order of upper stage> middle stage> lower stage> invariant. Or it is good also as another order, for example, the order of invariant> upper stage> middle stage> lower stage.

  The movement when the movable accessory 80 rises may be a movement that gradually rises and increases in height, and once it rises to various heights, it is repeatedly moved up and down to the final height position. You may make it stop. In this case, in the rising effect in which the rising height remains unchanged, after the movable accessory 80 is once raised, the movable accessory 80 is finally lowered to be stored and the rising height remains unchanged. .

  Further, even if the rising height is the same, the expected degree of jackpot may be different depending on the rising operation of the movable accessory 80. For example, in the case where the movable accessory 80 finally stops at the middle stage, when the movable accessory 80 once rises to the upper stage and then descends and stops at the middle stage, it is more than when it stops at the middle stage without rising to the upper stage. Also, the expectation degree of jackpot may be increased.

  Further, during the rising effect, the video may be projected from the projector 32 onto the movable accessory 80, and the big hit expectation may be different depending on the projected video. For example, when the movable accessory 80 rises up to the upper level, when the video projected on the movable accessory 80 is a red spotlight, the expectation of jackpot may be higher than when the image is a blue spotlight. Good. Furthermore, when the movable accessory 80 rises to the upper level, when a special pattern or character image is displayed on the movable accessory 80, a big hit is expected compared to when a monochromatic spotlight is projected on the movable accessory 80. The degree may be increased. Further, in accordance with a mode in which any one of the rising height of the movable accessory 80, the upward movement of the movable accessory 80, and the image projected on the movable accessory 80 is used, the big hit expectation is increased. Also good.

  Further, the rising effect may be executed not only during the special game other than the big hit game state but also during other game states, for example, the big hit game state. For example, if there is a big win as the type of big hit, the number of times the big winning door is opened (so-called number of rounds), an indication or notification as to whether or not the big winning door will continue to be opened is performed with a rising effect. Also good. For example, when there are big hits of 4R and 16R rounds, the rising effect is executed during the fourth R, the rising height of the movable accessory 80, the upward movement of the movable accessory 80, and the movable accessory 80 You may suggest or alert | report whether a round continues by the aspect which combined either of the image | videos to project.

<Modification 14>
In executing the rising effect, the center decoration symbol displayed in the center decoration symbol display area 5C may be lifted on the rising movable accessory 80 and carried to the center ornament symbol display area 5C. For example, when the reach state is formed by the decorative symbols displayed in the left decorative symbol display area 5L and the right decorative symbol display area 5R, the production is diversified by carrying the middle symbol as a rising effect. Can increase interest. Further, a plurality of middle symbols may be carried, and the final decorative symbol may be derived from the finally selected middle ornament symbol.

  Further, when a so-called pseudo-continuous notice effect is executed, a continuation-indicating symbol that suggests the continuation of the pseudo-continuous may be used as a medium decoration symbol carried by the rising effect. Here, the pseudo-continuous notice effect is, for example, based on a variation pattern, in one variation display, after the display of the display result is derived and displayed as a temporary stop symbol as a temporary stop symbol, the variation display is resumed. This is an effect that makes it appear as if multiple times of variable display have been executed. The continuation suggestion symbol is a symbol that suggests or notifies the resumption of the variable display in the pseudo-continuous notice, and is, for example, a symbol that includes the characters “NEXT”. Further, the continuation suggestion symbol may be other symbols including characters that remind the user to resume the variable display, such as “continuation”, “continue”, and “next”. In this way, by displaying the continuation suggestion symbol in the pseudo-continuous notice in a rising effect, it is possible to diversify the effect and contribute to the improvement of interest.

<Modification 15>
The hold display displayed in the hold display areas 5H1 and 5H2 shown in FIG. 1 and the current display displayed in the current display area 5K may be displayed in various modes. The hold display and the current display may be not only a simple figure but also a pattern imitating a predetermined object or character. Only one type of these various patterns may be displayed, or a plurality of types may be displayed. Furthermore, when a plurality of types of patterns are displayed, the expectation of jackpot may be varied depending on the types of patterns. Further, the pattern may be changed when the hold display moves or when the hold display moves to the current display. Furthermore, the character pattern that is a pattern imitating a character may be a character pattern obtained by deforming the character images MC, SC1, and SC2 displayed in the stereoscopic display area 5B. The character pattern may be a pattern imitating another character.

  Further, when the character design is displayed as the current display, the expectation of jackpot may be higher than when the other design is displayed. At this time, when the character design is displayed as the current display, an image in which a hole is opened under the current display area 5K is projected, and the character design displayed as the current display falls into the hole and disappears. Good. Despite the fact that the character design is displayed on the display this time and that the expectation level for jackpot is high, the character design falls into the hole and disappears, so that the player can be surprised and the entertainment can be improved. Can do.

  In addition, after performing the effect that the character design falls in the hole, an image in which the character image corresponding to the character design falling in the hole rises due to the rise effect may be displayed. The character image corresponding to the character design falling in the hole rises as a result of the rising effect, so that a player who feels discouraged by the character design falling in the hole can be given a new expectation, which improves the interest. Can contribute. In addition, the character image corresponding to the character pattern falling in the hole may be raised or not when the rising effect is performed. In this case, after the character design has fallen into the hole, it can be enjoyed whether or not the rising effect is performed, so that the interest can be improved.

<Modification 16>
The stereoscopic display area 5B is provided with a central stereoscopic display area 5BC, a left stereoscopic display area 5BL, and a right stereoscopic display area 5BR. These areas are respectively a main character image MC, a first sub character image SC1, and a second stereoscopic character display area 5BR. The sub character image SC2 is displayed. As effects in the special figure game, effects corresponding to the main character image MC, the first sub character image SC1, and the second sub character image SC2 may be executable. By making it possible to execute the effects corresponding to the main character image MC, the first sub character image SC1, and the second sub character image SC2, it is possible to diversify the effects and contribute to the improvement of interest. .

  Further, when an effect corresponding to the main character image MC, the first sub character image SC1, and the second sub character image SC2 is executed, the stereoscopic display area 5BC in which the character images MC, SC1, and SC2 corresponding to the effect are displayed. , 5BL, 5BR may be illuminated with an effect. For example, when an effect corresponding to the main character image MC is executed, an effect of illuminating the periphery of the central stereoscopic display area 5BC with light may be applied. When applying the effect, the main character image MC in the central stereoscopic display area 5BC may be displayed or may not be displayed. In this way, the effect corresponding to the stereoscopic display area in which the character image to which the effect is applied is displayed is executed, so that it is possible to give the player time to prepare for the effect to be executed. Therefore, improvement of interest can be contributed.

<Modification 17>
When the main screen 5 is switched in the multi-plane main screen 5M (see FIG. 64) shown in the seventh embodiment as a screen for displaying an image projected from the projector 32, as shown in FIG. An auxiliary line HL along the moving direction (see FIG. 64) and an arrow HY indicating the moving direction may be displayed on the main screen 5. By displaying the auxiliary line HL along the moving direction of the curtain member 56 and the arrow HY indicating the moving direction, it is possible to enhance the realism of switching the main screen 5 and contribute to the improvement of interest. Note that both the auxiliary line HL and the arrow HY may be displayed, or one of them may be displayed.

<Modification 18>
In the special game, the character image is displayed in a part of the stereoscopic display areas 5BC, 5BL, and 5BR shown in FIG. 3, and the image is not displayed in the stereoscopic display area in the other part. Also good. Further, as the special figure game progresses, the image may be gradually displayed in the stereoscopic display area where the image is not displayed.

  For example, when the special figure game starts, the main character image MC may be displayed in the central stereoscopic display area 5BC, and no image may be displayed in the left stereoscopic display area 5BL and the right stereoscopic display area 5BR. At this time, it is preferable that irregularities in the left stereoscopic display area 5BL and the right stereoscopic display area 5BR are made difficult to understand by the player.

  When the special figure game is started, images are not displayed in the left stereoscopic display area 5BL and the right stereoscopic display area 5BR, but images are displayed as the special figure game progresses. The sub character images SC1 and SC2 may be displayed in the left stereoscopic display area 5BL and the right stereoscopic display area 5BR during the progress or at the end. Thus, by displaying the sub character images SC1 and SC2 as the special figure game progresses, it is possible to diversify the production and contribute to the improvement of interest.

  Further, when displaying the sub-character images SC1 and SC2, the big hit expectation may be different depending on the display change mode. For example, when both sub-character images SC1 and SC2 are finally displayed, the first sub-character image SC1 is displayed, and the big hit expectation is higher than when the second sub-character image SC2 is not displayed. It may be. Further, when only the first sub character image SC1 is finally displayed, the big hit expectation may be higher than when only the second sub character image SC2 is displayed. Alternatively, the display positions of the main character image MC and the sub character images SC1 and SC2 may be switched, and the big hit expectation may be different depending on the display position. For example, the normal display position of the main character image MC is the central stereoscopic display area 5BC, the normal display position of the first subcharacter image SC1 is the left stereoscopic display area 5BL, and the normal display position of the second subcharacter image SC2 is the right stereoscopic display area. In some cases, the big hit expectation may be different by displaying the character images MC, SC1, and SC2 in the stereoscopic display area other than the normal display position. Since the big hit expectation varies depending on the display positions of the character images MC, SC1, and SC2, it is possible to improve the interest. At this time, the big hit expectation is higher when the main character image MC is displayed in the stereoscopic display area other than the normal display area than when the sub character images SC1 and SC2 are displayed in the stereoscopic display area other than the normal display area. May be made higher, or conversely, the expectation degree of jackpot may be made lower. Further, the big hit expectation degree may be higher when there are more character images whose display positions are no longer in the normal display area.

  Further, the big hit expectation may be different depending on the display procedure of the sub character images SC1 and SC2. For example, as the first display procedure, the sub character images SC1 and SC2 may be displayed so as to be gradually engraved from the upper direction of the left and right stereoscopic display areas 5BL and 5BR. Further, as a second display procedure, an image of a lattice-like groove is suddenly displayed on the entire left and right stereoscopic display areas 5BL and 5BR, and then the image of the groove explodes and sub-character images SC1 and SC2 appear. May be displayed. Among these, the display according to the second display procedure may be higher in the jackpot expectation than the display according to the first display procedure.

<Modification 19>
When the 3D display area 5B shown in FIG. 3 is formed, it may be formed in a relief shape by embossing (relief work). Since the stereoscopic display area 5B is formed in a relief shape, the unevenness in the stereoscopic display area 5B can be enhanced, so that the stereoscopic effect of the image projected from the projector 32 can be emphasized. As a result, the impact given by the image can be increased, which can contribute to the improvement of interest.

<Modification 20>
When projecting an image on a plurality of stereoscopic display areas, the image may be projected sequentially. For example, as shown in FIG. 77A, when an image is projected onto the central stereoscopic display area 5BC, the left stereoscopic display area 5BL, and the right stereoscopic display area 5BR, the video is first projected onto the central stereoscopic display area 5BC. The main character image MC is displayed. Next, as shown in FIG. 77 (B), an image is projected onto the stereoscopic display area 5BL to display the first sub character image SC1. Then, as shown in FIG. 1, a video is projected onto the right stereoscopic display region 5BR to display the second sub character image SC2. An image may be displayed in the stereoscopic display area 5B by this procedure. In this way, by sequentially projecting images on a plurality of stereoscopic display areas and displaying the images, it is possible to make it difficult to recognize the distortion of the image formed in the stereoscopic display area 5B.

<Modification 21>
In the first embodiment, the decorative symbols are derived and displayed according to the special symbols derived and displayed as the variable display result in the special game, but other examples may be used. For example, an effect of changing the display mode of the three-dimensional display area 5B according to the special symbol derived and displayed as a variable display result in the special figure game is performed together with or instead of the decorative symbol derivation display. May be.

  For example, an effect of changing the display mode of the three-dimensional display area 5 </ b> B together with the derivation display of the decorative symbols will be described. In this effect, an image in which the first sub character image SC1 displayed in the left stereoscopic display area 5BL and the second sub character image SC2 displayed in the right stereoscopic display area 5BR fly from the back to the near position is displayed. . At this time, both the first sub character image SC1 and the second sub character image SC2 are displayed with a size smaller than the size of the left stereoscopic display region 5BL and the right stereoscopic display region 5BR. Further, the left stereoscopic display area 5BL and the right stereoscopic display area 5BR are displayed together with a decorative design.

  Here, when a special symbol corresponding to the big hit is derived and displayed as the special symbol, the first sub character image SC1 and the second sub character image SC2 flying from the back to the front position are displayed in the left stereoscopic display area 5BL and the right It is displayed so as to coincide with the stereoscopic display area 5BR. When a special symbol corresponding to the deviation is derived and displayed as the special symbol, the first sub character image SC1 and the second sub character image SC2 flying from the back to the front position are displayed in the left stereoscopic display area 5BL and the right It is displayed so as to fly out of the stereoscopic display area 5BR. In this way, an effect may be executed in which the display mode of the sub character images SC1 and SC2 is changed according to the special symbol derived and displayed as the variable display result in the special figure game. By performing such an effect, a sense of expectation for the big hit can be enhanced by display other than the display mode of the decorative design, which can contribute to improvement of interest.

  Also, the big hit expectation can be made different according to the display mode of the stereoscopic display area 5B. For example, the greater the number of characters flying from the back to the front position, the higher the degree of expectation for jackpot than the fewer characters. Further, the big hit expectation degree may be higher when the flying character is the main character MC than when the sub characters SC1 and SC2. Also, the big hit expectation may be different depending on the speed and distance of the character flying.

<Modification 22>
1 may be arranged around the main screen 5 to display an image in which the decoration applied to the accessory has advanced into the main screen 5. . For example, around the main screen 5, an accessory with a plant cocoon decoration is placed, and an image simulating the extended state of the cocoon in the decoration applied to the accessory is displayed on the main screen 5. May be. By displaying such an image, it is possible to execute an effect that gives the player an impression as if the accessory has grown, so that the interest can be improved.

<Modification 23>
Before performing an effect in a special game or the like, an effect (hereinafter referred to as “confirmation effect”) for allowing the player to visually recognize the entire picture of the main screen 5 can also be executed. The confirmation effect is an effect in which, for example, a single color projection light LP is projected onto the main screen 5 so that the shadow of the stereoscopic display region 5B can be seen. By executing the confirmation effect, the player can recognize the entire picture of the main screen 5 on which the image of the effect is projected and the image is displayed. For this reason, even if the main screen 5 has irregularities, it is possible to reduce the uncomfortable feeling given to the player and to allow the game to be performed comfortably.

  As the execution time of the confirmation effect, for example, the confirmation effect may be performed at regular intervals while the demonstration screen is displayed, or the first time when the special figure game is started from the state where the demonstration screen is displayed. The confirmation effect may be performed for a predetermined time at the beginning of the special figure game, for example, one second.

<Modification 24>
In the seventh embodiment, the rollers 57A to 57C in the multi-sided main screen 5M are all rotatable at fixed positions, but the positions of the rear roller 57A and the lower roller 57C are also variable. 78, the lower roller 57C can be slightly raised, and the curtain member 56 between the rear roller 57A and the upper roller 57B and between the lower roller 57C and the rear roller 57A is tensioned as the lower roller 57C rises. The rear roller 57A may be movable to a position where the state can be maintained.

  When the lower roller 57 </ b> C is raised, the distance between the upper roller 57 </ b> B and the lower roller 57 </ b> C is shortened, and a bent portion can be formed on the main screen 5. Since the upper part of the main screen 5 maintains a tension state by the dead weight of the curtain member 56, the flexible part can be formed at a specific position in the lower part of the main screen 5.

  In this way, by forming the flexure portion on the main screen 5, an image can be displayed on the flexure portion formed in addition to the flat surface portion, and a beautiful image as when the stereoscopic display area is formed is displayed. can do. Moreover, since the bending part can be formed at a specific position, it is possible to suitably execute an effect in which a desired image is displayed.

  In forming the bent portion on the main screen 5, in addition to forming the shape by the dead weight of the curtain member 56, a deflection target region having a structure in which deflection is likely to occur at a predetermined position of the curtain member 56 may be formed. In forming the deflection target region, a part of the curtain member 56 that is weakened and weakened may be used as the deflection target region, or a reinforcement material such as a wire is attached to a part of the curtain member 56. A region may be formed, and a deflection target region may be formed in a portion other than the reinforcing region.

  Also, other methods may be used to form the deflection on the screen. For example, the upper roller 57B may be lowered, or the arrangement length of the main screen 5 between the upper roller 57B and the lower roller 57C may be longer than the distance between the upper roller 57B and the lower roller 57C. Good. As described above, when the rollers 57A to 57C are moved or the amount of unwinding of the curtain member 56 is adjusted, a tension adjusting mechanism may be provided on the curtain member 56 to maintain the tension of the curtain member 56. .

<Modification 25>
In place of the sub image display device 70 provided in the second embodiment shown in FIG. 52, as shown in FIG. 79, a sub image display device 70A that is rotatable around the Y axis YA and the Z axis ZA is provided. May be. By providing the sub-image display device 70A that is rotatable about the Y axis YA and the Z axis ZA, it is possible to diversify the production and contribute to the improvement of interest. Instead of the sub image display device 70A, a screen on which an image is projected from the projector may be provided. In this case, when a non-projection region occurs, a sub LED or the like may be provided.

  As shown in FIG. 80, an auxiliary display device 70B is provided on the surface of the game board 2 on the back side of the sub image display device 70A. As shown in FIG. 80, the auxiliary display device 70B corresponds to the position before the sub image display device 70A rotates when the sub image display device 70A rotates about the Y axis YA or about the Z axis ZA. Is provided.

  Thus, by providing the auxiliary display device 70B on the back side of the sub image display device 70A, when the sub image display device 70A moves, the game board 2 and the like on the back side of the sub image display device 70A can be seen. Can be suppressed. Therefore, an effect using the sub image display device 70A can be suitably executed. The auxiliary display device 70B may be a liquid crystal display device or a screen on which an image is projected from a projector. In addition, when the screen is a screen on which an image is projected from the projector and a non-projection area is generated, a sub LED or the like may be provided.

The pachinko gaming machine 1 according to the embodiment of the present invention has the following configuration, for example. Note that the configurations in [1-1] to [1-6], [2-1] to [2-8], and [3-1] to [3-7] below are variously interchanged and combined. May be.
[1-1]
A gaming machine (for example, a pachinko gaming machine 1, a slot machine, or the like) according to one aspect of the present invention has a projection unit (for example, a projector 32) that projects an image and a first state (for example, a special screen appearance effect is not executed). The first projection member (for example, main screen 5) on which an image is projected from the projection means in the state) and the distance from the projection means are different from the first projection member, and the predetermined condition during the first state An image is projected from the projection means in a second state (for example, a state in which a special screen appearance effect is executed) based on the establishment of (for example, a specific super reach β (losing) variation pattern is determined as a variation pattern) A second projection member (for example, a special screen 205A), and by focusing according to each of the first projection member and the second projection member An image can be projected, and when changing the focus when projecting an image from one of the first projection member and the second projection member to the other, there is a sense of incongruity when focusing according to each screen. A predetermined image to be reduced (for example, a single color (for example, a white image) having no creature (person) such as a character or pattern) is projected from the projection unit.

  According to the said structure, even if it changes the distance with a to-be-projected member during a projection, the discomfort given to a player can be reduced.

[1-2]
In the gaming machine according to [1-1], the second projection member may be allowed to appear more forward than the first projection member when viewed from the irradiation side of the light emitted from the projection unit.

  According to the above configuration, the second projected member appears in front of the first projected member, so that the player can be surprised.

[1-3]
In the gaming machine of the above [1-2], it is possible to perform variable display and control to an advantageous state advantageous to the player (for example, a big hit gaming state). The first state includes at least variable display, As a 2nd state, you may make it include during execution of the predetermined | prescribed effect (for example, specific super reach (beta) effect) with the high expectation degree controlled to the said advantageous state at least.

  According to the said structure, the interest of a game can be improved.

[1-4]
In any one of the above-mentioned [1-2] or [1-3], the normal operation of the second projection member (for example, the rise of the special screen 205A in the special screen appearance effect) is performed at a predetermined timing. As an operation for the appearance of the special screen 205A), the focus corresponding to the second projection member is adjusted (for example, the special screen reach effect is executed when the special screen 205A is raised in the special screen appearance effect). Also good.

  According to the above configuration, it is possible to prevent a problem from occurring in the image projected on the first projection member by performing the focusing even though the second projection member is not operating normally.

[1-5]
In any of the above gaming machines [1-2] to [1-4], when the power is turned on, the second projection member is normally operated (for example, the special screen 205A at an appropriate timing during the long initial operation). A normal operation confirmation process (for example, a process of executing a long initial operation) for confirming the appearance operation) can be executed, and the normal operation of the second projection member is performed during the normal operation confirmation process. Based on the above, an image with a focus corresponding to the second projection member may be projected.

  According to the above configuration, it can be confirmed that the focus adjustment control is operating normally.

[1-6]
In the gaming machine according to any one of [1-1] to [1-5], a focus when an image is projected from one of the first projection member and the second projection member to the other is changed (for example, After the special screen 205A is shifted from the housed state to the set state, the focus is returned to the focus when the image is projected onto one of the other of the first projection member and the second projection member (for example, the special screen 205A is The predetermined image may be projected from the projection means also when shifting from the set state to the storage state.

  According to the above configuration, it is possible to reduce the uncomfortable feeling given to the player even if the distance from the projection target member is changed during projection.

[2-1]
A gaming machine (for example, a pachinko gaming machine 1, a slot machine, or the like) according to one embodiment of the present invention is a gaming machine capable of performing a game, and is projected from a predetermined display image (for example, a projector 32). The display image is projected onto the image display area from a projection direction that is directed obliquely with respect to an image display area (for example, an image display area 5X formed on the main screen 5) that displays an image displayed on the screen 5. Projection means (for example, projector 32), frame buffer for storing display image data corresponding to the display image (for example, a frame buffer area allocated to SDRAM 263), and original image data (for example, stored in image data ROM 261) Display image data based on the original image data) and stored in the frame buffer. Means (for example, VDP 262), and when the projection means displays a display image based on the display image data stored in the actual drawing area 262A on the main screen 5, the display image is appropriately displayed. Display image data generated without converting the original image data when it is in a display position) in a first data storage area (for example, an actual drawing area 262A allocated to the SDRAM 263) of the frame buffer. When the display image is stored and projected, the display image is displayed in the image display area (for example, the display image stored in the actual drawing area 262A is displayed in the image display area 5X), and the projection control means The display image data generated without converting the original image data is stored in the first data storage area of the frame buffer and displayed. When the image is projected, the display image is projected outside the image display area (for example, the projector 32 is not in the normal position and the display image stored in the actual drawing area 262A is not displayed in the image display area 5X). The display image data is generated by converting the original image data so that the display image is displayed in the image display area (for example, the image displayed on the main screen 5 is adjusted), and the generation is performed. The display image data over the first data storage area of the frame buffer and a second data storage area different from the first data storage area (for example, the area excluding the actual drawing area 262A in the drawing area 262R). The color tone bias of the projection image in the image display area caused by the projection state from the projection unit to the image display area is adjusted. (For example, the contrast of the lower part of the image displayed in the image display area 5X is increased (darkened) by the color correction filter 28F).

  According to the above configuration, it is possible to suitably perform image representation.

[2-2]
In the game machine of [2-1], the color tone may be adjusted by video control as the adjustment (the contrast of the lower part of the image is increased (darkened) by the color correction filter 28F).

  According to the above configuration, image expression can be suitably performed.

[2-3]
In the game machine of [2-1] or [2-2], a predetermined filter (color correction filter 28F) is disposed between the projection unit and the image display area (the color correction filter 28F is connected to the projector 32 and the main display). It may be arranged on the surface of the reflection mirror 28 between the screen 5.

  According to the above configuration, image expression can be suitably performed.

[2-4]
In any one of the above-described [2-1] to [2-3], the projection posture of the projection means (for example, the relative position of the projector 32 with respect to the main screen 5, the up / down / front / back / left / right directions of the projector 32 with respect to the main screen 5). The display image may be adjusted by conversion of the original image data in the projection control means (for example, rotation of display image data stored in the drawing area 262R in the clockwise direction).

  According to the said structure, a display image can be adjusted efficiently.

[2-5]
In the above gaming machine of [2-4], the vertical and horizontal positions of the display image are adjusted (for example, adjusted by moving the projector 32 up, down, and moving left and right) according to the projection posture of the projection unit. The rotation position of the display image may be adjusted by conversion of the original image data in the projection control means (for example, rotation of display image data stored in the drawing area 262R in the clockwise direction).

  According to the said structure, a display image can be adjusted efficiently.

[2-6]
In any one of the above [2-1] to [2-5], adjustment markers (for example, markers 35A to 35D) used for adjusting the display image may be provided.

  According to the said structure, a display image can be adjusted efficiently.

[2-7]
In any one of the game machines according to [2-1] to [2-6], the projection control unit is configured to generate an original corresponding to a specific part (for example, an image displayed in the stereoscopic display area 5B) in the display image. Specific original image data (for example, display image data corresponding to an image displayed in the stereoscopic display area 5B) in the image data, and non-specific parts (for example, other than the stereoscopic display area 5B) excluding the specific part in the display image Image data including non-specific original image data (for example, display image data corresponding to an image displayed in an area other than the stereoscopic display area 5B) in the original image data in accordance with an image displayed in the area May be independently convertible.

  According to the above configuration, it is possible to suppress the occurrence of distortion in the specific portion when the display image is adjusted.

[2-8]
In any one of the above-described [2-1] to [2-7], the game machine can be changed between an open state and a closed state, and a game area (for example, formed on the game board 2) is in the closed state. An opening / closing door (for example, a door frame 3B) that covers the game area), and a limiting unit that limits projection of the projection unit when the opening / closing door is in an open state.

  According to the said structure, it can suppress that light will be projected on a player.

[3-1]
A gaming machine (for example, a pachinko gaming machine 1, a slot machine, or the like) according to one embodiment of the present invention is a gaming machine that can play a game (for example, a pachinko gaming machine 1), and a gaming island on which the gaming machine can be installed. The surface portion facing the outside of the gaming island (for example, the front surface portion, the upper surface portion, the left and right side surfaces and the lower surface portion of the door frame 3B, the front surface portion of the glass plate, etc.) A projection member (for example, the main screen 5) and a projection means (for example, a projector 32) for projecting an image on the projection target member, and the game island is provided on the surface portion for cooling the projection means. The intake part for taking in air from the outer side of this is provided.

  According to this feature, since cold air outside the game island can be taken in from the take-in portion, the back side of the front surface portion that is likely to become high temperature can be suitably cooled by the projection means.

[3-2]
In the above [3-1] gaming machine, the take-in portion may be provided on an upper portion of the surface portion (for example, an upper surface of the door frame 3B).

  According to this feature, since it becomes difficult for the player to see, mischief and the like can be suppressed.

[3-3]
In any of the above game machines [3-1] or [3-2]
The take-in portion is provided at a plurality of locations on the surface portion (for example, the take-in portion includes a plurality of elongated holes extending in the front-rear direction in the left-right direction / the take-in portion of the door frame 3B. It may be provided at a plurality of locations).

  According to this feature, even if one of the plurality of intake portions is blocked, air can be taken in from the other intake portions.

[3-4]
In the gaming machine according to any one of [3-1] to [3-3], a support portion (for example, a support portion that is disposed on a back surface (rear surface) side of the surface portion (door frame 3B) and supports the surface portion so as to be opened and closed. , A gaming machine frame 3), intake means (for example, a fan unit) that is arranged on the back side of the support portion and takes in air from the intake portion, and air taken in from the intake portion Foreign matter intrusion prevention means (for example, a filter member having a filter) provided in an intake path (for example, an air duct) that guides the intake path to the intake means, and the intake path is provided on the surface portion side. It has a first intake path (for example, a first air duct) and a second intake path (for example, a second air duct, a third air duct, a fourth air duct) provided on the support portion side, and opens the surface portion. The first take-in route and the second take-in The communication with the path is released, and the foreign matter entry preventing means communicates with the first intake path in the second intake path (for example, the second communication port communicating with the first communication port). May be provided.

  According to this feature, foreign matter such as dust can be prevented from entering the back side of the front surface portion, and maintenance of the foreign matter entry preventing means can be easily performed by opening the front surface portion.

[3-5]
In the gaming machine according to any one of the above [3-1] to [3-4], air on the back surface (back surface) side of the front surface portion (for example, the door frame 3B) can be discharged into the gaming island, When discharging to the inside of the gaming island, it is discharged in a direction different from the circuit board (for example, the main board 11 or the effect control board 12) provided in the gaming machine (for example, hot air discharged from the heat radiation opening) May be discharged upward in a different direction from the main board 11 and the effect control board 12 below the heat radiation opening 230).

  According to this feature, it is possible to suppress abnormal operation due to the heat of the air discharged from the circuit board.

[3-6]
In any of the above game machines [3-1] to [3-5], a game medium (for example, a game ball) is installed in a game machine (for example, a pachinko game machine 1) installed inside the game island. A supply path (for example, a supply rod) for supplying the game machine is provided above the gaming machine, and air on the back side of the front surface portion can be discharged into the game island and discharged into the game island. At this time, it may be discharged toward the supply path (for example, when discharged into the game island, it is discharged upward from the heat radiation opening, that is, toward the upper supply tank).

  According to this feature, since the supply path can be warmed using the heat of the discharged air, it is possible to suitably suppress the dew condensation on the game medium in the supply path.

[3-7]
In any of the above game machines [3-1] to [3-6], the projection unit is forcibly terminated when the projection unit reaches a first temperature (for example, 70 degrees). And an error processing means for performing error processing when the projection means reaches a second temperature (for example, 40 to 65 degrees) lower than the first temperature, and a temperature setting changing means capable of changing the second temperature. (For example, the projection apparatus 400 is forcibly terminated when the internal temperature of the apparatus reaches a first temperature (for example, 70 degrees), and the projection apparatus 400 is lower than the first temperature.) When the second temperature (for example, 40 to 65 degrees) is reached, error processing (for example, error sound output, error display, etc.) is performed, and the second temperature can be changed by the user. It has a function.) It may be.

According to this feature, the second temperature corresponding to the use environment can be set on the user side, so that it is easy to take measures for preventing the forced termination of driving.

  Alternatively, a take-in portion for taking in air outside the game island is provided on the right side of the door frame 3B which is an example of a surface portion facing the outside of the game island when the pachinko gaming machine 1 is installed on the game island. It is good also as an aspect made. Or the taking-in part may be provided in the glass window which comprises some glass door frames.

  Moreover, two intake parts may be provided in the front surface of the glass window 50a. Specifically, the glass window 50a includes two glass plates and a holding frame that is provided so as to surround the glass plates and holds the glass plates so that a space is formed between the glass plates. ing. The glass plate is made of tempered glass, and the glass plate has an acrylic layer formed on the back surface of the glass plate.

  An intake portion is provided at the lower left of the front glass plate, an intake portion is provided at the lower right, and an exhaust portion is provided at the upper right of the rear glass plate. These intake part and exhaust part are formed by incorporating a synthetic resin plate in which a plurality of small-diameter round holes (see an enlarged view in FIG. 13) are formed in a notch formed in a part of the glass plate. Yes. In addition, a front end of an air duct provided on the game board 2 side is disposed in the exhaust part on the back side.

  In such a case, air outside the game island is taken in from the take-in portion by the rotation of the fan. The taken-in air rises in the space between the glass plates, is exhausted from the exhaust unit, and is supplied to the projection device via the air duct.

  These intake and exhaust portions are arranged outside the gaming area in a state where the front surface of the gaming machine frame 3 is closed by the door frame 3B, so that the visibility of game balls flowing down the gaming area may be hindered. There is no risk of affecting the flow of game balls. Moreover, even if foreign matter such as a wire is entered from the intake part by allowing the intake part to be disposed in the lower part and the exhaust part to be disposed in the upper part, it is possible to enter the back side of the glass window through the exhaust part. Because it becomes difficult, fraud can be suppressed.

  In addition, changes and modifications can be arbitrarily made without departing from the spirit of the present invention. For example, the present invention can also be applied to a so-called enclosed game machine.

  In each of the above embodiments, a pachinko machine is shown as a gaming machine. However, a predetermined number of wagers are set by inserting medals, and a plurality of types of symbols are rotated according to the operation of the operation lever by the player. When a symbol is stopped in response to a stop button operation by the player, a game (game) in which a predetermined number of medals are paid out to the player can be executed if the combination of the stopped symbols becomes a specific symbol combination The present invention can also be applied to slot machines (for example, slot machines equipped with one or more of big bonus, regular bonus, RT, AT, ART, and CZ (hereinafter referred to as a bonus)). As a means for displaying an image in such a slot machine, the projector, the screen, the sub LED, and the like described in the above embodiments and modifications may be provided.

  For example, a gaming machine according to the present invention is a slot machine as described above capable of playing a game as described above, and capable of playing a game, and a predetermined display image (for example, the slot The image display area (for example, the image display area formed on the screen provided in the slot machine) that displays the image projected from the projector provided in the machine and displayed on the screen provided in the slot machine) Projection means for projecting a display image onto the image display area from the projection direction (for example, a projector provided in the slot machine), and a frame buffer for storing display image data corresponding to the display image (for example, in the slot machine) Frame buffer area allocated to the provided SDRAM) and original image data (for example, provided in the slot machine). Projection control means (for example, VDP provided in the slot machine) that generates display image data based on the original image data ROM stored in the image data ROM and stores the display image data in the frame buffer. Is in a normal position (for example, a position where a display image is appropriately displayed when a display image based on display image data stored in the actual drawing area of the slot machine is displayed on a screen provided in the slot machine) Sometimes, the display image data generated without converting the original image data is stored in a first data storage area of the frame buffer (for example, an actual drawing area assigned to the SDRAM provided in the slot machine). When the display image is projected, the display image is displayed in the image display area (for example, the actual drawing area of the slot machine). The stored display image is displayed in the image display area of the slot machine), and the projection control means generates display image data generated without converting the original image data in the first data storage area of the frame buffer. When the display image is projected outside the image display area when the display image is projected after being stored in the projector (the projector provided in the slot machine is not in the normal position and is stored in the actual drawing area of the slot machine). Display image data is generated by converting the original image data so that the display image is displayed in the image display area (when the displayed image is not displayed in the image display area of the slot machine). Adjusting the image displayed on the screen provided in the frame buffer, and the generated display image data is stored in the first data storage area of the frame buffer and the first data. The slot machine can be stored over a second data storage area different from the data storage area (the drawing area provided in the slot machine, excluding the actual drawing area).

  A gaming machine according to the present invention is a slot machine as described above capable of playing a game as described above, and capable of playing a game, and a predetermined display image (for example, the slot The image display area (for example, the image display area formed on the screen provided in the slot machine) that displays the image projected from the projector provided in the machine and displayed on the screen provided in the slot machine) Projection means (for example, a projector provided in the slot machine) that projects a display image on the image display area from the projection direction of the image, and original image data (for example, an original image stored in an image data ROM provided in the slot machine) Display image data corresponding to the display image is generated on the basis of the data, and a frame buffer (for example, provided in the slot machine) Projection control means (for example, VDP provided in the slot machine) stored in a frame buffer area allocated to the SDRAM, and the projection control means includes a specific part (for example, the slot machine of the slot machine). Specific original image data in the original image data (for example, display image data corresponding to an image displayed in the 3D display area of the slot machine, according to an image displayed in the 3D display area). Original image data stored in a specific divided area) and a non-specific part excluding the specific part in the display image (for example, an image displayed in an area other than the stereoscopic display area of the slot machine), Non-specific original image data in the original image data (for example, display image data corresponding to an image displayed in an area other than the stereoscopic display area of the slot machine) There may be a slot machine, characterized in that the image data including the original image data, etc.) stored in the non-specific divided area of the slot machine, it is possible to independently transform.

  In addition, for example, a game score for use in a game is given and given using a frequency that is a game value of a size specified from the record information of a game recording medium such as a prepaid card or a membership card. The present invention may also be applied to a gaming machine in which a player plays a game by driving a game ball enclosed in the gaming machine using the gaming score given by winning the game score or winning a game.

  In the above description, the game machine is a game machine that uses a game medium. However, the game machine according to the present invention is not limited to a game machine that pays out a predetermined number of game media, and a game medium such as a game ball. May be applied to an enclosed game machine that gives a score when a prize granting condition is satisfied.

  1, 1A to 1G ... gaming machine (pachinko machine), 2 ... gaming board, 3 ... gaming machine frame, 3A ... gaming frame, 3B ... door frame, 4A ... first special symbol display device, 4B ... second special Symbol display device, 5 ... main screen, 5H ... hold display area, 6A ... normal winning ball device, 6B ... normal variable winning ball device, 7 ... special variable winning ball device, 8 ... speaker, 9 ... game effect lamp, 11 ... Main board, 12 ... Production control board, 13 ... Audio control board, 14 ... Lamp control board, 15 ... Relay board, 16 ... Power supply board, 20 ... Normal symbol display, 21 ... Gate switch, 22A ... First start port switch , 22B ... second start port switch, 23 ... count switch, 25A ... first hold indicator, 25B ... second hold indicator, 25C ... usual hold indicator, 26 ... logo accessory, 27 ... decorative structure, 28 ... reflective mirror, 31A ... Tick controller, 31B ... push button, 32 ... projector, 33 ... sub LED, 41 ... pass gate, 100 ... microcomputer for game control, 101, 121 ... ROM, 102, 122 ... RAM, 103 ... CPU, 104, 124 ... Random number circuit, 105, 125 ... I / O, 120 ... Production control CPU, 123 ... Display control unit, 205 ... Special screen device, 205A ... Special screen, 262A ... Real drawing area, 262R ... Drawing area

Claims (1)

A gaming machine capable of playing a game,
Projecting means for projecting a display image onto the image display area from a projection direction oriented obliquely with respect to an image display area for displaying a predetermined display image;
A frame buffer for storing display image data corresponding to the display image;
Projection control means for generating display image data based on the original image data and storing the display image data in the frame buffer,
When the projection means is in the normal position and the display image data generated without converting the original image data is stored in the first data storage area of the frame buffer and the display image is projected, The display image is displayed in the image display area,
The projection control means stores the display image data generated without converting the original image data in the first data storage area of the frame buffer and projects the display image. When projected outside the display area, the original image data is converted to generate display image data so that the display image is displayed in the image display area, and the generated display image data is stored in the frame buffer. Can be stored over a first data storage area and a second data storage area different from the first data storage area,
A gaming machine, wherein a deviation in color tone of a projected image in the image display area caused by a projection state from the projection unit to the image display area is adjusted.

Images